Scope of Job - Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited

Transcription

Attachment-2
Page 1 of 219
Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Ltd.
Mundra Delhi Pipeline, MDPL Operations H.O- Jaipur-302017
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
Scope of Job
JUSTIFICATION
For the construction of the New MDPL HO at Sanganer-Jaipur Civil & structural works is required.
This Tender enquiry is generated for floating the tender to limited parties for the taking up civil &
structural works for the construction of the New MDPL HO at Sanganer.
Delivery period - 8 Months
Time Period is the essence of the contract. Party to complete job, in 8 months, from the date of
placement of LOI/PO/FOA, whichever is earlier.
Job site Address - HPCL Depot, Sitapura Industrial Area, Sanganer, Jaipur
Scope of Job/Notes
1. The scope of job for the contractor shall be, but not limited to, construction of the MDPL HO
building as per the technical specification, Schedule of Rates, Terms & conditions of the
contract.
2. The scope shall be include but not limited to, excavation, PCC, RCC, building construction, all
types of civil and structural works, construction of the parking sheds, sheeting, brick work,
plaster, architectural works, aluminum works, painting works, plumbing and sanitary works,
road crossings, drainage works, site grading, cleaning and micro grading, construction of roads
& pavements, dismantling of old structures if any etc. as per the technical specifications, terms
& conditions & schedule of rates.
3. Party to visit the site ands shall get acquainted with the present condition of the site before
quoting.
4. Party has to submit the Quality Assurance Plan for the approval of EIC.
5. Party shall set up laboratory at site for the testing of the various materials at site.
Following testing at the minimum shall be done at site.
a. Sieve analysis for sand & aggregates
b. Cube testing with UTM.
c. Any other tests as per the IS or as per the directions of EIC.
d. Silt content
e. Moisture content
f. Weight
g. Compressive strength for bricks
Signature & Seal of the Bidder
Attachment 2
Page 2 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
6. All the testing of the materials and the testing frequency shall be as per IS.
7. Party shall follow the procedures of the HPCL like the gate pass system, material accounting
system etc.
8. For all the bought out items and materials to be used in the construction party shall take prior
approval pf the EIC and shall form the part of QAP.
9. Party shall keep all the 10 CTE registers updated. Sample of the registers are attached.
10. Party shall follow the SHE procedures of HPCL.
11. Party shall ensure very good house keeping, cleaning at site at all the times during the
construction.
12. Only the First Quality material from the approved vendor list shall be used by the contractor.
13. Contractor shall arrange for its own water, electricity, site office etc. All the material, labour,
tools, machinery shall be arranged by the contractor. Cost of all the material, labour, tools
tackles and machinery if any shall be included in rates quoted by the contractor.
14. Contractor to ensure the deputation of manpower as per the key construction personnel
schedule.
15. Contractor shall be responsible for workmanship, quality of construction and shall rectify
defects if any as per the direction of EIC.
16. Contractor shall take all the levels before starting of any works and after completion of any
works. The level shall be offered for joint verification and after the joint verification the levels
shall recorded in the proper CTE registers/formats. No payments will be made to the contractor
in the absence of verified levels.
17. Cement shall be of approved brand and shall be PPC-53 grade.
18. In case of contradiction between the various specifications & SOR the decision of EIC shall be
final & binding.
19. Contractor shall keep the site in very good & beat condition. Contractor shall be responsible
for all the Debris and scattered construction material. Contractor shall be cleaning all the debris
& such material on day to day basis.
20. Party shall be responsible for coordinating with the other agencies like electrical etc. and shall
be responsible for providing the timely front to the other agency and complete the job in
stipulated time.
SCOPE OF HPCL- GOOD FOR CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS ONLY.
Attachment 2
Page 3 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
Technical Terms
And
Conditions
Attachment 2
Page 4 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
1.00.01 PREAMBLE
1.01.0 The scope of work involves complete works FOR FOLLOWING
a. Product pump house & manifold civil works
b. Fire water pump house.
c. TTF Gantry.
d. Parking sheds
e. Watch tower
f. Lube warehouse
g. Calibration shed
h. Sealing platform
i. Blue dye, Turbo, Power Dosing system
j. Grease Drum Shed
k. Underground tank Installation/testing/calibration.
l. Catwalk path ways.
1.02.0
The contractor will be required to work in close co-ordination with
other contractor working in the area.
1.03.00
The Contractor will have to draw up the program of work in consultation with
the Consultants and the project authorities to match with the overall project
quirements.
2.00.00
DRAWINGS
2.01.00
The work shall be executed in accordance with the specification and the
drawings ìssued for construction’. Drawings will be issued in stages in close
coordination with the availability of data and sequence of construction. Only
latest revisions of the drawings shall
be followed. All old revisions shall be
clearly marked SUPERCEEDED’ and kept
separately or destroyed as
directed by HPCL .
Attachment 2
Page 5 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
3.00.00
SITE RECORDS
3.01.00
All works shall be recorded in appropriate proforma to be firmed up by the
contractor in consultation with the HPCL. Where ever required reference to
drawings and clauses of specification shall be recorded in the correspondence.
3.02.00
Records of cement and steel receipts, issue, and consumption shall be
scrutinized from time to time by Owner. Statement of cement and steel receipts,
statement of theoretical consumption and reconciliation accompany every bill.
Records of spot levels jointly recorded before the start of the work shall form
the basis of all measurements.
4.00.00
4.01.00
SCOPE OF WORK
The work to be performed under this specification consists of providing all
labour, materials, construction equipment, tools and plant, scaffolding,
supplies, transportation, all incidental items not shown or specified, but
reasonably implied or necessary for successful completion of the work including
Contractor’s supervision and in strict accordance with the drawings and
specifications. The nature of work shall generally involve earthwork in
excavation including hard rock/ soft rock, extensive dewatering, shoring and
strutting, backfilling around completed structures and plinth filling, disposal of
surplus excavated materials, piling, concreting including reinforcement and
formwork, brick work, inserts, steel gratings, architectural items & finishes such
as plastering painting, flooring, etc., anchor bolts, RCC trenches with covers,
laying of GI pipes and other ancillary items.
4.02.00
The layout and levels of all structures, etc. shall be made by the owner at his
own cost from the general grid of the plot and bench mark given by the owner .
He shall provide all instrument, materials and men to the HPCL for checking
the layout and levels. However, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for
correctness of layout and levels
4.03.00
The drawings included in the Bidding Document provide a general idea about
the work to be performed under the scope of this contract. These are
preliminary drawings for bidding purposes only and are by no means the final
drawings or show the full range of the work under the scope. Work has to be
executed according to drawings prepared by the contractor and approved by the
Owner .
Attachment 2
Page 6 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
4.04.00
The contractor will be required to set up site laboratory at his own cost and
maintain all the equipment in proper condition with all calibration and
certificates of the equipment. The site laboratory will be manned by
independent qualified engineer. The cost of setting up site laboratory and
performance of all the tests shall be borne by the Contractor. In case any
specific test such as testing of reinforcement, testing of specific materials
requiring specialist equipment and conditions, shall be done in approved
laboratories. The cost of such tests and the arrangements for witnessing such
tests shall be borne by the Contractor
4.05.00
The scope of work also includes clearance of site of any vegetation, bushes,
scrap, debris, etc. before starting the work and recording spot levels at the site
of work as well as storage areas. The cost of such clearance shall be included in
the quoted rates. The Contractor shall also clear the construction site of all
debris and construction materials before handing over.
4.05.00
All specimens and approved samples shall be retained with the HPCL for
reference unless handed over to Contractor for safe custody. The Contractor
shall make arrangements for proper storage of the same.
4.06.00
The Contractor shall adopt dewatering methods as approved by HPCL in case
ground water is encountered . The period for which the de-watering should be
in effect shall be as directed by the HPCL. The cost of dewatering shall be borne
by the Contractor for locations.
5.00.00
5.01.00
APPROVAL AND TESTS
A high standard of quality is required for all materials and workmanship in
construction work. They shall be best of the kind obtainable indigenously in
each case and shall be procured from manufacturers of repute in order to
ensure uniformity of quality and timely supply.
5.02.00
All materials shall be subjected to inspection and testing. The Contractor shall
submit samples for testing as may be required by the Owner . Sampling and
testing shall be carried out in accordance with relevant IS Standards.
5.03.00
Where ever IS codes are referred, they shall be latest edition/ publication as on
date irrespective of the date of finalisation of the work.
Attachment 2
Page 7 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
6.00.00
REJECTION OF MATERIALS
6.01.00
Any material brought to site which, in the opinion of the HPCL is damaged,
contaminated, deteriorated or does not comply with the requirement of this
specification shall be rejected.
6.02.00
If the routine tests or random site tests show that any of the materials, brought
to site, do not comply in any way with the requirements of this specification or
of IS codes as applicable, then that material shall be rejected.
6.03.0
The Contractor at his own cost shall remove from site any and all such rejected
material within the time specified by the Owner.
Attachment 2
Page 8 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
C-01:
EARTH WORK AND BACKFILLING
1.00.0
SCOPE
1.01.00
This section of the specification covers the technical requirements rexcavation and
filling & around structures, buildings, pipes, foundations, trenches, pits, drains,
channels, cable ducts, underground facilities & similar works. It also covers filling
areas and plinths with selected materials, conveyance and disposal of surplus spoils
and/or stacking them properly as directed by the Owner .
1.02.00
The contractor shall be fully responsible for proper setting out works, profiling in
excavation, stacking, etc. taking adequate safety measures etc. The Contractor shall
carry out all works meant within the intent of this specification even if not
explicitly mentioned herein. All works shall be executed to the satisfaction of the
Owner .
1.03.00
Existing trees, shrubs, any other plants, pole lines, fences, signs, monuments,
buildings, pipelines, drains, sewers or other surface or subsurface systems/ dainage
facilities within or adjacent to the works being carried out which are not to be
disturbed, shall be protected from damage by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
provide and install suitable safeguards approved by the Owner for this purpose.
1.04.0
During excavation, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions against soil
erosion, water & environmental pollution, and where required undertake
additional works to achieve this objective. Before start of operations, the
Contractor shall submit to the Owner for approval, his work plan and the
procedure he intends to follow for disposal of waste materials etc. and the schedule
for carrying out temporary and permanent control works. However, the approval of
the Owner to such plans and procedures shall not absolve the Contractor of his
responsibility for safe and sound work.
2.00.00
GENERAL
2.01.0
The Contractor shall make his own surveying arrangements for locating
thecoordinates and positions of all work and establishing the reduced levels(RL’s)
at these locations based on two reference grid lines and one benchmark which will
be furnished by the Owner. The Contractor has to provide atsite all the required
survey instruments, along with qualified surveyors, to thesatisfaction of the Owner
so that the work can be carried out accuratelyand according to the specification and
drawings.
2.02.00
The Contractor shall furnish all skilled and unskilled labour, plant, tools,tackle,
equipment, men and materials required for complete execution of the work in
accordance with the drawings and as described herein and/or as directed by the
Owner.
Attachment 2
Page 9 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
2.03.00
The Contractor shall control the grade in the vicinity of all excavations so that the
surface of the ground will be properly sloped or dyked to prevent surface water
from running into the excavated areas during construction.
2.04.00
All materials obtained from excavation shall remain the Owner’s roperty. All
salvaged materials of archeological importance or of value (in the opinion of the
Owner) shall be segregated from the other materials and both stacked separately
and in a regular manner at location indicated by the Owner.
2.05.0
Excavation shall include removal of trees including roots & organic remains,
vegetation, grass, bushes, shrubs, plants, poles, fences etc. that are in the area to be
excavated as well as beyond the excavation line so as to ensure safety of the
excavated side slopes and of men and equipment operating in the area.Before start
of excavation work, joint measurements of ground level shall betaken after clearing
all grass, vegetation etc.
Excavation shall include the removal of all materials required to execute thework
properly and shall be made with sufficient clearance as decided by theowner to
permit the placing and setting of forms, inspection and completion of all works to
the satisfaction of the owner for which the excavation was done.
2.06.0
2.07.00
2.07.01
Classification of Earth Work : The earth work shall be classified under the
following main categories.
a) All types of soils, murrum, boulders.
b) Soft rock.
c) Hard rock.
Ordinary soils: This includes earth, murrum, top deposits of agricultural
soil,reclaimed soil, clay, sand or any combination thereof and soft and hard
murrum, shingle etc., which is loose enough to be removed with spades shovel and
pick axes. Boulders not more than 0.03 cum. in volume found during the course of
excavation shall also fall under this classification.
2.07.02
Soft Rock : This shall include all materials which are rock or hard conglomerate, all
decomposed weathered rock, highly fissured rock, old masonry, boulders bigger
than 0.03 cum in volume but not bigger than 0.5 cum and other varieties of soft
rock which can be removed only with pick axes, crow bars, wedges and hammers
with some difficulty. The mere fact that the contractor resorts to blasting and / or
wedging and chiselling for reasons of his own, shall not mean the rock is
classifiable as hard rock.
2.07.03
Hard Rock: This includes all rock other than soft rock mentioned in para 2.07.02
viz. Soft rock, occurring in masses, boulders having approximate volume more than
0.5 cum plain or reinforced cement concrete, which can best be removed by
blasting or chiselling and wedging where blasting cannot be permitted owing to any
restriction at site.
Attachment 2
Page 10 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
3.00.00
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.01 .00
All standards, specifications, acts and code of practice referred to herein shall be
the latest editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions.
In case of conflict between this specification and those (IS standards, codesetc.)
referred to here-in, the former shall prevail.
3.02.00
3.03.0
Some of the relevant Indian standards, Acts and Codes are referred to
here below:
IS: 383 1970 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete.
IS 2720 (Part- 2) 1973 Methods of test for soils-Determination of water content
IS 2720 (Part4-4 ) 1985 Methods of test for soils-Grain size analysis
IS 2720 (Part-5 ) 1985 Methods of test for soils-Determination of liquid limit & plastic limit
IS 2720 (Part-6 ) 1972 Methods of test for soils-Determination of shrinkage factors
IS 2720 (Part-7 ) 1980 Methods of test for soils-Determination of water content-Dry density relation
using light compaction
IS 2720 (Part-8 ) 1983 Methods of test for soils- Determination of water content-Dry density relation
using heavy compaction
IS 2720 (Part-14 ) 1983 Methods of test for soils-Determination of dry index(relative density)
IS 2720 (Part-21 ) 1977 Methods of test for soils-Determination of total soluble solids
IS 2720 (Part-23 ) 1976 Methods of test for soils-Determination of calcium corbonate
IS 2720 (Part-24 ) 1976 Methods of test for soils-Determination of cation exchange capacity
IS 2720 (Part-27 ) 1977 Methods of test for soils-Determination of total soluble sulphates
IS 2720 (Part-29 ) 1975 Methods of test for soils-Determination of dry density of soil in-place by core
cutter method
IS: 3764 1992 Safety code for excavation work
IS: 4081 1986 Safety code for blasting and related drilling operations
IS: 4701 1982 Code of practice for earth work on canals
IS: 9759 1981 Guide lines of dewatering during construction
IS: 10379 1982 Code of practice for field control of moisture and compaction of soils for embankment
and sub grade Indian Explosives Act 1940 as updated.
4.00.00
EXCAVATION IN SOIL
4.01.00
Side and bottom of excavation shall be cut sharp and true to line and level.
Undercutting shall not be permitted. When machines are used for excavation, the
last 300 mm before reaching the required level shall be excavated manually or by
such equipment that soil at the required final level will be left in its natural
condition. Suitability of strata (at the bottom of excavations) for laying the
foundation thereon shall be determined by the Owner.
Attachment 2
Page 11 of 219
4.02.00
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
Excavation for foundation shall be to the bottom of lean concrete and as
shown on drawing or as directed by the Owner. The bottom of all excavations shall
be trimmed to required levels and when excavation is carried below such levels by
error, it shall be brought back to the specified level by filling with concrete of
nominal mix 1:3:6 (cement: coarse sand: 40 mm down aggregates) as directed by
the Owner.
4.03.0
The Contractor shall ascertain for himself the nature of materials tobe excavated
and the difficulties, if any, likely to be encountered in executing this work.,
sheeting, shoring, bracing, maintaining suitable slopes, draining etc. shall be
provided and installed by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Owner.
4.04.0
All excavation for installation of underground facilities, such as pipe ines, sewer
line, drain lines etc. shall be open cuts. For deep and huge excavations and in other
excavations, if required by the Owner, the Contractor shall submit for Owner’s
approval an “Excavation Scheme” showing the methodology to be adopted for
excavation in order to maintain the stability of side slopes, means for ensuring
safety of existing facilities nearby, dewatering. However, the Contractor shall be
fully responsible for the scheme irrespective of any approvals granted. Benching
shall be provided for deeper excavation wherever required.
4.05.00
When excavation requires bracing, sheeting or shoring etc. the Contractor shall
submit drawings to the Owner, showing arrangements and details of proposed
installation. The Contractor shall also furnish all supporting calculations as called
for and shall not proceed until he has received written approval from the Owner.
However, the responsibility for adequacy of such bracing, sheeting, shorting etc.
will rest with the Contractor, irrespective of any approval of the Owner.
4.06.0
The Contractor shall have to constantly pump out any water collected
in excavated pits and other areas due to rain water, springs etc. and maintain dry
working conditions at all times until the excavation, placement of reinforcement,
shuttering, concreting, backfilling is completed. The Contractor shall remove all
slush/muck from the excavated areas to keep the work area dry. Sludge pumps, if
required, shall be employed by the Contractor for this purpose.
4.07.00
The Contractor shall remove all materials arising from excavations from the
vicinity of the work either for direct filling, stacking the subsequent filling or for
ultimate disposal as directed by the Owner. In no case shall the excavated soil be
stacked within a distance of 1.5 m from the edge of excavation or one third the
depth of excavation whichever is more. Material to be used for filling shall be kept
separately.
Attachment 2
Page 12 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
5.00.00
5.01.00
5.01.01
EXCAVATION IN ROCK
General
All clauses from 4.01.00 to 4.07.00 shall be applicable to excavation in rock also. In
case of any discrepancy between the above mentioned clause and those specified in
this clause then this clause shall govern.
5.01.02
For the work of excavation in rock, Contractor shall engage specialised agency
having experience of excavation in rock involving wedging and blasting. The agency
shall be subject to approval of owner and the Contractor shall furnish details of
relevant experience in support while seeking approval for the agency.
5.01.03
In case of overbreaks in rock excavation, the excavated level shall be brought to the
level shown on drawings with plain cement concrete of nominal mix 1:3:6 as
described in para 4.02.00.
5.02.00
Excavation by Blasting
5.02.01
Blasting shall be resorted to only with the written permission of the Owner. All the
statutory laws, (Explosives Act etc.) rules, regulations, Indian Standards etc.
pertaining to the acquisition, transport, storage, handling and use of explosives etc.
shall be strictly followed.
5.02.02
The contractor shall obtain Licenses from Competent Authorities for undertaking
blasting work as well as for procuring, transporting to site and storing the
explosives as per Explosives Act. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe
transport, use, custody and proper accounting of the explosive materials.
5.02.03
The Contractor may adopt any method of blasting as permitted according to
explosives act/rule consistent with the safety and job requirements (after approval
from the Owner) and so as not to injure men or damage materials/structures
during blasting operations.
5.02.04
The magazine for the storage of explosives shall be built by the Contractor to the
designs and specifications of the Explosives Department concerned and located at
the approved site. No unauthorised person shall be admitted into the magazine
which, when not in use, shall be kept securely locked. No matches or inflammable
material shall be allowed in the magazine. The magazine shall have an effective
lightning conductor and the following shall be hung in the lobby of the magazine.
a) A copy of the relevant rules regarding safe storage, both in English and in the
language(s) with which the workers concerned are familiar.
b) A statement of up to date stock in the magazine.
c) A certificate showing the last date of testing of the lightning conductor
d) A notice stating that smoking is strictly prohibited.
Attachment 2
Page 13 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
5.02.05
The Contractor shall also observe any specific instructions given by the Owner. The
Contractor shall be responsible and liable for damage to property and any accident
which may occur to workmen or to the public or to materials on account of any
operation connected with the storage, transportation, handling or use of explosives
and the blasting operations. The owner or his authorised representative shall
frequently check the Contractor’s compliance with these precautions and the
manner of storing and accounting of explosives. The Contractor shall provide
necessary facilities for this.
5.02.06
All materials, tools and equipments used for blasting operations shall be of
approved make and type. In special cases, the owner may specify the type of
explosives to be allowed. The fuse to be used in wet locations shall be sufficiently
water resistant so as to be unaffected when immersed in water for 30 minutes. The
rate of burning of the fuse shall be uniform and precisely known to permit
evaluation of the distance to which the firer should move before explosion takes
place. Detonators shall be capable of effective blasting of the explosives.
5.02.07
The blasting powder, explosives, detonators, fuses etc. shall be fresh and not
damaged due to dampness or any other Cause. Explosives shall be kept dry and
shall not be exposed to direct rays of the sun or be stored in the vicinity of fire,
stoves, steam pipes, or heated metal etc. They shall be inspected before use and
damaged articles shall be discharged totally and removed from site immediately.
5.03.0
Blasting Operations
5.03.01
The blasting operations shall remain in the charge of a responsible, competent,
authorised and experienced supervisor (called Man-in-Charge) and workmen who
are thoroughly acquainted with the details of handling explosives and blasting
operation and with the rules governing such work.
5.03.02
All rules under the Explosives Act and other local rules in force shall be fully
observed. All blasting works shall be done in accordance with the stipulations
contained in IS: 4081. Blasting shall only be carried out at certain specified times
preferably during the mid-day lunch time or at the close of work as directed in
writing by the Owner. The hours when blasting will be done, shall be made known
to people in the vicinity. All the charges shall be prepared by the Man-in-Charge (as
defined in 5.03.01) above) only. Proper precautions for safety of persons and
property shall be taken.
Attachment 2
Page 14 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
5.03.03
Prior to blasting, red danger flags shall be displayed prominently around the area
to be blasted and shall be kept in position until blasting work i s completed. All
people, except those who actually light the fuses, shall be prohibited from entering
this area. The flags shall be planted 200 metres from the blasting site and all
persons including workmen shall be evacuated from the flagged area atleast 10
minutes before firing. A warning whistle shall be sounded for this purpose.
5.03.04
Controlled Blasting shall be carried out within 200 metres of an existing structure
unless otherwise permitted by the owner in writing. Where (generally with in plant
area) controlled blasting is to be carried out in the proximity of other structures,
then sand bags and/or earth bags etc. shall be used on top of the blast holes to
prevent the rock fragments from causing damage to adjacent structures and
property. At all stages of blasting operations, precautions shall be taken to preserve
the rock in the soundest possible condition below and beyond the lines specified for
the excavation.
The quantity and strength of explosives used shall be such that it will neither
damage nor crack the rock outside the limits of excavation. Any method of blasting
which leads to overshooting shall be discontinued.
No explosive shall be brought near the work in excess of the quantity required for a
particular amount of firing to be done and surplus left after filling holes shall be
removed to the magazine. A careful and day to day account of the explosives shall
be maintained by the Contractor in an approved manner and in an identified
register, which shall be open to inspection by the owner at all time.
5.03.05
5.03.06
At a time not more than ten such charges shall be prepared and fired. The man-inCharges shall blow the whistle in a recognised manner for cautioning the people.
The number of blasts to be fired and actual number of shots heard shall be
compared and the person responsible shall satisfy himself by examination that all
blasts have exploded before any person working in the area is permitted to reapproach the work site. Sufficient time shall be allowed to account for delayed
blasts. The Man-in-Charge shall inspect all the charge. The withdrawal of the
unexploded charge shall not be permitted under any circumstances. After tamping,
the unexploded charge shall be flooded with water and the hole marked in a
distinguishable manner. Another hole shall be jumped at a distance of 450 mm
from the old hole and fired in the usual way. This process shall be continued till
the original blast is exploded. The Man-in- Charge shall at once report to the
Contractor’s office and the Owner, al l cases of misfire, the cause for the same and
what steps where taken in connection therewith.
Attachment 2
Page15 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
5.03.07
If misfire is found to be due to defective materials, the whole quantity in the box
form which the defective materials was taken must be sent to the Authority
directive by the owner for inspection to ascertain whether any of the remaining
materials in the box are also defective.
5.04.00
Chiselling / Wedging Where blasting is prohibited for any reasons or
it is not practicable in the opinion of the Owner, then the excavation shall be
carried out by chiselling, wedging or any other approved method. The decision of
the owner in this regard shall be final binding on Contractor.
5.05.00
Line drilling and pre-shearing The number, size and location of holes shall be
carefully worked out by the Contractor and shall be subject to the approval of the
Owner. Line drilled holes shall generally be 48 mm dia. and, if so directed, interior
blasting holes shall also be made. The Contractor shall carry out test to determine
the amount of explosives required to ensure an even break at the line drilled holes
after the interior holes are blasted and irregularities in the vertical drilled line face
shall be removed and trimmed by wedging, splitting, chiselling and barring.
6.00.0
EXCAVATION BELOW GROUND WATER TABLE
6.01.00
Wherever ground water table is met with during excavation, the Contractor
shall immediately report this fact to the owner who shall arrange to record the
exact level of the water table before start of dewatering operation. The decision of
the Consultant regarding sub-soil water level shall be final and binding on the
Contractor. Ground Water Table for the purpose of this clause shall be taken as the
level of standing water observed during the process of excavation. Capillary action
of water in the surrounding soil mass shall not be considered for the above
purpose.
6.02.00
The Contractor shall dewater and maintain dry working conditions by
maintaining the water table below the bottom of the excavation level by wellpoint
dewatering or deep well dewatering or any other method approved by the Owner.
He shall continue doing so till excavation, concreting, curing, and all other
operation included in the scope of work, which require dry condition in the area are
completed.
7.00.00
LIFT
The Contractor is required to excavate upto any depth as shown on the drawings or
as directed by the Owner. Lifting of excavated materials shall be done either by
manual or mechanical or both means if called for by the Owner.
Attachment 2
Page 16 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
8.00.00
CARRIAGE OF MATERIALS
8.01.00
The disposal/ stacking areas for excavated materials shall be indicated by the
Owner. The carriage of excavated materials shall be done by the methods
mentioned below:
a) The excavated materials shall be carried beyond the initial lead of 50 m but upto
500 m by manual /animal labour or by mechanical means. If directed by the Owner
this material shall be used directly for filling purposes.
b) For leads exceeding 500 m the Contractor shall transport the
excavated
materials by mechanical means only and as directed by the Owner.The Contractor
may be allowed to carry materials through Kuccha roads.Providing and
maintaining of the Kuccha roads shall be the responsibilityof the Contractor. The
transported material shall be neatly stacked asdirected by the Owner.
8.02.00
9.00.00
9.01 .00
9.01.01
9.01.02
Some excavated materials required for filling purposes, may have to be carried
upto a lead of 500 m and stacked as per instructions of the Owner. Excavated
materials carried beyond 500 m shall normally be for disposal purpose only.
Double handling of materials shall be avoided as far as possible.
However, depending on site condition excavated materials carried beyond a lead of
500 m may also be required to be brought back for filling purpose.
FILLING
Materials
Materials to be used for filling purpose shall be stone, sand or other inorganic
materials and they shall be clean and free from shingle, salts, organic matter, large
roots and excessive amount of sod, lumps, concrete or any other foreign substances
which could harm or impair the strength of the substances in any manner. All clods
shall be suitably broken to small pieces. When the materialsare mostly rock
boulders, these shall be broken into pieces not larger then 150 mm size. Sand used
for filling shall be clean, medium grained and free from impurities. Fines less than
75 microns shall not be more than 20%. In any case, the materials to be used for
filling purposes shall have the prior written approval of the Owner.
If excavated materials are to be used for filling, then the Contractor shall select the
materials from the stockpile, land and transport this material and execute the
filling. This shall include excavation of earth which may become hard due to laying
in stock yard for a long period of time.
Attachment 2
Page 17 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
9.01.03
In case the materials have to be brought from pits/quarries, it shall be the
Contractor’s responsibility for identification of such quarry areas, obtaining
approval from their use from concerned authorities, excavation/quarryingloading
and carriage of such material, unloading and filling at specified locations. The
Contractor shall pay any fees, royalities etc. that may have to be paid for utilization
of borrow areas.
9.02.00
Filling Procedure
9.02.01
After completion of foundation, footings, walls and other construction below the
elevation of the final grades, and prior to filling, all temporary shoring,timber etc.
shall be sequentially removed and the excavation cleaned of all trash, debris, and.
perishable materials. Filling shall begin only with the written approval of the
Owner. Also, areas identified for filling shall be cleared of all soft pockets,
vegetation, bushes, slash etc. In case of plinth and similar filling the ground shall
be dressed and consolidated by ramming and light rolling.
Fill materials shall not be dropped directly upon or against any structure or facility
where there is danger of displacement or damage. Filling shall be started after the
concrete/masonry has fully set and shall be carried out in such a manner so as not
to cause any undue lateral thrust on any part of the structure.
9.02.02
9.02.03
All space between foundation (concrete or masonry) and the sides excavation shall
be filled to the original surface after making allowance for settlement, Fill shall be
placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 200 mm loose thickness. Each layer shall
be watered and compacted with proper moisture content and with such equipment
as may be required to obtain a compaction/density as specified. Trucks or heavy
equipment for depositing or compacting fill shall not be used within 1.5 meters of
building walls, piers for operation. The methods of compaction shall be subjected
to approval of Owner under any circumstances.
9.02.04
Fill adjacent to pipes shall be free of stones, concrete etc. and shall be
hand placed and compacted uniformly on both sides of the pipe and where
practicable up to a minimum depth of 300 mm over the top of pipes. While
tamping around the pipes, care should be taken to avoid unequal pressure.
9.02.05
Filling shall be accurately finished to line, slope, cross section and grade as shown
on the drawings. Finished surface shall be free of irregularities and depressions
and shall be within 20 mm of the specified level.
Attachment 2
Page 18 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
9.02.06
Where filling with stone from excavated materials is specified, it shall be from
broken pieces of boulders. At first a 75 mm thick cushion of selected earth shall be
laid over which the 200 mm thick graded stones shall be laid in loose layers of 200
mm then the interstices filled with properly graded fine materials consisting of
selected earth brought from borrow areas. Each layer shall be watered and
compared to the specified density before the next layer is laid. However, no
cushion shall be required where filling is over non-rocky surface.
9.02.07
Where filling with 65 mm down graded stone obtained from excavated, it shall be
selected stone laid over and initial 50 mm thick cushion layer of selected earth and
then stone laid in 200 m loose thick layers, interstices filled with the specified
density before the next layer in laid. However, no cushion shall, be required where
filling is over non-rocky surface.
9.02.08
Where clean stone fill is specified, it shall consist of clean selected stone metal of
40 mm nominal size. It shall be laid in layers not exceeding 150 mm (loose) and
lightly tamped before the next layer is laid. No compaction shall be required for
this type stone filling.
9.03.00
Compaction
9.03.01
Where compaction to 95% Standard Proctor Density or more is called for, it shall
be by mechanical means only. Where access is possible, compaction shall be by 12
tonne rollers smooth wheeled, sheep foot or wobbly wheeled as directed by the
Owner. A smaller weight roller may be permitted by the Owner in special cases, but
in any case not less than 10 passes of the roller will be accepted for each layer. Each
layer shall be wetted or the material dried by aeration to a moisture content of 35% above the Optimum Moisture Content to be determined by the Contractor.
Each layer shall be watered, rammed and compacted to the density as specified
Owner.
9.03.02
For compacting each sand layer, water shall be sprayed over it to flood it and it
shall be kept flooded for 24 hours to ensure maximum compaction.
Vibrocompactors shall also be used if necessary to obtain the required degree of
compaction. Any temporary works required to contain sand under flooded
condition shall also be undertaken. The surface of the consolidated sand shall be
dressed to required levels or slope.
9.03.03
After the compacted fill has reached the desired level, the surface shall be flooded
with water for 24 hours, allowed to dry and then rammed and consolidated to avoid
any settlement, at a later date. The compacted surface shall be properly shaped,
trimmed and consolidated to an even gradient or level. All soft spots shall be
excavated, filled and consolidated.
Attachment 2
Page 19 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
9.03.04
The degree of compaction of compacted fill in place will be subject to tests
by the Owner as the work progresses, and the contractor shall provide the
necessary facilities to make such tests. If any test indicates that the compaction
achieved is less than the specified degree of compaction, the Owner may require fill
placed subsequent to the last successful test to be removed and recompacted by the
Contractor. Compaction procedure shall be amended as necessary to obtain
satisfactory results.
9.03.05
When semi-compacted fill is specified by the Owner, the contractor shall fill up
such areas with available earth from stock piles of borrow pits or directly from
excavation without special compaction except that obtained by moving trucks etc.
10.00.00
SAMPLING, TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL
10.01.00
10.01.01
General
The contractor shall carry out all sampling and testing in accordance with the
relevant Indian Standards and/or International Standards and shall conduct such
tests as are called for by the Owner. Where no specific testing procedure is
mentioned, the tests shall be carried out as per the prevalent accepted Owner
ringing practice to the directions of the Owner. Tests shall be done in the field and
at a laboratory approved by the Owner and the Contractor shall submit to the
Owner, the test results in triplicate within three days after completion of a test. The
Owner may, at his discretion, waive some of the stipulations given below, for small
and unimportant operations.
10.01.02
Work found unsuitable for acceptance shall be removed and replaced by the
contractor. The work shall be redone as per specification requirements and to the
satisfaction of the Owner.
10.01.03
Only as a very special case aid that too in non-critical areas, the Owner may accept
filling work which is marginally unacceptable as per the criteria laid down. For
such accepted work, payment shall be made at a reduced rate pro-rata to the
compaction obtained against that stipulated.
10.02.00
Quality Assurance Program
The contractor shall submit and finalise a detailed field Quality Assurance Program
within 30 days from the date of award of the Contract according to the
requirements of the specification. This shall include setting up of a testing
laboratory, arrangement of testing apparatus /equipment, deployment of qualified
/ experienced manpower, reparation of format for record, Field Quality plan etc.
On finalised field quality plan the Owner shall identity Customer hold points
beyond which work shall not proceed without written approval from the Owner.
Attachment 2
Page 20 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
10.03.00
Frequency of sampling and testing including the methods for conducting
the tests shall be as per IS codal provisions. The testing frequencies set forth are
the desirable minimum and the Owner shall have the full authority to carry out or
call for tests as frequently as he may deem necessary to satisfy himself that the
materials and work comply with the appropriate specifications.
10.04.00
Acceptance Criteria
10.04.01
Following Acceptance Criteria shall be as under:
a) All individual samples collected and tested should pass without any
deviation when only one set of sample is tested.
b) For re-test of any sample two additional samples shall be collected and tested
and both should pass without any deviation.
c) Where a large number of samples are tested for a particular test, 9 samples out
of every 10 consecutive samples tested shall meet the specification requirement.
d) Tolerance on finished levels for important filling areas at approved interval shall
be + 20 mm. However, for an unimportant area, tolerance upto + 75 mm shall be
acceptable at the discretion of the Owner. However, these tolerances shall be
applicable for localised areas only.
Attachment 2
Page 21 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
SOLING & HARD CORE
1.00.00
GENERAL
1.01.00
The work covered under this specification includes all type of soling work either by rubble
stones laid under floors / hard core under foundations, hand packed, complete as per under
mentioned specification and applicable drawings.
2.00.00
RUBBLE STONE SOLING
2.01.00
The rubble stone shall be of best variety of black trap / granite / basalt or other approved
variety of stone available locally. The stone shall be hard, durable, free from defects and of
required size and shall be approved by the Engineer in-charge before incorporation in the
work.
2.02.00
Preparation of Surface & laying:
2.02.01
The bed on which rubble soling is to be laid shall be cleared of all loose materials, levelled,
watered and compacted and got approved by the Engineer In-charge before laying rubble
soling. Cable or pipe trenches if shown in the drawing and as required by the Engineer incharge shall be got done before the soling is started.
2.02.02
Over the prepared surface, the stone shall be set as closely as possible and well packed and
firmly set. The stones shall be of full height and shall be laid so as to have their bases of the
largest area resting on the sub-grade. Soling shall be laid in one layer of 230mm or 150mm
or other specified thickness and no stones shall be less than 230mm or 150mm depth or
specified thickness of soling with a tolerance of 25mm.
2.02.03
After packing the stones properly in position, the interstices between them shall be
carefully filled with quarry spoils of stone chips of larger size possible to obtain a hard,
compact surface. Spreading of loose spoils or stone chips is prohibited.
2.02.04
The entire surface shall be examined for any protrusions and the same shall be knocked off
by a hammer and all interstices shall be filled with approved murrum. Excess murrum if
any over the surfaces shall be removed. Unless otherwise specified, the murrum shall be
supplied by the contractor at his own cost from the selected areas. The surfaces shall then
be watered and consolidated with mechanical or sufficiently heavy wooden tampers and
logrammers as approved by the Engineer in-charge to give the required slope or level and
dense sub-base. After compaction, the surface shall present clean look. Adequate care shall
be taken by the contractor while laving and compacting the rubble soling to see that
concrete surfaces in contact with soling are not damaged.
Attachment 2
Page 22 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
3.00.00
HARD CORE FOR FOUNDATIONS
3.01.00
Where specifically mentioned in the drawings, hard core layer shall be provided as a
preparatory surface to receive blinding concrete/ leveling course.
3.02.00
Hard core layer shall comprise of well graded broken stones 80mm nominal size with the
following gradation:
IS Sieve designation
% passing
80 mm
100
63 mm
85-100
40 mm
0-30
20 mm
0-5
10 mm
0-5
The hard broken stones layer shall be directly placed over the compacted layer of under
lying soil in layers. The stones shall be hand packed and crevices filled with broken stones.
3.03.00
3.04.00
Each layer shall be covered with clean river sand and thoroughly worked into the crevices
with a water jet. Additional layers of sand shall be placed on top and worked into the void
spaces. The process shall be repeated until no more sand and water get into the voids.
3.05.00
earth rammer shall be used to compact each layer if directed by Consultant.
3.06.00
The thickness and area covered beyond the blinding concrete shall be as indicated in the
drawings or as indicated by Consultant.
Attachment 2
Page 23 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE & ALLIED WORKS
1.00.00 SCOPE
_ 1.01.00
This specifications covers the general requirements for concreting to be used on
jobs using on-site production facilities including requirements in regard to
handling, storage of ingredients, proportioning, batching, mixing and testing and
quality assurance. This also covers the transportation of concrete from the mixer to
the place of final deposit and the placing consolidation, curing, protecting,
repairing and finishing of concrete.
1.02.00
The work shall include providing of materials, all necessary plant and equipment,
providing adequate engineering supervision and technical personnel, skilled and
unskilled labour, etc. as required to carry out the entire work as indicated on the
drawings and/or described herein subsequently and/or as directed by the Owner.
1.03.00
The Contractor shall carry out all works meant within the intent of this
specification even if not explicitly mentioned herein. All works shall be executed to
the satisfaction of the Owner.
2.00.00
GENERAL
2.01.00
The Contractor shall make his own surveying arrangements for locating the
coordinates and positions of all work and establishing the reduced levels (RLs) at
these locations, based on two reference grid lines and one bench mark, which will
be furnished by Owner. The Contractor has to provide at site, all the required
survey instruments, along with qualified surveyors, to the satisfaction of the
Owner so that the work can be carried out accurately and according to the
specifications and drawings.
2.02.00
The contractor shall establish a site laboratory for testing of material and quality
assurance as per the requirements of this specification. The laboratory shall be
manned by qualified Owner.
2.03.00
Any approval, instructions, permission, checking, review, etc. whatsoever by the
Owner, shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility and obligation
regarding adequacy, correctness, completeness, safety, strength, quality,
workmanship, etc.
Attachment 2
Page24 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
3.00.00
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.01.00
All work shall be carried out as per the stipulations contained in various sections
of these specifications and the latest Indian Standards, Acts, Codes and best
practices.
3.02.00
All applicable standards, specifications, etc. and codes of practice shall generally
be the latest editions, including all applicable official amendments and revisions. A
complete set of all these documents shall generally be available at site, with the
Contractor.
3.03.00
In case of conflict between the stipulations contained in various sections of these
specifications and stipulations of Indian Standards, Codes, etc. the requirements of
stipulations contained in various sections of these specifications, shall prevail over
that of Indian Standards, Codes, etc.
3.04.00
The following are the various relevant Indian Standards:
IS: 383 1970 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete
IS:432 (Parts I) 1982 Specification for mild steel medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for concrete
reinforcement – Mild steel & medium tensile bars
IS: 432(Parts II) 1982 Specification for mild steel medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for concrete
reinforcement - Hard drawn steel wire
IS: 456 2000 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete
IS: 516 1959 Method of test for strength of concrete
IS : 650 1991 Specification for standard sand for testing of cement
IS: 1200 (Part-II) 1974 Method of measurement of building and civil Engineering works - Concrete works
IS: 1200 (Part-V) 1982 Method of measurement of building and civil Engineering works - Form work
IS : 4656 1968 Specification for form vibrators for concrete.
IS: 8043 1991 Specification for hydrophobic Portland cement
IS: 8112 1989 Specification for 43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement
IS : 9103 1999 Specification for concrete admixtures
IS : 10262 1982 Recommended guidelines for concrete mix design.
IS : 11384 1985 Code of practice for composite construction in structural steel and concrete.
IS : 12269 1987 Specification for 53 Grade ordinary Portland cement.
IS: 12330 1988 Sulphate resisting Portland Cement
IS : 12600 1989 Specification for low heat Portland cement
SP : 23 1982 Handbook of concrete mixes.
SP : 24 1983 Explanatory Handbook on IS: 456
SP : 34 1987 Handbook on concrete reinforcement and detailing.
Attachment 2
Page 25 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
4.00.00
MATERIALS
4.01.00
4.01.01
General:
All the materials used in the manufacture of concrete shall be in accordance with
the Technical Specification for Properties, Storage and Handling of Common
Building Materials, which shall be deemed to form a part of this specification.
4.01.02
The Owner shall have the right to inspect the sources of materials, the layout and
operation of procurement and storage of materials, the concrete batching and
mixing equipments and the quality control system. The contractor shall arrange
such an inspection and the Owner s approval shall be obtained prior to starting the
work.
4.02.00
Aggregates
4.02.01
Aggregate in general designates both fine and coarse inert materials used in the
manufacture of concrete. Coarse Aggregate is faction retained on 4.75 mm IS sieve.
Fine Aggregate is faction, which passes through 4.75 mm, IS sieve.
4.02.02
Aggregate shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone and gravel from a source
known to produce satisfactory aggregate for concrete and shall be chemically inert,
strong, hard, durable against weathering, of limited porosity and free from
deleterious materials that may cause corrosion to the reinforcement or may impair
the strength and / or durability of concrete. Aggregates shall conform to I.S. 383
4.02.03
Properties: Aggregates with a specific gravity below 2.6 shall not be used without
special permission of the Owner. Machine-made sand will be acceptable provided
the constituent (rock/gravel) is sound, hard, dense and is acceptable to the Owner.
Sand, natural gravel and crushed rock shall be prepared for use by such screening
or washing, or both, as necessary to remove all objectionable foreign matter.
4.02.04
The coarse aggregate and fine aggregate shall be tested from time to time as
required by the Owner to ascertain its suitability for use in construction and the
charges for testing aggregate shall be born by the contractor as specified herein
after. Sampling of the aggregates for mix design and determination of suitability
shall be taken under the supervision of the Owner and delivered to the laboratory,
well in advance of the schedule placing of concrete. Records of tests that have been
made on proposed aggregates and on concrete made from this source of
aggregates shall be furnished to the Owner in advance of the work for use, in
determining suitability of the proposed aggregate.
Attachment 2
Page 26 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
4.02.05
The grading of aggregates shall be such as to produce a dense concrete of specified
strength and consistency that will work readily into position without segregation
and shall be based on the “mix design” and preliminary test on concrete specified
herein-after.
4.02.06
Grading of Coarse Aggregate : Coarse aggregates shall be either in single or
graded, in both the cases. The grading shall be within the following limits.
IS Sieve
Designation
75mm
63mm
37.5mm
19mm
16mm
11.2mm
9.5mm
4.75mm
2.36mm
4.02.07
Percentage passing for single sized aggregates of nominal size.
63mm
100
85-100
0-30
0-5
-
40mm
100
85-100
0-20
0-5
0-5
-
20mm
100
85-100
0-20
0-5
-
16mm
100
85-100
0-30
0-10
-
Material finer than 75 micron IS Sieve
Coal and lignite
Clay lumps
Soft fragments
Total of all the above substances
4.02.08
:
IS Sieve Designation
10mm
4.75mm
2.36mm
1.18mm
600 micron
300 micron
150 micron
10mm
100
85-100
0-20
0-5
Foreign Material Limitations: The percentages of deleterious substances in the
coarse aggregate delivered to the mixer shall not exceed the following :
Substances
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
12.5mm
100
85-100
0-45
0-20
0-5
Percentage Passing for graded aggregates of
nominal size.
40mm
20mm
16mm
12.5mm
100
95-100
100
30-70
95-100
100
100
90-100
90-100
10-35
25-55
30-70
40-85
0-5
0-10
0-10
0-10
-
Percentage by weight of aggregates
Uncrushed
Crushed
3.00
3.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
3.00
-5.00
5.00
Grading of fine aggregate shall be within the limits indicated hereunder
Percentage Passing for
Grading Zone -I
100
90-100
60-95
30-70
15-34
5-20
0-10
Grading Zone-II
100
90-100
75-100
55-90
35-59
8-30
0-10
Grading Zone-III
100
90-100
85-100
75-100
60-79
8-30
0-10
Grading Zone-IV
100
95-100
95-100
90-100
80-100
20-65
0-15
Attachment 2
Page 27 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
4.02.09 Foreign Material Limitations: The percentages of deleterious substances in fine aggregate,
delivered to the mixer shall not exceed the following :
4.02.10
Substances
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Material finer than 75 micro IS sieve
Shale
Coal and lignite
Clay and lumps
Total of all above substances including items (i)
to (iv) for uncrushed sand and items (iii) and (iv)
for crushed sand
Percent by Weight
Uncrushed
3.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
5.00
Crushed
15.00
-1.00
1.00
2.00
4.02.10
Fineness Modulus : The fine aggregate shall have a fineness modulus of not less
than 2.2 or more than 3.2. The fineness modulus is determined by adding the
cumulative percentages retained on the following I.S. sieve sizes (4.75 mm, 2.36
mm, 1.18 mm, 600 micron, 300 micron and 150 micron) and dividing the sum by
100.
4.02.11
Storage of aggregates: All coarse and fine aggregates shall be stacked Separately in
stockpiles in the material yard near the work site in bins properly constructed to
avoid inter mixing of different aggregates. Contamination with foreign materials
and earth during storage and while heaping the materials shall be avoided. The
aggregate must be of specified quality not only at the time of receiving at site but
also at the time of loading into mixer. Rakers shall be used for lifting the coarse
aggregate from bins or stock piles. Coarse aggregate shall be piled in layers not
exceeding 1.00 metres in height to prevent conning or segregation. Each layer shall
cover the entire area of the stock pile before succeeding layers are started.
Aggregates that have become segregated shall be rejected. Rejected material after
re- mixing may be accepted, if subsequent tests demonstrate conformity with
required gradation.
_4.03.00 Cement
4.03.01
The cement generally used shall be the Ordinary Portland cement 43 / 53 grade.
However, any special type of cement such as High strength cement or sulphate
resisting cement may be used under specific circumstances.
4.03.02
Cement unless otherwise specified or called for by the Owner shall be measured in
50 kg bags. Use of bulk cement will be permitted only with the approval of the
Owner. Changing of brands of type of cement within the same structure will not
be permitted. Joint account of cement consumed at site for every day for items of
work carried shall be maintained by the Contractor for verification to ensure
effective control on quality of work.
Attachment 2
Page 28 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
4.03.03
10000011 / HB / 11094
BRAND OF CEMENT : BIRLA PLUS/ AMBUJA/ACC/ L& T , LAXMI
A certified report attesting to the conforming of the cement to IS: specifications by
the cement manufacturer’s chemist shall be furnished to the Owner, if demanded.
Should at any time the Owner have reasons to consider that any cement is
defective, then irrespective of its origin and / or manufacturers test certificate,
such cement shall be tested immediately at a National Test Laboratory /
Departmental Laboratory or such approved laboratory, and until the results of
such tests are found satisfactory, it shall not be used in any work. Cement held in
store for a period of ninety (90) days or longer shall be retested before use in work.
4.03.04
The contractor shall make his own arrangements for the storage of adequate
quantity of cement. If supplies are arranged by the Department, cement will be
issued in quantities to cover work requirements of one month or more, as deemed
fit by the Owner and it will be the responsibility of the contractor to ensure
adequate and proper storage, which will provide complete protection from
dampness, contamination and minimize caking and false set. Cement bags shall be
stored in a dry enclosed shed (storage under tarpaulins will not be permitted), well
away from the outer walls and insulated from the floor to avoid contact with
moisture from ground and so arranged as to provide ready access. Damaged or
reclaimed or partly set cement will not be permitted to be used and shall be
removed from the site. The storage arrangements shall be such that there is no
dead storage. No more than 12 bags shall be stacked in any tier. The storage
arrangement shall be approved by the Owner. Consignments in cement shall be
stored as received and shall be consumed in the order of their delivery.
4.04.00 Reinforcement
4.04.01
Steel reinforcement bars for concrete shall be TMT Bars manufactured by SAIL,
TATA or RINIL. The grade of steel shall be as shown in the drawings, or as
mentioned in the schedule of items or as directed by Owner.
4.04.02
Storage: Steel reinforcement shall be stored in such a manner that they are not in
direct contact with ground but stacked on top of an arrangement of timbers
sleepers or the like. Bars of different classifications and sizes shall be stored
separately. In cases of long storage or in coastal areas, reinforcement shall be
stacked above ground level by at least 15 cm, and a coat of cement wash shall be
given to prevent scaling and rusting at no extra cost to the owner. Fabricated
reinforcement shall be carefully stored to prevent, distortion, corrosion and
deteriorations.
Attachment 2
Page 29 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
4.04.03
Contractor shall submit the manufacturers test certificate for steel. Random tests
on steel supplied by contractor may be performed if the Owner so desires as per
relevant Indian Standards. All costs incidental to such tests shall be at contractors
expense. Steel not conforming to specifications shall be rejected.
4.05.00
Water
4.05.01
Water used for mixing and curing shall be clean and free from injurious amounts
of oils, acids, alkalis, sugar, organic materials or other substances that may be
deleterious to concrete or steel. Potable water is generally considered satisfactory
for mixing concrete. The maximum permissible values of impurities shall be as
given in clause no. 5.4 of lS:456.
4.07.00
4.07.01
.
mbedded parts
Steel for light structural work and for preparation of inserts and embedments shall
conform to IS:2062.
_4.07.02
Bolts to be embedded in concrete shall, unless otherwise detailed in drawings,
conform to IS:5624. Material for bolts, shall, unless otherwise mentioned in
drawings or the schedule of items, be corrosive resistant/coated steel conforming
to IS:2062.
_4.07.03
Nuts and locknuts shall conform to IS:1363 (Part 1 to 3) for diameters 6 to 39 and
IS 3138 for Hexagon Bolts and Nuts (M-42 to M-150)”.
4.07.04
4.07.05
Plain washers shall conform to IS:2016 and spring washers shall conform to
IS:3063.
Steel pipe sleeves shall conform to Medium class of IS: 1161.
_4.08.00
Filling material
_4.08.01
General: Filling material shall conform to what is shown in drawing,
described in the Schedule of Items or otherwise directed by the Owner. Earth or
sand for filling under floors shall correspond to those de scribed elsewhere in these
specification.
4.08.02
Mastic Bitumen: Mastic Bitumen shall conform to IS: 3037 or IS: 5871
appropriate.
4.08.03
Flexible Boards: Flexible boards for use in expansion joints shall correspond to the
description given in drawing or the Schedule of Items or the instruction of Owner.
as
Attachment 2
Page 30 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
5.00.0
5.01.0
10000011 / HB / 11094
Goncrete
Design Mix Concrete
a) Design Mix Concrete shall be used for all reinforced concrete works. The mix
proportions shall be as per mix design, designed for each grade of concrete,
workability and durability requirements. The characteristic strength shall not be
less than the appropriate values given in Table-2 of IS:456:2000.
b) In proportioning concrete, the quantity of both cement and aggregates shall be
determined by mass. Water shall be either measured by volume in calibrated
tanks or weighed. All measuring equipment at site shall be maintained in a clean
and serviceable condition, and their accuracy shall be periodically checked.
c) To keep the water-cement ratio to the designed value, allowance shall be made
for the moisture contents in both fine and coarse aggregates and determination of
the same in accordance with lS:2386 Part (III) shall be made as frequently as
directed by the Owner..
d) With the permission of the Owner, for any of the above mentioned
grades of concrete, if the water quantity has to be increased, proportionately
cement quantity shall also be increased, to keep the ratio of water to Cement same
as adopted in mix design for the corresponding grade of concrete. The extra
cement required on account of this shall be at no extra cost to Owner.
e) At the beginning of the project, if so desired by the contractor, he/they may be
allowed by the Owner , till the designed mix is obtained, to carry out the
reinforced concrete work in foundation and plinth as per equivalent nominal mix
against the specified design mix concrete as per IS codes. However, all other
specification for design mix shall govern for nominal mix also and nothing extra
shall be paid for use of extra cement or else on this account whether the cement is
supplied by the Owner or procured by the contractor.
5.01.05
Mix design: Mix design shall generally be done at any of the approved laboratory.
The following is the guideline to be followed:
a) IS:10262 shall be followed as general guidance for mix design. Theminimum
value of target strength of design mix of various grades ofconcrete shall be as per
clause no. 9.2 of IS:456. However, the Ownermay allow change in target strength
values based on adequate numbers of works test results.
Attachment 2
Page 31 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
b) Minimum cement content from durability consideration for different exposures
and sulphate attack shall be as given in Table-4 and 5 of IS:456.In case higher value
is obtained from strength consideration, same shall be provided.
c) Preliminary tests/trial mix, as specified or as required by the Òwner, shall be
carried out sufficiently ahead of the actual commencement of the work with
different grades of concrete made from representative samples of aggregates and
cement expected to be used on the works. These tests are to be conducted to arrive
at the grading of aggregates, water-cement ratio, workability and the quantity of
cement required to give Preliminary (target) compressive strengths as specified in
clause 9.2 of IS 456.
d) At least four trial mixes are to be made and minimum six test cubes taken for
each trial mix noting the slump for each type of mix. The cubes shall then be
properly cured and three cubes for each mix shall be tested in a laboratory
(approved by the Owner) at 7 days and others at 28 days for obtaining the
compressive strength. The test reports shall be submitted to the Owner. The design
mix particulars shall indicate, with the help of graphs and curves etc. the extent of
variation in the grading of aggregates which can be allowed. While designing
mixes, over wet mixes shall be avoided. For the structures, where assessment of
early strength is required the concrete cubes shall also be tested for early age
strength at 1 day and 3 days for establishing the values.
d) The Contractor shall submit the test reports of mix design to the Owner for his
review, indicating design criteria, analysis and proportioning of materials, etc. On
the basis of the above test reports, a mix proportion by mass and the water-cement
ratio, shall be determined by the Contractor such that concrete prepared with this
mix will yield the desired characteristic strength and shall have suitable
workability. The mix design to be adopted on the works shall be subject to the
approval of the Owner. The proportions, once decided for different grades of
concrete, shall be adhered to, during all concreting operations as long as the
quality of the materials does not change. If, however, at any time, the quality of
materials being used has changed from those for Preliminary mix design, or there
is a change either in the required strength of concrete, or water cement ratio or
workability, the Contractor shall have to make similar trial mixes and Preliminary
tests to ascertain the revised mix proportions and water-cement ratio to be used for
obtaining the desired strength and consistency.
e) The entire cost of all the trial mixes including all the preparatory works for trial
mixes, preparation of test cubes and their testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
Attachment 2
Page 32 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
_5.01.06
Nominal mix Concrete
a) Nominal mix concrete shall be used only for plain cement concrete works and
where shown on drawings or specifically allowed by the Owner. Such concrete
shall not require preparation of trial mixes and all such concrete shall be mixed in a
mechanical mixer. Proportions for nominal mix concrete shall be according to
Table-9 of IS:456.
b) The proportion of mix may be slightly adjusted within limits, keeping the total
value of aggregates to a given quantity of cement constant to suit the sieve analysis
of both the aggregates. Cement shall on no account be measured by volume, but it
shall always be used directly from the bags (i.e. 50 kg/bag). The proportion of
cement, sand, aggregate and water for concrete of proportion 1:5:10, 1:4:8, 1:3:6 &
1:2:4 by volume shall generally consist of quantities as given below :
Proportion
Ingredients
1:5:10
1:4:8
1:3:6
1:2:4
of
Cement
1
1
1
1
Fine aggregate
(Sand)
170 ltrs.
130 ltrs.
102 ltrs
68 ltrs.
Coarse aggregate
340ltrs.
272 ltrs.
204 ltrs.
136 ltrs.
Total of fine and
coarse aggregates
800 kgs.
625 kgs.
480 kgs
350 kgs.
Water
60 ltrs.
45 ltrs
34 ltrs.
32 ltrs.
c) The quantity of water used shall be such as to produce concrete of consistency
required by the particular class of work and shall be decided by the use of slump
cone. Sufficient care should be taken to see that no excess quantity of water is used.
The final proportion of the aggregate and quantity of water shall be decided by the
Owner on the basis of test in each case. The for each class of work shall in general
be as follows:
Type of concrete
Mass concrete
Concrete below water proofing treatment
Coping
Floor paving
Max slump (in mm)
50
50
25
50
d) As a general guidance the Nominal mix concrete of mix proportion 1:5:10 shall
approximately correspond to grade M5, 1:4:8 shall correspond to grade M7.5, 1:3:6
to grade M10 and 1:2:4 to grade M15 of IS:456.
Attachment 2
Page 33 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
e) If fine aggregates are moist, the amount of surface water shall bedetermined.
Also an allowance shall be made for bulking in case ofvolume batching, in
accordance with IS:2386 (Part-Ill). Allowance shall also be made for surface water
present in the aggregates, when computing the water requirement. In the absence
of exact data the amount of surface water may be estimated as follows:
Aggregate
Very wet sand
Moderately wet sand
Moist sand
Moist gravel or crushed rock
Approximate quantity of surface water
Percentage by mass
l/cum
7.5
120
5.0
80
2.5
40
1.25-2.5
20-40
f) If nominal mix Concrete made in accordance with specified proportions does
not yield the specified strength of the corresponding grade and fails to satisfy the
requirements of “acceptance criteria for concrete” as specified in IS:456, such
concrete shall be treated in the following manner:
i) In case the Owner is satisfied that lower strength of concrete is attributed to
material and workmanship of the Contractor, then such concrete shall be replaced
by concrete of specified strength. TheOwner may, however, also accept such lower
strength concrete but such lower strength concrete shall be classified as belonging
to the appropriate lower grade proportion.
ii) In case the Owner is satisfied that lower strength of concrete is not attributable
to the Contractor, he may direct in writing to increase the cement content to obtain
specified strength at no extra cost to Owner. The use of richer mix shall be
continued until the Owner instructs otherwise.
g) Nominal mix proportion shall not be classified as higher grade proportioneither
on the ground that the test strengths are higher than the minimum specified or in
the case where the Owner directs use of additional cement over the quantity
specified for the particular mix proportion to achieve the minimum specified
strength.
h) However, only in some exceptional cases including concreting in some isolated
areas, the Owner may allow the quantity of aggregates to be determined by an
equivalent volume basis after the relationship between weight and volume is well
established by trials and the same shall be verified frequently.
Attachment 2
Page 34 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
7.00.00
FORMWORK AND STAGING
7.00.01
The Contractor shall supply, fabricate, erect and dismantle (after use) all staging
that is required for all activities covered under the specifications. He shall prepare
the scheme and submit along with the supporting calculations for approval of the
Owner.
Prior to construction of form work for any item where soil will not act as bottom
form, approval shall be obtained from Owner as to the suitability of the soil.
7.00.02
7.01.00
Materials
7.01.01
Formwork shall compose of steel, best quality wood or non-`
absorbant -type plywood. Timber shall be free from significant knots and shall be
of medium grain as far as possible and hard woods shall be used as caps and
wedges under or over posts. Timber shall be well seasoned, free from sap, shakes,
worm holes, warps or other surface defects and shall have smooth finish.
7.01.02
Staging, unless specified otherwise, shall generally be of mild steel tubes, steel
beams and channels etc. or strong sal ballies 150 mm in diameter or above.
Bamboos, small diameter ballies etc., shall not be used unless approved by the
Owner in specific cases.
7.02.00
Classification of formwork
7.02.01
Ordinary: This shall be used in places where ordinary surface finish is required
and shall compose of steel and/or approved good quality seasoned wood.
Plywood shuttering can also be used by the Contractor.
Plywood: This shall be used in exposed surfaces as shown on drawings or as
directed by the Owner where a specially, good finish is required. Such surfaces
shall be formed using approved brand of heavy quality water resistant plywood to
produce a perfectly levelled, uniform and smooth surface. Reuse of such forms
may be permitted only after inspection and approval by the Owner, for each such
reuse.
7.02.02
7.03.00
Quality of formwork and staging
7.03.01
Formwork shall consist of all materials required for forming the boxing to pour
concrete, Including steel/wood/plywood forms, ties, anchors, hangers, inserts, etc.
Formwork shall be so constructed that vertical and horizontal adjustments can be
made as required. The design and Engineering of formwork including staging as
well as its erection and dismantling shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Attachment 2
Page 35 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
7.03.02
7.03.04
7.03.05
10000011 / HB / 11094
The staging shall be true and rigid and thoroughly braced in both directions as
well as cross braced, strutted and propped such that it will not deform unduly
under weight of concrete and other loads due to men, equipment, etc. Vertical
members or props should not be supported on an unpropped lower suspended
floor or beam unless it is ensured by the Contractor that the lower floor or beam
can safely carry the loads. No propping shall take place until the Owner’s approval
has been given to the Contractor’s scheme submitted along with supporting
calculations.
The forms and staging shall be sufficiently strong to carry without
undue deformation, the dead weight of the concrete as a liquid as well as
anticipated working loads. Where the concrete is vibrated, the formwork shall be
strong enough to withstand the effects of vibration, without appreciable deflection,
bulging. distortion or loosening of its components. The joints in the formwork
shall be sufficiently tight to prevent any leakage of mortar. The formwork shall be
such as to ensure a smooth uniform surface free from honeycombs, air bubbles,
bulges, fins and other blemishes. Any blemish or defect found on the surface of the
concrete, must be brought to the notice of the Owner immediately and rectified as
directed by him.
To achieve the desired rigidity, ample studs, braces, bolts, spacer blocks, wires,
clamps, ties, straps, shores, etc. shall be used to hold the form in proper position
without undue distortion. These shall be approved by the Owner but they must in
no way impair the strength of concrete or leave stains or marks on the finished
surface. Where there are chances of these fixtures being embedded, only mild steel
or concrete of adequate strength shall be used. Bolts passing completely through
liquid and or earth retaining walls/slabs, basement walls etc. for the purpose of
securing and aligning the formwork, shall not be permitted.
7.03.06
For exposed interior and exterior concrete surfaces of beams and columns,
plywood : other approved forms thoroughly cleaned and tied together with
approved corrosion resistant devices shall be used. Rigid care shall be exercised
ensuring that all column forms are plumb and true and thoroughly cross braced to
keep them so.
7.03.07
Bevelled strips 25x25 mm shall be provided to form angles and in corners of
columns and beam boxes for chamfering of corners if shown on drawings or
directed by the Owner. Temporary openings for cleaning, inspection and for
pouring concrete shall be provided at the base of vertical forms and at other places,
where these are necessary and as may be directed by the Owner. The temporary
openings shall be so formed that they can be conveniently closed rigidly when
required and must not leave any mark on the concrete.
Attachment 2
Page36 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
7.03.08
If it is so desired by the Owner, the Contractor shall prepare, before
commencement of the actual work, designs and drawings for formwork and
staging and get them approved by the Owner. Formwork shall -be so designed
and positioned that it can be removed without damage to concrete.
7.03.09
The Contractor shall maintain necessary camber in centering for all floor slabs and
beams in all spanning directions, so as to offset the deflection and assume correct
shape. The camber shall have the crown of not less than 8 mm for every 5 metres
span unless otherwise shown on the drawings. For cantilever, camber at free end
shall be 1 in 100.
7.03.10
The Contractor shall provide the shuttering for complete stretch of work upto
expansion joints for the structures like shell, folded plate etc. and/or as directed by
the Owner.
7.04.00
Cleaning and treatment of forms
7.04.01
All forms shall be thoroughly cleaned of old concrete, wood shavings, saw dust,
dirt and dust sticking to them before these are fixed in position. All rubbish, loose
concrete, chippings, shavings, saw dust etc. shall be scrupulously removed from
the interior of the forms before concrete is poured. Wire brushes, brooms,
compressed air jet and/or water jet etc. shall be kept handy for cleaning, if directed
by the Owner.
7.04.02
Before formwork is placed in position, the form surfaces, that will be in contact
with concrete shall be treated with approved non-staining oil or composition
which is insoluble in water and not injurious to concrete. Care shall be taken that
the oil or composition does not come in contact with reinforcing steel or stain the
concrete surfaces. Burnt oil shall not be allowed to be used specially where the
concrete surface will require finishing and/or plaster.
7.05.00
Removal of forms
7.05.01
The Contractor shall begin the removal of formwork only after approval of the
Owner. He shall place on record the dates on which the concrete is placed in
different parts of the work and the dates of the removal of formwork there from.
This record shall be checked and countersigned by the Owner. The Contractor
shall be responsible for the safe removal of formwork but the Owner may delay
the time of removal if he considers it necessary. Any work showing signs of
damage through premature removal of formwork, shall be entirely removed and
reconstructed by the Contractor at no extra Cost to Owner.
Attachment 2
Page 37 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
7.05.02
The formwork shall be so designed and erected that the forms for slabs and the
sides of beams, columns and walls may be removed first, leaving the beam
bottoms and their supports in position. Re-propping of beams shall not be done
except with the approval of the Owner. Formwork for columns and walls at each
stage of concreting shall be erected only upto the particular lift of construction.
Wedges, spacer bolts, clamps or other suitable means shall be provided to allow
accurate adjustment of the formwork and to allow it to be removed gradually
without jerking the concrete.
7.05.03
Forms of various types of structural components shall, under normal
circumstances, not be removed before the minimum periods specified in Cl. 11.3 of
IS:456, which shall also be subject to the approval of the Owner. However, in any
case formwork shall not be struck until the concrete has reached a strength, at least
twice that of the stress to which the concrete may be subjected -to at the time of
removal of forms. The removal of form work shall generally be as per the
following guidelines:
Part of Structure
Walls, Columns and vertical sides of
beams
Slabs(Props left under)
Beams soffits(Props left under)
Removal of props to slabs
i)Spanning up to 4.5 m
ii) Spanning over 4.5 m
Removal of props to beams and arches
i)
Spanning up to 6 m.
ii)
Spanning over 6 m
Cantilever slabs
7.05.04
7.05.06
7.05.07
7.05.10
Earliest concrete age at stripping
Ordinary Portland cement concrete
16 to 24 hours or as directed by the
Owner
3 days
7 days
Portland Pozzolana cement concrete
3 days
7 days
10 days
7 days
14days
10 days
14 days
14 days
21 days
14 days
14 days
21 days
14 days
The number of props left under, their sizes and disposition shall be such as to be
able to safely carry the full dead load of the slab, beam or arch as the case may be
together with any live load likely to occur during curing or further construction.
Where the shape of the element is such that the formwork has reentrant angles, the
formwork shall be removed as soon as possible after the concrete has set, to avoid
shrinkage cracking occurring due to the restraint imposed.
Contractor shall record on the drawings or a special register, the date up in which
the concrete is placed in each part of the work and the date on which the
shuttering is removed there from.
In case of cantilever slabs, the removal of forms shall begin from the outer edge
and proceed towards the support, where as in the case of slabs supported on
two/four sides, the removal of forms shall begin from centre to supports.
Attachment 2
Page 38 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
7.05.11
The formwork shall be so made as to produce a finished concrete, true to shape,
lines, plumb and to dimensions as shown on the drawings. The Owner may call for
finished work at any time to set standards of workmanship. Once approved, these
will become the accepted Sample.
7.05.12
In case PPC/PSC is used instead of OPC, the removal of shuttering/ support shall
be after 50% more time from that being applied for OPC, unless otherwise
permitted by the Owner. For concrete temperature above 40°C, stripping time shall
be increased.
7.05.13
In case of special structures, such as shells, folded plates, etc, the sequence of
removal of forms shall be as per drawings or as directed by the Owner.
7.06.00
Re-use of forms Before reuse, all forms shall be thoroughly scraped, cleaned, all
nails and adhering substances removed, holes and leaks satisfactorily plugged,
joints examined and where necessary repaired and inside surfaces treated as
specified herein before. Formwork shall not be used/re-used, if declared unfit or
unserviceable by the Owner.
8.00.00
8.00.01
REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT
All reinforcement for concrete works shall be provided as per the drawings or as
indicated in the schedule of items. The Contractor shall prepare and furnish to the
Owner, bar bending schedules for all RCC works for his review and approval. No
work shall commence without the approval of the bar bending schedules by the
Owner in writing.
The contractor shall plan the procurement of steel well in advance and complete
the surface treatment, if specified in a planned manner. In case of non availability
of certain diameters Owner may permit substitution of bars. However such
substitutions shall be the last resort and shall not be a reason for delay. The
Contractor shall modify the bar bending schedule, and specific approvals of
Owner obtained.
8.00.02
8.00.03
All bars shall be thoroughly cleaned before being fabricated. Pitted and defective
bars shall not be used. All steel for reinforcement shall be free from loose scales,
rust coatings, oil, grease, paint or other harmful matters immediately before
placing the concrete. To ensure this, reinforcements with rust coatings shall be
cleaned thoroughly before bending/placement of the same.
8.01.00
Bending and placing
Attachment 2
Page 39 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
8.01.01
10000011 / HB / 11094
Bending shall be as under:
a) Reinforcing bars supplied bent or in coils, shall be straightened before these are
cut to size. Straightening of bars shall be done in cold and without damaging the
bars. This is to be considered as a part of
reinforcement bending and fabrication work.
b) Unless otherwise specified, reinforcing steel shall be bent in accordance with
procedure specified in lS:2502 and/or as approved by the Owner. Bends and
shapes shall comply strictly with the dimensions shown on the approved bar
bending schedules and they shall be rechecked by the Contractor before bending
and he shall be entirely responsible for their correctness. Bars correctly bent, shall
only be used. Unless specified otherwise or directed by the Owner, the detailing of
reinforcement shall be in accordance with lS:5525 and SP:34. c) Bending of
longitudinal bars for laps shall be done with 1:6 slopes. The ends of column bars at
the top of columns shall be bent horizontally at the just below the beam bars
permitting full development length ofeam bars. The beam column junction
reinforcement shall be tied by U-stirrups to develop full moment connection with
good confined concrete.
d) No reinforcement shall be bent when in position in the work without approval
of the Owner, whether or not it is partially embedded in concrete. Where
reinforcement bars are bent aside, at construction joints and afterwards bent back
into their original positions, care shall be taken to ensure that, at no time, the
radius of the bend is less than 4 times the bar diameters for plain mild steel or 6
times the bar diameters for deformed bars. Care shall also be taken while bending
back bars, to ensure that the concrete around the bar is not damaged.
e) Welding of bars to obtain continuity shall not be allowed, particularly for cold
twisted bars, unless specifically approved by the Owner. If welding is approved,
the work shall be carried out as per IS:2751 and lS:9417, according to the best
practice and as directed by the Owner.
8.01.02
Placing in Position shall be as under:
a) Spacing of bars shall be as indicated in the drawings. Minimum distance
between reinforcing bars shall be in accordance with clause 26.3.2 of IS:456.
Attachment 2
Page 40 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
a) All reinforcement shall be accurately fixed and maintained in position as shown
on the drawings by such approved means as steel chairs, and/or concrete spacer
blocks as per IS:2502. Bars intended to be in contact at crossing points, shall be
securely bound together at all such points by two numbers annealed steel wire of
0.9 mm to 1.6 mm size conforming to IS:280 in such a manner that they do not slip
over each other at the time of fixing & concreting. The tying of bars shall be in
criss-cross manner.
b) Binders shall tightly embrace the bars with which these are intended to be in
contact and shall be securely held. The vertical distance between successive layers
of bars shall be maintained by provision of spacer bars. These shall be so spaced
that the main bars do not sag perceptively between adjacent spacers. Bundled bars
shall be provided wherever shown on the drawing to facilitate concreting.
Location of laps and development lengths, shall be as indicated on the drawings or
as directed by Owner.
c) The placing of reinforcement shall be completed well in advance of concrete
pouring. The reinforcement shall be checked by the Owner, for accuracy of
placement and cleanliness. Necessary corrections, as directed by the Owner shall
be carried out. Care shall be taken to ensure that projecting ends of ties and other
embedded metal do not encroach into the concrete cover. Where concrete blocks
are used for ensuring the cover and positioning of reinforcement, these shall be
made of mortar 1:2 (1 cement:2 sand) by volume and cured for at least seven days.
The sizes and locations of the concrete blocks shall be approved by the Owner. The
28 days crushing strength of cover blocks shall be at least equal to the specified
strength of concrete in which the blocks will be embedded.
d) Laps and anchorage length of reinforcing bars shall be in accordance with
IS:456, unless otherwise specified. If the bars in a lap are not of the same diameter,
the smaller diameter will guide the lap length. Laps shall be staggered as far as
practicable and as directed by the Owner and not more than 50% of bars shall be
lapped at a particular section. Mechanical connections, for splicing reinforcement
bars in congested locations may be used by the Contractor, only if approved by the
Owner. Reinforcement bars shall not be lapped unless the length required exceeds
the maximum available lengths of bars at site.
e) Unless otherwise specified by the Owner-, reinforcement shall be placed within
the following tolerances :
Attachment 2
Page 41 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
Tolerance in spacing
For effective depth 200 mm or less
For effective depth more than 200 mm.
+/- 10 mm
+ /-15 mm
8.02.00
Cover to reinforcement
8.02.01
The correct cover shall be maintained by cement mortar briquettes areother
approved means. Reinforcement for footings, grade beams and slabs on sub grade
shall be supported on precast concrete blocks as approved by the Owner. The use
of pebbles or stones shall not be permitted.
8.02.02
Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, minimum clear concrete cover for
reinforcement (exclusive of plaster or other finishes) shall be as follows:
a) At each end of a reinforcing bar, not less than 25 mm, nor less than twice the bar
diameter,
b) For a longitudinal reinforcing bar in a column, 40 mm or bar diameter hichever
is more. 25 mm cover may be adopted for columns of minimum dimension 200
mm or under and with longitudinal reinforcement diameter not exceeding 12 mm.
c) For longitudinal reinforcing bars in a beam, not less than 25 mm or less than the
bar diameter.
d) For reinforcement in slabs and walls; not exposed to weather or ground not less
than 15 mm nor less than the bar diameter.
e) For bottom reinforcement in footings; 75 mm, if concrete is laid
against the ground or 50 mm if laid on a layer of lean concrete.
f) For retaining walls, grade beams, top and sides of footings and similar surfaces
exposed to weather or ground; 50 mm for bars larger than 16 mm and 40 mm for
bars upto 16 mm.
g) For liquid retaining structures; 40 mm or diameter of main bar, `hichever is
larger.
h) For any other reinforcement not less than 15 mm, nor less than the
diameter of such bar.
Attachment 2
Page 42 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
8.02.03
10000011 / HB / 11094
Special requirements in corrosive atmosphere: Unless special protective coatings
are used, the following measures shall be adopted for structures exposed to sever
conditions.
a) Increased cover thickness may be provided when surfaces of concrete members
are exposed to the action of harmful chemicals, acid vapour, saline atmosphere,
sulphur smoke, etc. such increase may be between 15 to 50 mm beyond the figures
indicated above as may be specified by Owner.
b) For reinforced concrete members totally immersed in sea water, the cover shall
be 40 mm. more than specified in 8.02.02
c) For reinforced concrete members, periodically immersed in sea water or subject
to sea spray, the cover of concrete shall be 50 mm. more than that specified in
8.02.02.
8.02.03
8.02.04
d) For concrete of grade M 25 and above, the additional thickness of cover
specified in (a), (b) and (c) above may be reduced to half. In all such cases
the covers should not exceed 75 mm.
e) Protection to reinforcement in case of concrete exposed to harmful
surroundings may also be given by providing a dense impermeable
concrete with approved protective coating, as specified on the drawings.
In such case the extra cover, mentioned in (c) and (d) above, may be
reduced by the Owner, to those shown on the drawing.
Unless otherwise specified the tolerance for cover from the required nominal cover
shall not deviate by (+) 10/ (-) 0 mm.
The bars shall be kept in correct position by the follwing methods :
a) In case of beam and slab construction precast cover blocks in cement mortar 1 : 2
(1 cement : 2 coarse sand) about 4 x 4 cm section and of thickness equal to the
specified cover shall be placed between the bars and shutterings so as to secure
and maintain the requisite cover of concrete over reinforcement.
b) In case of cantilevered and doubly reinforced beams or slabs, the vertical
distance between the horizontal bars shall be maintained by introducing chairs
spacers or support bars of steel at 1.0 metre or at shorter spacing to avoid sagging.
Attachment 2
Page 44 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
c) In case of columns and walls the vertical bards shall be kept in position by
means of timber templates with slots accurately cut in them; or with block of
cement mortar 1 : 2 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand) of required size suitably tied to the
reinforcement to ensure that they are in correct position during concreting.
d) In case of other R.C.C. structure such as arches domes, shells, storage tanks etc.
a combination of cover blocks, spacers and templates shall be used as directed by
Owner.
8.03.00
Inspection & testing
8.03.01
Erected and secured reinforcement shall be inspected and approved by Owner
prior to placement of concrete.
8.03.02
Sample bent bars shall be checked to ensure that they conform to the bar bending
schedules. Reinforcement in position shall be checked for proper positioning, and
rigidity, cover, spacing of bars, placement of chairs and spacers. etc. Also it shall be
checked that all bars at crossings are properly tied.
8.03.03
Each batch of reinforcement procured shall be accompanied with manufacturer’s
test certificate. In addition, Owner may direct the reinforcement to be tested
independently. Reinforcement shall tested in reputed testing laboratory, approved
by Owner. The frequency of testing shall be as stipulated by Owner. The cost of
testing shall be borne by the contractor.
EMBEDDED PARTS
9.00.00
9.00.01
Embedded steel parts shall be supplied, fabricated and erected by the
Contractor as as indicated in drawings.
9.00.02
Embedded steel parts shall be supplied, fabricated and erected by the
contractor and shall include items such as, but not limited to, foundation grillages,
anchor bolts, pipe sleeves, equipment mounting plates, steel rolled sections with or
without properly welded lugs, plate inserts, edge protection angles, as shown on
the drawings, auxiliary framing for equipment supports, pegstay plugs for door
and window frames, miscellaneous frames, etc. Cold worked deformed steel bars
shall not be used for lugs.
9.01.00
9.01.01
Foundation bolt assembly
Foundation bolt assembly shall comprise of foundation bolts, stiffener plates,
washers, nuts, lock nuts, pipe sleeves, etc. Contractor’s scope shall include supply,
fabrication, erection and installation in position as per drawings.
Attachment 2
Page 45 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
9.01.02
9.01.03
10000011 / HB / 11094
The fabrication and erection of bolt assemblies shall include threading, cutting,
grinding, drilling, welding, etc. complete. The bolts shall have coarse pitch screw
thread in the diameter range, 8 to 64 mm and 6 mm pitch screw for diameter
greater than 64 mm, as per IS : 4218.
For fabrication of any particular size of bolt indicated on the drawing, the diameter
of the threaded portion of the bolt shall be considered as th diameter of the bolt
unless otherwise mentioned in the drawings.
9.01.04
Fabrication & erection shall be carried out as per lS:800. Welding shall conform to
IS:816 and IS:9595,
9.01.05
Every bolt shall be provided with a steel washer, under the nut. The washer shall
be flat and minimum outside inscribed circle have a diameter 2.50 times that of the
bolt and of suitable thickness. All nuts shall be of steel with well formed hexagonal
heads, unless specified otherwise, forged from solid metal and shall be dipped in
hot boiled linseed oil as soon as these are made. The nuts shall fit good on the
bolts.
9.01.06
During erection, the Contractor shall provide necessary template, temporary
bracings, supports, etc. to ensure proper positioning of the assemblies and holding
them firmly during concreting or until they are grouted and the grout has set. All
materials shall be erected in plumb and in level (unless otherwise specified) and at
true locations as shown on the drawings. Threads shall be protected by using PVC
tape._All threads for bolts and inserts shall be greased at intervals and kept
covered to prevent damage.
9.02.00
Embedded plates, pipes, etc.
9.02.01
The Contractor shall fabricate, transport to site and erect accurately in position all
embedded steel parts either by welding, bolting or any other means as approved
by the Owner. Exposed surfaces of embedded parts other than holding down
bolts, unless otherwise stated, are to be painted with two coats of approved
anticorrosive paint (as per lS:2074) and/or bituminous paint as directed. The
threads of holding down bolts shall be greased and protected with waterproof
tape.
9.02.02
During erection, the Contractor shall provide necessary strong temporary bracings
and supports to ensure proper installation of the embedded parts which shall be
erected at the true location as shown on the drawings and these shall be in plumb
and level (unless otherwise shownon drawings). The drawings prepared for
embedded steel parts showing the erection proedure, for major items, wherever
necessary.
Attachment 2
Page 46 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
9.02.03
Fabrication & erection shall be carried out as per IS: 800. Welding rods & site/field
welding shall conform to IS: 816 and IS: 9595. IS:7634 (part-Ill) shall be followed for
PVC pipe works.
_9.02.04
Exposed surfaces of embedded materials shall be painted with one coat of
anticorrosive paint or bituminous paint, as desired, without any extra cost to the
Owner. If welding is to be done subsequently on the exposed surfaces of the
embedded parts, the painting for a length of 50 mm beyond each side of the weld
line shall be cleaned off
_10.00.00
MIXING OF CONCRETE
10.00.01
Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer conforming to IS:1791.
However, mixing shall preferably be done at a single central batching plant,
conforming to IS:4925, situated within the area allocated for the Contractor’s
particular use as directed by the Owner. The plant shall have a mechanically
operated mixer of an approved size and type, capable of ensuring a uniform
distribution of the materials throughout the mass and the mass is uniform in
colour and consistency.
10.00.02
Water shall not be added into the drum of the mixer, until all the cement and
aggregates constituting the batch are already in the drum and dry mixed for at
least one minute and are uniformly distributed. Water shall then be added and
mixing of each batch shall be continued until there is a uniform distribution of the
materials and the mass but in no case shall mixing be done for less than one and
half minutes and for at least 40 revolutions after all the water and materials are in
the drum. When absorbent aggregates are used or when the mix is very dry, the
mixing time shall be extended as directed by the Owner. Mixers shall not be
loaded above their rated capacity as this prevents thorough mixing.
10.00.03
The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before the ingredients for the
next batch are fed into the drum. No partly set or remixed or excessively wet
concrete shall be used and it shall be immediately removed from site. Each time if
the work stops for more than 30 minutes, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned
and when the next mixing commences, the first batch shall have 10% additional
cement.
Attachment 2
Page 47 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
10.00.04
All plain concrete should be preferably mixed in a drum type powder driven
machine with a loading hopper which will permit the accurate measure of various
ingredients. In exceptional circumstances and/or work in remote areas, hand
mixing may be allowed by the Owner, subject to adding 10% extra cement at no
extra cost to Owner. The mixing shall be carried out on watertight platform and
mixing shall be continued till a uniform colour and consistency of the mix is
achieved.
10.01.00
Batching of Concrete
10.01.01
Cement shall always be batched by weight. A separate weighing device shall be
provided for weighing cement. Where the weight of cement is determined by
accepting the weight per bag, number of bags shall be weighed separately to
determine the average net weight of cement per bag and the same shall be checked
regularly.
10.01.02
Aggregates shall always be batched by weight.In particular cases, or where weighbatching is not possible proportioning by volume batching may be allowed by the
Owner, provided Contractor guarantees the uniformity of aggregates through out
the period of construction. For this purpose, the Contractor shall submit to the
Owner sufficient data indicating the weight/volume relationship of aggregates for
different types of concr ete and after such approval, periodic checks on the
weight/volume relationship of the aggregates shall be made by the Contractor to
the satisfaction of the Owner.
10.01.03
Where the aggregates are moist and volume batching is adopted, allowance shall
be made for bulking in accordance with IS 2386 (Part-III). Suitable adjustments
shall be made for the variation in the weight of aggregates due to variation in their
moisture contents.
10.01.04
Water may be measured either by weight or by volume. When measured by
volume, it shall be by well calibrated conical shaped jar or vessel or from a
calibrated tank fitted to the mixer. It is very important to maintain the water
cement ratio constant at its correct value. For the correct determination of amount
of water to be added in the concrete mix, to maintain the water cement ratio
constant, the amount of moisture content in both coarse and fine aggregates shall
be taken into consideration, be as frequently as possible. The frequency for a given
job being determined by the Owner according to weather conditions.
10.01.05
Any solid admixture, to be added, shall be measured by weight, but liquid or
semi-liquid admixture may be measured by weight or volume.
Attachment 2
Page 48 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
10.01.06 The accuracy of batching shall be within the following tolerance:
Cement
Aggregate
Water
2% by weight
5% by weight
0.5% by weight
10.02.00
Ready mix concrete supplied by commercial ready mix concrete plants shall be
used only with the approval of Owner. Unless otherwise mentioned in the items
no extra will payable on this account.
_11.00.00
TRANSPORTATION OF CONCRETE
11.00.01
Concrete shall be handled and conveyed as rapidly as practicable, from the place o
f mixing to the place of final laying, by approved means, before the initial setting
of the cement starts. Concrete shall be conveyed in such a way that there is no
segregation or loss of any of the ingredients and maintaining the required
workability. If segregation does occur during transport, the concrete shall be
remixed. During very hot or cold weather, if directed by the Owner, concrete shall
be transported in deep containers which will reduce the rate of water loss by
evaporation in hot weather and heat loss in cold weather, at no extra cost to
Owner.
11.00.02
Conveying equipment for concrete shall be mortar tight, well maintained and
thoroughly cleaned before commencement of concrete mixing. Such equipment
shall be kept free from set concrete. Chutes shall not be used for transport of
concrete without the written permission of the Owner. The chute in case permitted
to be used shall be of such size and design as to ensure practically continuous flow.
Slope of the chute shall be so adjusted that the concrete flow without the use of an
excessive quantity of water and without segregation of its ingredients. The
delivery end of the chute shall be as close as possible to the point of deposit.
11.00.03
Concrete may be conveyed and placed by mechanically operated equipment, e.g.
pumps or pneumatic placers only with the written permission of the Owner, who
shall also review the entire scheme for which comprehensive details shall be
furnished by the Contractor.
11.00.04
All equipment used for mixing, transporting and placing of concrete shall be
maintained in clean condition. All pans, buckets, hoppers, chutes, pipe lines and
other equipments shall be thoroughly cleaned after each period of placement.
Attachment 2
Page 49 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
12.00.00
CONCRETE PLACING
12.01.00
Final inspection and approval prior to concrete placement:
12.01.01
Before the concrete is actually placed in position, the inside of the form work shall
be inspected to see that they have been cleaned and oiled. Temporary openings
shall be provided to facilitate inspection, especially at bottom of columns and wall
forms, to permit removal of saw dust, wood shavings, binding wire, rubbish, dirt
etc., Opening shall be placed or holes drilled so that these materials and water can
be removed easily. Such openings / holes shall be later suitably plugged.
12.01.02
The various traders shall be permitted ample time to install drainage and
plumbing lines, floor and trench drain, conduits, hangers, anchors, inserts, sleeves,
bolts, frames and other miscellaneous embedments to be cast in the concrete as
indicated on the drawing or as necessary for the proper execution of the work. All
such embedments shall be correctly positioned and securely held in the forms to
prevent displacement during depositing and vibrating of concrete.
12.01.03
Prior to concrete placement, all works shall be inspected and approved by Owner ,
and if found unsatisfactory, concrete shall not be poured until all defects have been
corrected at contractors cost. Approval by Owner of any and all materials and
work as required herein shall not relieve contractor from his obligations to
produce sound concrete in accordance with the drawings and specifications
12.01.04
Formwork and reinforcement shall be approved in writing by the Owner before
concrete is placed. Concrete shall be placed only after all preparations for casting
have been approved by the Owner and approval given to proceed with the casting
in writing on pour card to be maintained by the Contractor for this purpose and to
be submitted alongwith the Contractor’s bills.
Placement
Concrete shall be placed and compacted in its final position before the cement
reaches the initial set and normally concrete shall be compacted in its final position
within 30 minutes of leaving the mixer.
12.02.00
12.02.01
12.02.02
Where direct placement is not possible, the Contractor shall provide suitable
arrangements such as chutes, tremie, elephant trunks, etc. to confine the movement
of concrete as directed by the Owner. Concrete shall not be dropped from a height
or handled in a manner which may cause segregation.
Attachment 2
Page 50 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
12.02.03
If concrete is placed by pumping, the consistency shall be the minimum
necessary for such conveyance of concrete. Before commencement of regular
pumping, the pipeline shall be lubricated by cement mortar (1:2), and once
pumping commences, stoppages shall be avoided.
12.02.04
The placing of concrete shall be a continuous operation with no interruption in
excess of 30 minutes between the placing of continuous portions of concrete.
Concrete shall be placed in continuous horizontal layers of 150 mm or higher
thickness as directed by the Owner and thoroughly compacted before placing next
layer. The thickness of each layer shall be such that it will be deposited before the
previous layer has stiffened. When placing concrete through reinforcing steel, care
shall be taken to prevent segregation of the
coarse aggregates.
12.02.05
Slabs, beams and similar members shall normally be poured in one operation. In
special circumstances, with the approval of the Owner, these can be poured in
horizontal layers, but it must be ensured that the under layer is not already
hardened. Bleeding of under layer, if any, shall be effectively removed. Moulding,
throating, drip course, etc. shall be poured as shown on the drawings or as desired
by the Owner.
Mass Concrete shall be poured in lifts not exceeding 1.0 m in height unless
otherwise indicated on drawings or as directed by the Owner. Horizontal lift shall
not be more than 150 cm in thickness, according to provision of IS:457.
12.02.06
12.02.07
No concrete shall be placed in wet weather or an a water covered surface. Any
concrete that has been washed by heavy rain shall be entirely removed, if there is
any sign of cement and sand having been washed away from the concrete
mixture. To guard against damage which may be caused by rain, theworks shall be
covered with tarpaulins immediately after the concrete has been placed and
compacted before leaving the work unattended. Any water accumulating on the
surface of the newly placed concrete shall be removed by approved means and no
further concrete shall be placed thereon until such water is removed. To avoid flow
of water over / around freshly placed concrete, suitable drains and sumps shall be
provided.
Attachment 2
Page 51 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
12.02.08
Concrete, when deposited, shall have a temperature of not less than 5 degrees
Centigrade and not more than 40 degree Centigrade. When depositing concrete in
very hot weather, precautions shall be taken so that the temperature of wet
concrete does not exceed 40 degrees Centigrade while placing. This shall be
achieved by stacking aggregates under the shade and keeping them moist, using
cold water, reducing the time between mixing by sprinkling water, starting curing
before concrete dries out, etc. However, before mixing/placing concrete, when the
above temperature conditions vary on either side, approval of the Owner shall be
obtained for the method of execution.
12.02.09
Concrete must be placed in its final position before it becomes too stiff to work. On
no account water shall be added after the initial mixing. Concrete which has
become stiff or has been contaminated with foreign materials and which has not
been placed within half an hour of mixing water with cement shall be rejected.
12.02.10
For members involving vertical placing of concrete (eg. Columns, walls, etc.), each
lift shall be deposited in horizontal layer extending the full width between
shutterings and of such depth that each layer can be easily and effectively vibrated
and incorporated with the layer before by means of compaction.
12.02.11
Should any unforeseen occurrence results in a stoppage of concreting for one hour
or such other time as might allow the concrete, already placed, to begin to set
before the next batches can be placed, the Contractor shall make at his own cost,
suitable tongue, and groove construction joint, as approved by the Owner. Any
additional reinforcement required as directed by the Owner shall also be provided
by the Contractor at his own cost. Before placement of new batches of concrete
over that construction joint, the surface preparation according to this specification
stipulated earlier, shall be done by the Contractor at his own cost.
12.03.00
Work in Extreme Weather Conditions:
12.03.01
During hot weather (atmospheric temperature above 40 degree centigrade) or cold
weather (atmospheric temp at 5 degree centigrade and below) the concreting shall
be done as per the procedures and precautions set out in lS:7861 (Parts I and II)
12.03.02
All concrete work performed in hot weather shall be in accordance with IS :456,
except as herein modified. Admixtures may be used only when approved by
Owner.
Attachment 2
Page 52 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
12.03.04
Adequate provision shall be made to lower concrete temperatures by cool
ingredients, eliminating excessive mixing, preventing exposure of mixers and
conveyers to direct sunlight and the use of reflective paint, on mixers etc., The
temperature of the freshly placed concrete shall not be permitted to exceed 300
deg.C.
12.03.05
Aggregate shall be stock piled in shade and prevented from direct sun rays.
Spraying stock piles with water, use of cold water available and burying,
insulation, shading and / or painting white the pipe lines and water storage tanks
and conveyances.
12.03.06
12.03.07
In order to reduce loss of mixing water, the aggregates, wooden forms, subgrade,
adjacent concrete and other moisture absorbing surfaces, shall be well wetted prior
to concreting placement and finishing shall be done as quickly as possible.
Extra precautions shall be taken for the protection and curing of concrete,
Consideration shall be given to continuous water curing and protection against
high temperatures and drying hot wind for a period of at least 7 days after
concrete has set and after which normal curing procedures may be resumed.
13.00.00
COMPACTION
13.00.01
After the concrete has been placed, it shall be spaded and thoroughly
compacted by approved mechanical vibrators to a maximum subsidence without
segregation and thoroughly worked around reinforcement or other embedded
fixtures into the correct form and shape. Hand tamping in some cases may be
allowed subject to the approval of the Owner. Care must be taken to ensure that
the inserts, fixtures, reinforcement and formwork are not displaced or disturbed
during placing of concrete.
13.00.02
Vibrators shall penetrate both the layer poured and the under layer to ensure good
bond and homogeneity and to prevent the formation of cold joints. Immersion
vibrators shall not be allowed to come in contact with steel reinforcement after
start of initial set. Also, they shall not be allowed to come in contact with forms or
finished surfaces.
Immersion vibrators shall have a ‘no load’ frequency, amplitude and
acceleration as per lS:2505 depending upon the size of the vibrator. Immersion
vibrators shall be operated by experienced men. These vibrators shall be immersed
not more than 450 mm apart and withdrawn when air bubbles cease to come to the
surface. Such vibrators shall in no case be used to push concrete inside the forms
and vibrators shall be withdrawn slowly.
13.00.04
13.00.05
Whenever vibration has to be applied externally, the design of formwork and the
disposition of vibrators shall receive special consideration to ensure efficient
compaction and to avoid surface blemishes. Surface vibrators and form attached
vibrator shall not be permitted under normal conditions. Their use shall require
written approval of the Owner.
Attachment 2
Page 53 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
14.00.00
PROTECTION AND CURING OF CONCRETE
14.01.00
Protection:
14.01.01
Newly placed concrete shall be protected by approved means from rain, sun and
wind. Concrete placed below ground level, shall be protected from falling earth,
during and after placing. Concrete placed in ground Containing any deleterious
substances, shall be kept free from contact with such ground or with water
draining from such ground, during placing of concrete and for a period of at least
three days or as otherwise instructed by the Owner.
The ground water around newly poured concrete shall be kept down to an
approved level by pumping or other approved means of drainage. Adequate steps
shall be taken to prevent floatation or flooding. Steps, as approved by the Owner,
shall be taken to protect immature concrete from damage by debris, excessive
loading, vibration, abrasion, mixing with earth or other deleterious materials, etc.
that may impair the strength and durability of the concrete.
14.01.02
14.00.00
PROTECTION AND CURING OF CONCRETE
14.02.00
Curing:
14.02.01
As soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently, it shall be kept in a damp or wet
condition by ponding or by covering with a layer of sacking, canvas, hessian or
similar materials and kept continuously wet for at least seven days after final
setting. This period may be extended, at the discretion of the Owner, upto fourteen
days. Curing of horizontal surfaces exposed to drying winds shall begin
immediately after the concrete has hardened. Concrete slabs and floors shall be
cured for the periods mentioned above by flooding with water of minimum 25 mm
depth.
14.02.02
Quantity of water applied shall be such as to prevent erosion of freshly placed
concrete.
14.02.03
Approved curing compounds may be used in lieu of moist-curing with the
permission of the Owner. However, such permission may be granted only in
specific cases. Such compounds shall be applied to all exposed surfaces of the
concrete, as soon as possible after the concrete has set. Curing compounds shall be
liquid type while pigmented, conforming to U.S. Bureau of Reclamation
Specification. No curing compound shall be used on surface where future blending
with concrete, water or acid proof membrane or painting is specified.
Attachment 2
Page 54 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
15.00.00
REPAIRING AND FINISHING OF CONCRETE SURFACES
15.01.00
Inspection and repair of concrete surfaces:
15.01.01
Immediately after the shuttering is removed, the surface of concrete
shall be inspected very carefully for all defects. Owner who may permit patching
of the defective areas or else reject the concrete unit either partially or entirely.
15.01.02
Holes left by form bolts etc., shall be filled up and made good with mortar
composed of one part of cement to one and half parts of sand passing through 2.36
mm IS sieve after removing any loose stones adhering to the concrete. Mortar
filling shall be struck off flush at the face of the concrete. Concrete surface shall be
finished as described under the particular item of work
15.01.03
Superficial honey combed surfaces and rough patches shall be similarly made
good immediately after removal of shuttering, in the presence of Owner and
superficiant water and air holes shall be filled in. The mortar shall be well worked
into the surface with wooden float. Excess water shall be avoided. Unless
instructed otherwise by Owner , the surface of the exposed concrete placed against
shuttering shall be rubbed down immediately on removal of shuttering to remove
fine or other irregularities, care being taken to avoid damaging the surfaces.
Surface irregularities shall be removed by grinding.
15.01.04
If reinforcement is exposes or the honey combing occurs at vulnerable position
e.g. ends of beams or columns, it may be necessary to cut out the member
completely or in part and reconstruct. The decision of Owner shall be final in this
regard. Rejected concrete shall be removed and replaced by Contractor at no
additional expense.
Attachment 2
Page 55 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
15.01.05
10000011 / HB / 11094
If only patching is necessary, the defective concrete shall be cut out till solid
concrete is reached (or to a minimum depth of 25 mm), the edges being cut
perpendicular to the affected surface or with a small under cut if possible,
anchors, tees or dowels shall be provided in slots whenever necessary to attach the
new concrete securely in place. An area extending several centimeters beyond the
edges and the surfaces of the prepared voids shall be saturated with water for 24
hours immediately before the patching material is placed. The area shall be
repaired as follows:
a) Small size holes having surface dimensions about equal to the depth of the hole,
holes left after removal of form bolts, grout insert holes and slots cut for repair of
cracks shall be repaired as follows :
b) The hole to be patched shall be roughened and thoroughly soaked with clean
water until absorption stops.
c) A 5 mm thick layer of grout of equal parts of cement and sand shall be well
brushed into the surface to be patched followed immediately by the patching
concrete which shall be well consolidated with a wooden float and left slightly
proud of the surrounding surface. The concrete patch shall be built up in 10mm
thick layers. After an hour or more, depending upon weather conditions, it shall be
worked off flush with a wooden float and a smooth finish obtained by wiping with
hessian. Steel trowel shall not be used for this purpose. The mix for patching shall
be of the same materials and in the same proportions as that used in the concrete
being repaired, although some reduction in the maximum size of the coarse
aggregates may be necessary and the mix shall be kept as dry as possi ble.d)
Mortar filling by air pressure (guniting) shall be used for repair of areas to large
and / or too shallow for patching with mortar. Patched surfaces shall be given a
final treatment to match the colour and texture of the surrounding concrete. White
cement shall be substituted for ordinary cement, if so directed by Owner , to match
the shade of the patch with the original concrete.
15.01.06
Curing of Patched Work : The patched area shall be covered immediately with an
approved non-staining water saturated material such as gunny bags, which shall
be kept continuously wet and protected against sun and wind for a period of 24
hours. Thereafter, the patched area shall be kept wet continuously by a fine spray
of sprinkling water for not less than 10 days.
Attachment 2
Page 56 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
15.01.07
Approval by Owner : All materials, procedures and operations used in the repair
of concrete and also the finished repair work shall be subject to the approval of
Owner. All fillings shall tightly bonded to the concrete and shall be sound, free
from shrinkage cracks after the fillings have been cured and dried.
15.01.08
Use of bonding agent: The use of epoxy for bonding fresh concrete used for repairs
will be permitted upon written approval of Owner. Bonding agents shall be
applied in strict accordance with the instruction of the manufacturer.
15.02.00
Finish for formed and un-formed surfaces
15.02.01
The type of finish for formed concrete surfaces shall be as follows, unless
otherwise specified by the Ownera. For surfaces against which backfill or concrete
is to be placed, no treatment is required except repair of defective areas.
b. For surfaces below grade, which will receive waterproofing treatment, the
concrete shall be free of surface irregularities which would interfere with proper
application of the water proofing materials which is specified for use.
15.02.02
The type of finish for un-formed concrete surfaces shall be as follows, unless
otherwise specified by the Owner
a. Unless specified, surfaces which will be exposed when the structure is in service
shall receive no special finish, except repair of damaged or defective concrete,
removal of fins and abrupt irregularities, filling of holes left by form ties and rods
and clean up of loose or adhering debris.
b. Surfaces which will be exposed to the weather and which would normally be
levelled, shall be sloped for drainage, Unless the drawing specify a horizontal
surface or shows the slope required, the tops of marrow surfaces such as staircase
treads, walls, curbs and parapets shall be stoped across the width approx. as 1 in
30. Broader surfaces such as walkways, roads, parking areas and platforms shall be
sloped about 1 In 50. Surfaces that will be covered by backfill or concrete, sub
floors to be covered with concrete topping, terrazzo or quarry tile and similar
surfaces shall be smooth, screeded and levelled to produce even surfaces. Surface
irregularities shall not exceed 6mm. Surfaces which will not be cover ed by
backfill, concrete or tile topping such as outside decks, floors of galleries and
sumps, parapets, gutters, sidewalks, floors and slabs shall be consolidated,
screeded and floated.
Attachment 2
Page 57 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
c. Excess water and laitance shall be removed before final finishing. Floating may
be done with hand or power tools and started as soon as the screeded surface has
attained a stiffness to permit finishing operations and these shall be the minimum
required to produce a surface uniform in texture and free from screed marks or
other imperfections. Joints and edges shall be tooled as called for on the drawings
or as directed by Owner.
15.03.00
Standard Finish for Exposed Concrete:
15.03.01
Exposed concrete shall mean any concrete other than floors or slabs exposed to
view upon completion of the job. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, the
standard finish for exposed concrete shall be of smooth finish.
15.03.02
A smooth finish shall be obtained with the use of forms having smooth and even
surfaces and edges. Panels and form linings shall be of uniform size and be as
large as practicable and installed with closed joints. Upon removal of forms, the
joint marks shall be smoothened off and all blemishes, projections etc. removed
leaving the surfaces reasonably smooth and unmarred.
Integral Cement Concrete Finish:
15.04.00
15.04.01
When specified on the drawings, an integral cement concrete finish of
specified thickness for floors and slabs shall be applied either monolithic or
bonded, as specified in the drawings and as per IS :2571. The surface shall
compacted and then floated with a wooden float or power floating machine. The
surface shall be tested with a strainght edge and any high and low spots
eliminated. Floating or trowelling of the finish shall be permitted only after all
surface water has evaporated. Dry cement or a mixture of dry cement and sand
shall not be sprinkled directly on the surface of the cement finish to absorb
moisture or to stiffen the mix.
15.05.00
Rubbed Finish:
15.05.01
A rubbed finish shall be provided only on exposed concrete surfaces as specified
on the drawings. Upon removal of forms, all fins and other projections on the
surfaces shall be carefully removed, off sets levelled and voids and / or damaged
sections immediately saturated with water and repaired by filling with concrete or
mortar of the same composition n as was used in the surfaces. The surfaces shall
then be thoroughly wetted and rubbed with carborundum or other abrasive.
Cement mortar may be used in the rubbing, but the finished surfaces shall not be
brush coated with either cement or grout after rubbing. The finished surfaces shall
present a uniform and smooth appearance.
Attachment 2
Page58 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
16.00.00
JOINTS IN CONCRETE : deleted
17.00.00
CEMENT ADDITIVES/ADMIXTURES IN CONCRETE : DELETED
19.00.00
PRECAST CONCRETE ELEMENTS
19.00.01
Precast concrete elements such as columns, fencing posts, door and window
frames, lintels, chajjas, copings, sills, shelves, cover slabs, louvers etc., shall be of
grade of mix as specified in the drawings. Concrete for Precast concrete shall
comply with IS : 456.
19.00.02
Precast concrete elements shall be cast in forms or moulds. The forms / mould
shall be of fiber glass or of steel sections for better finish. Provision shall be made
in the forms and moulds to accommodate fixing devices such as nibs, clips, hooks,
bolts and forming of notches and holes.
19.00.03
Elements shall be cast on suitable bed or platform with firm foundation and free
from wind. The contractor may precast the units on a cement or steel platform
which shall be adequately oiled provided the surface finish is of the same standard
as obtained in the forms. Each unit shall be cast in one operation. Contractor shall
be responsible for the accuracy of the level or shape of the bed or platform
19.00.05
Precast elements shall have a dense surface finish showing no coarse aggregate
and shall have no cracks, crevices or other defects that would interfere with the
proper placing of the units. All angles of the precast units with the exception of the
angles resulting from the splayed or chamfered faces shall be true right angles. The
arises shall be clean and sharp except those specified or shown to be rounded. The
wearing surface shall be true to the lines. On being fractured, the interior of the
units should present a clean homogenous appearance.
19.01.00
Marking, Curing & Lifting:
19.01.01
If so required, Pre-cast units shall be clearly marked with identification name, the
top of member and its location and orientation in the structure. The reinforced side
of the units shall be distinctly marked.
19.01.01
After having been cast in the mould or form the concrete shall be adequately
protected during setting in the first stages of hardening from shocks and from
harmful effects of frost, sunshine, drying winds and cold.
Attachment 2
Page 59 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
19.01.02
All precast work shall be cured for at least 7 days after casting and during that
period each units shall be kept constantly watered or preferably by completely
immersed in water if the size of unit so permits.
19.01.03
No precast unit shall be lifted until the concrete reaches a strength of at least twice
the stress to which the concrete may be subjected at the time of lifting. The precast
articles shall be matured for 28 days before erection or beig built in so that the
concrete shall have sufficient strength to prevent damage to units when first
handled
19.01.04
Precast units shall be stored, transported and placed in position in such a manner
that they will not be overstressed or damaged. The lifting and removal of precast
units shall be undertaken without causing shocks, vibration or under bending
stresses to or in the units. Before lifting and removal takes place, contractor shall
satisfy Owner or his representative that the methods he proposes to adopt for
these operations will not over stress or otherwise affect seriously the strength of
the precast units.
20.00.00
SAMPLING, TESTING AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
20.01.00
General
20.01.01
Concrete cubes for works tests shall be cured under laboratory conditions, except
when in the opinion of the Owner, extreme weather conditions prevail at which
time, these may require curing under job conditions.
20.01.02
For the purposes of statistical analysis, any substandard cube result, which in the
opinion of the Owner, is due to improper sampling, moulding or testing shall be
discarded and a dummy result shall be substituted. The value of a dummy result
shall be equivalent to the average value of the cubes from the same grade of
concrete tested immediately before and after the discarded result. The number of
such substandard cubes shall not exceed 5%.
20.01.03
If the ‘strength’ of the laboratory controlled cubes, for any portion of the concrete
work, falls below the compressive strength specified, the Owner shall have the
right to order a change in the proportions or the water content for the remaining
portion of the structure.
Attachment 2
Page 60 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
20.01.04
If the ‘strength’ of the works cured test cubes falls below the specified strength, the
Owner shall have the right to require provisions for temperature and moisture
control during the period of curing as necessary to secure the required strength,
and may require retests in accordance with the ‘standard method of securing,
preparing and testing specimens from hardened concrete for compressive and
flexural strengths, or load tests to be made on the portion of the building so
affected. All such tests shall be made at the Contractor’s expense.
20.01.05
Unacceptable concrete work shall be dismantled by the Contractor and replaced by
fresh work, meeting the specification requirements. In the course of dismantling, if
any damage is done to the embedded items or adjacent structures, the same shall
be made good, by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Owner, at no extra cost.
20.01.06
Only as a very special case and that too in non-critical areas, the Owner may
accept concrete work which is marginally unacceptable as per the criteria laid
down in lS:456. For such accepted work, payment shall be made at a reduced rate
prorata to the concrete cube strength obtained, against that stipulated.
20.01.07
If directed by Owner, Ultrasonic tests on structures to ascertain the quality and
grade of concreting shall be carried out. Contractor shall arrange for the
specialized agency for conducting the test at his cost. The Contractor shall provide
all the necessary facilities and arrangement for conducting the test at site in terms
of access, scaffolding etc. In case of any defects, the Contractor shall rectify the
same as directed by the Owner. Rebound hammer test shall be carried out for
ascertaining the quality of concrete work, as directed by the Owner.
Test shall be conducted for the water tightness of the liquid retaining
structures as per lS:3370 and IS:6494. The details and sequence of tests shall be as
given hereunder:
a) All arrangements, including supply of water for testing purposes, shall be kept
ready when the tank is nearing completion.
b) Water supply to the tank shall be in stages of 300 to 450 mm height in order to
check the water tightness of the tank at full water level and location of leakage of
various levels.
c) The permissible drop in level in 24 hours shall be 6 mm in case of covered
reservoir/tank and 12 mm in the case of open reservoir-tank. If the structure does
not satisfy the conditions of test and the daily drop in water level is decreasing the
period of test may be extended for further seven days and if specified limit is then
reached, the structure may be considered satisfactory.
20.01.08
Attachment 2
Page 61 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
d) The leakage points shall be marked and separately treated after dewatering
e) The underground structures /water retaining structures shall be retested for
water tightness after rectification. For basement type structures like basin,
neutralising pit, etc. the Contractor shall examine the water tightness against
ingress of sub-soil water.
20.01.09
Optional Tests :
a) Owner , if he so desires, may order for tests to the carried out on cement, sand,
coarse aggregate, water etc., in accordance with the relevant Indian Standards.
b) Tests on cement will be carried out by department and shall include (I) fineness
test, (ii) test for normal consistency, (iii) test for setting time, (iv) test for soundness
(v) test for compressive strength, (vi) test for heat of hydration (by experiment and
by calculations) in accordance with IS :269.
c) Tests on sand shall included (i) sieve test, (ii) test for organic impurities, (iii)
decantation test for determining clay and silt content, (iv) specific gravity test, (v)
test for unit weight and bulkage factor, (vi) test for sieve analysis and fineness
modulus.
d) Tests on coarse aggregate shall include (i) sieve analysis, (ii) specific gravity and
unit weight of dry, loose and rodded aggregate, (iii) soundness and alkali
aggregate reactivity, (iv) petrographic examination, (v) deleterious materials and
organic impurities, (vi) test for aggregate crushing value.
20.02.00
Sampling of Concrete
20.02.01
Samples from fresh concrete shall be taken according to lS:1199 and tested as per
IS:516.
20.02.02
Normally only compressive test shall be performed but the Owner may require
other tests to be performed in accordance with lS:516.
20.02.03
Trial Mixes & mix design: At least four trial mixes shall be made with
minimum 6 test cubes for each mix.
Attachment 2
Page 62 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
20.02.04
10000011 / HB / 11094
Works Tests:
a) The minimum. frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall be
according to clause 15.2.2 of lS:456. However, after getting continuo us satisfactory
results and in the case of voluminous concrete works, the Owner, may at his
discretion reduce the frequency of sampling as follows.
b) For each grade of concrete, and for each 8 hours (shift) of work or part thereof,
at least one sample consisting of six specimens shall be taken from each 150 cum.
of concrete or part thereof, 3 specimens shall be tested at 7 days and remaining 3
shall be tested at 28 days. However, in all cases, the 28 days compressive strength
shall alone be the criterion for acceptance or rejection.
c) To control the consistency of concrete from every mixing, slump tests and
compaction factor tests in accordance with lS:1199 shall be carried out by the
Contractor every two hours or as directed by the Owner. Slumps corresponding to
the test specimens shall be recorded for reference.
d) The strength of sample shall be the average of the strength of three specimens.
The individual variation should not be more than ± 15% òf the average.
20.03.00
Acceptance Criteria
20.03.01
The acceptance criteria of concrete shall be in accordance with clause no.16 of IS456. However, in exceptional circumstances, the Owner may. at his discretion,
accept a concrete of lower strength than that specified at reduced rates.
20.03.02
In case of doubt regarding the grade of concrete used or results of cube strength
are observed to be lower than the designed strength as per specifications at 28
days, compressive strength test of concrete based on core test, ultrasonic test and /
or load test shall be carried out by the digital ultrasonic concrete tester by an
approved agency as directed by the Owner all at the cost of the contractor
20.03.03
Core Test:
a) The points from which cores are to be taken and the number of cores required,
shall be at the discretion of the Owner and shall be representative of the whole of
concrete concerned. In no case, however, shall fewer than three cores be tested.
Cores shall be prepared and tested as described in IS : 516-1959.
Attachment 2
Page 63 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
b) Concrete in the member represented by a core test shall be considered
acceptable if the average equivalent cube strength of the cores is equal to at least
85% of the cube strength of the grade of concrete specified for the corresponding
age and no individual core has a strength less than 75%.
c) In case the core test results do no satisfy the requirements as above or where
such tests have not been done, load test may be resorted to.
20.03.04
Other non-destructive test such as ultrasonic sound methods may be
adopted, in which case the acceptance criteria shall be agreed upon between the
Owner and the contractor and the test shall be done under expert guidance.
20.03.05
Load Test: If in the opinion of the Owner, the safety of the structure,
or any part of the structure is in doubt and the results of other tests are not
encouraging, the Owner may direct load lest to be conducted before ordering its
removal and reconstruction, in accordance with the provision of clause no.17.60 of
IS:456-2000.
20.03.06
Load Tests on Parts of Structure :
a) Load tests should be carried out as soon as possible after expiry of 28 days from
the time of placing of concrete.
b) The structure should be subjected to a load equal to full dead load of the
structure plus 1.25 times the imposed load for a period of 24 hours and then the
imposed load shall be removed. Dead load includes weight of the structural
members plus weight of finishes and walls of partitions, if any, as considered in
the design.
c) The deflection due to imposed load only shall be recorded. If within 24 hours of
removal of the imposed load, the structure does not recover at least 75% of the
deflection under super imposed load, the test may be repeated after a lapse of 72
hours. If the recovery is less than 80% the structure shall be deemed to be
unacceptable.
d) If the maximum deflection in mm shown during 24 hours under load is less
than 40 L/D, where L is the effective span in M and D the overall depth of the
section in mm, it is not necessary for recovery to be measured and the recovery
provision as above will not apply.
Attachment 2
Page 64 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
20.03.07
In case these tests do not satisfy the requirements, the Owner will be at liberty to
reject the concrete, and the contractor, at his own cost, has to dismantle and redo
the same or carry out such remedial measures as approved by the Owner.
21.00.00
Application of Live Load
The designated live load shall be allowed on any structure only after 28 days, after
proper curing is carried out on the last concrete poured in structure.
Attachment 2
Page 65 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
1.00.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
MASONRY AND ALLIED WORKS
SCOPE
This section of the specification covers, furnishing, installation including handling,
transporting, batching, mixing. laying, scaffolding, centering, shuttering, finishing,
curing, protection and repairing till handing over of brick masonry and allied
works including DPC and plinth protection.
2.00.00
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.01 .00
The Contractor shall furnish all skilled and unskilled labour, plant, equipment, scaffolding, materials, etc. required for complete
execution of the work in accordance with the drawings and as described herein and/or as directed by the Owner.
2.02.00
All workmanship shall be in accordance with the latest standards and best possible
practice. Masonry work shall be true to line & level as shown on drawings. All
such masonry shall be tightly built against structural members and bonded with
dowels, anchors, inserts, etc. as shown on the drawings.
2.03.00
The Contractor shall carryout all works for setting out the building lines,locating
the co-ordinates and establishing the reduced levels (RL’s) on the basis of reference
grid lines and bench mark, which shall be furnished by the Owner, at one or more
locations.
2.04.00
Any approval, instructions permission, checking, review, etc. whatsoever by the
Owner shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility and obligation
regarding adequacy, correctness, completeness, safety, strength, quality,
workmanship, etc.
3.00.00
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.01.00
All applicable standards, acts and codes of practice referred to shall be the latest
editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions. A complete set
of all these documents shall generally be available at site, with the Contractor.
3.02.00
In case of conflict between this specification and those (IS Standards, Codes etc.)
referred to in clause 3.03.00 the former shall prevail.
Attachment 2
Page 66 of 219
3.03.0
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
Some of the applicable Indian standards, Codes, etc. are referred to here
below: IS: 516 1959 Method of strength test for concrete IS: 702 1988 Specification for industrial
bitumen IS: 1077 1992 Specification for Common burnt clay bricks IS: 1200 (Part 3) 1976 Method of
measurement of building and civil Engineering works - Brickwork IS: 1200 (Part 4) 1976 Method of
measurement of building and civil Engineering works – Stone masonry IS: 1200 (Part 8) 1974
Method of measurement of building and civil Engineering works – Demolition & dismantling
IS : 2116 1980 Specification for sand for masonry mortars
IS:2212 1991 Code of practice for brick work
IS:2250 1981 Code of practice for preparation and use of masonry mortar
IS: 2386 (Part 1) 1963 Methods of test for aggregate for concrete – Particle size & shape
IS: 2386 (Part 2) 1963 Methods of test for aggregate for concrete – Estimation of deleterious materials and organic
impurities
IS: 2691 1988 Specification for burnt clay facing work
IS 3025 (Part 15) 1984 Methods of sampling and test (physical & chemical) for water & waste water – Total residue
(totals solids dissolved and suspended)
IS:3414 1968 Design and installation of joint in buildings
IS: 3495 (Part 1) 1992 Method of tests for burnt clay building bricks – Determination of compressive strength
IS: 3495 (Part 2) 1992 Method of tests for burnt clay building bricks – Determination of water absorption
IS: 3495 (Part 3) 1992 Method of tests for burnt clay building bricks – Determination of efflorescence
IS: 3495 (Part 4) 1992 Method of tests for burnt clay building bricks – Determination of warpage
IS:3696 (Part 1) 1987 Safety code for scaffolds and ladders - Scaffolding
IS:3696 (Part 2) 1991 Safety code for scaffolds and ladders - Ladders
IS: 4031 (Part 5) 1998 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cements - Determination of initial and final setting time
IS: 4031 (Part 7) 1998 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cements - Determination of compressive strength of
masonry cement
IS:4130 1991 Safety code during demolition of buildings
IS:4326 1993 Code of practice for earth quake resistant design and construction of buildings
SP : 20 1991 Hand book on masonry design & construction
SP: 25 1984 Handbook on causes and prevention of cracks in buildings
4.00.0
BRICK MASONRY
4.01.0
Materials
4.01.01
Properties of common building materials for masonry, viz., burnt clay bricks,
sand, lime accordance with the technical specification for Handling of Common
Building Materials.
4.01.02
IS:2250 shall be followed as general guidance for preparation and use of mortar.
Only cement-sand mortar shall be used. Lime shall be added for composite mortar
with specific approval of the Owner.
4.01.03
Unless otherwise specified, mortar for brickwork having one or more brick
thickness shall be 1 part cement and 6 parts sand by volume. Mortar for halfbrick
thick walls shall be 1 part cement and 4 parts sand by volume. Richer mix
proportion shall be used, whenever specified or as per design requirement. Mortar
shall meet the compressive strength requirement as per IS:2250 and IS:1905. Sand
shall conform to IS:2116. Grading of sand shall be tested as per IS:2386 (Part 1)
Attachment 2
Page 67 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
4.01.04
Sand, whose grading falls outside the specified limits due to excess or deficiency of
coarse or fine particles, may be processed to comply with the standard by
screening through a suitably sized sieve and/or blending with required quantities
of suitable sizes of sand particles.
4.01.05
Cement and sand shall be thoroughly mixed dry in a mechanical mixer and water
shall then be added to obtain a mortar of the consistency of a stiff paste, care being
taken to add just sufficient water for the purpose. Water shall be clean and free
from injurious amount of deleterious matter such as oil, acid, alkali, salt and
vegetable growth. Hand mixing may be allowed by the Owner on clean approved
platform in special cases only. Mortar shall be used as early as possible after
mixing, before it begins to set and preferably within 30 minutes after water is
added to the dry mixture. Mortar unused for more than 30 minutes shall generally
be rejected and removed from site of work. However, the Owner may allow the
use of mortar upto 2 hours. Surplus mortar droppings while laying masonry, if
received on a su rface free from dirt, may be mixed with fresh mortar if permitted
by the Owner, who may direct for addition of extra cement and this shall be
implemented.
4.02.00
Laying
4.02.01
Bricks shall be soaked in water before use for at least six (6) hours. The contractor
shall provide tanks of sufficient capacity to allow the specified immersion. Bricks
shall be laid in water by hand and not thrown. The bricks shall not be too wet at
the time of use, as they are likely to slip on the mortar bed and there will be
difficulty in ensuring plumb ness of the wall.
_4.02.02
Brickwork in general shall be as per IS 2212-1991. Bricks shall be laid in English
bond, unless otherwise specified, with frogs upward over a full bed of evenly laid
mortar, and slightly pressed and tapped into final position to the lines levels and
shape as shown in the drawing fully embedded in mortar. All joints including
inside faces shall be flushed and packed. Not more than 8 courses shall generally
be laid in a day. The first course itself shall be made horizontal by providing
enough mortar in the bed joint to fill up any undulations. The horizontality of
courses and the verticality of wall sh all be checked very often with spirit level and
plumb bob respectively. Damaged or broken brick or brick bats shall not be used
in brick work. Cut bricks may be used to complete bond or as closers or around
irregular openings.
Attachment 2
Page 68 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
_4.02.03
Half-brick masonry Half-brick work shall be done in the same manner as for brick
work except that all courses shall be laid in stretchers. Both faces shall be true to
plane and the joints raked on both faces.
4.03.00
Raking Out Joints Joint of brick work shall be raked out to a depth of 12 mm using
appropriate tool , at the time of laying and face of brickwork shall be kept clear of
all mortar.
4.04.00
Corbelling, Cornices, String Courses Corbelling shall be effected by 1/4 brick
projection for ordinary work and 1/8 brick projection required from consideration
of strength.
Reinforcing Anchorage For external walls, the anchors in the form of flats or rods
from spandrel beams and columns and any other anchoring and reinforcement as
shown on drawing shall be adequately embedded in the masonry.
4.05.00
4.06.00
Protection of brick work The brick work shall be protected and covered with
gunny bags or water proof sheets from the effects of inclement weather, rain, frost,
etc., during the construction and until the mortar sets.
4.07.00
Curing: All brick works shall be kept moist for 10 days after laying.
4.08.00
Brick-on-edge coping, brick paving and cut brick corner: The top course of all
plinths, parapets, steps and tops of walls below R.C.C. slabs, beams and paving
etc. shall be laid with brick-on-edge, unless specified otherwise. Care shall be taken
that bricks forming the top corners and ends of walls shall be properly radiated
and keyed into position as specified in IS:2212.
5.00.00
SCAFFOLDING
Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided except in
case of building upto two storeys where single scaffolding may be used if
permitted by the Owner. The supports shall be sound and strong and of steel
tubular construction unless otherwise permitted by the Owner. The vertical posts
shall be tied together with horizontal pieces over which the scaffolding planks
shall be fixed. In cases where single scaffolding has been allowed by the Owner,
the inner ends or horizontal scaffolding poles shall rest in a hole provided in the
header course only. One header for each hole shall be left out. Such holes,
however, shall not be allowed in pillars having width less than one metre, or
immediately near the skew backs of arches. The holes left in masonry work for
supporting the scaffolding shall be immediately filled and made good before
plastering.
Attachment 2
Page 69 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
6.00.00
STONE MASONRY
6.01.00
Random rubble masonry :
6.01.01
The rubble shall be of the best quality trap / granite / ballast stones obtained from
the approved quarry. The sample of the stone, to be used shall be got approved
from the Engineer-in-Charge. All stones shall, generally be freshly quarried and
shall be sound, dense, hard, free from segregation, cracks, weathered portions and
other structural defects or imperfections, tending to off set soundness and strength.
The percentage of water absorption shall generally not exceed 5% by weight. All
stones shall be wetted before use.
Stones shall be neatly worked to requisite sections and forms and shall have fully
dressed beds and joints. At least 50% of the stones shall be 0.015 cum. in content
when reckoned individually. The length of stones for stone masonry shall not
exceed three times the height and the breadth or base shall not be greater than
three fourth the thickness of wall, or not less than 15 cm. The height of stone may
be upto 30 cm. Stones shall be laid on the natural beds and shall run sufficiently
inside the wall thickness. No hollow space shall be left out and inter spaces of
stones being filled with mortar and stone chips, driven hard and not with mortar
only.
6.01.02
All mortar to be used shall be of the type and proportion mentioned in the item.
Cement, sand and water to be used shall conform to their relevant specifications as
described under cement concrete. The masonry shall be laid to plumb, lines levels,
curves, shapes as shown in drawings. All required holes for passage of water or
pipes are to be embedded during construction as specified.
6.02.03
All stones shall be wetted before laying in masonry. Concrete surfaces of columns,
beams, lintels, chajjas etc. coming in contact with masonry shall be properly
chipped, washed and wetted before start of masonry work. The concrete surface
coming in contact of masonry shall be given a thick coat of cement slurry as the
masonry work progress in height. Clean chips and spawls carefully selected to fit
in the space shall be wedged into the mortar joints and beds wherever necessary to
avoid thick beds or joints or mortar. However, proper shaping and dressing of
stones shall be done prior to their layin g in masonry and hammering shall not be
resorted to often after the stones are laid in position. The bond stones shall be used
in every square meter area of masonry wall and shall extend from front to back to
thin walls having width of 600 mm. and shall overlap by at least 150 mm. in walls
having thickness more than 600 mm. when laid from both sides. When the work
has to be started on the old or the one completed a long while ago or in the
previous working seasons. Care shall be taken to roughen and clean old surface
satisfactorily without disturbing the masonry before laying the new. It shall be
wetted before laying the bedding mortar.
Attachment 2
Page 70 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
6.02.04
When practicable, the whole masonry in any structure shall be carried out upto a
uniform level throughout. But when breaks are unavoidable in carrying the work
continuously in uniform level, sufficiently long steps shall be left. All junction of
walls shall be formed at the time when walls are being built. Cross walls should be
carefully bonded into the main walls. All masonry built in cement mortar shall be
kept continuously wet for 14 days from the date of laying. Should the mortar
perish i.e. becomes dry, white or powder through neglect of watering and if the
masonry shows hollow joints or non adherence of mortar to the stones or if the
work does not conform to drawings and specifications, the work shall be pulled
down and rebuilt by the contractor at his own cost and risk. All masonry shall be
thoroughly cleaned and washed down on completion and all stains, adhering
mortar removed from the surface
and raking of joints carried out as the scaffolding is being lowered and removed.
Holes left in masonry for supporting scaffolding shall be filled and made good
before pointing / plastering.
6.02.00
Coursed rubble masonry :
6.02.01
The specifications for Random rubble masonry as given in Para 6.01.00 shall
generally apply to these for quality of stones, workmanship etc. except for the
following.
The face of the stones shall be square / rectangular in shape and shall be so
dressed all-round that those can be set on proper bases and shall render uniform
joints. The stones may have bushing on the face but shall not project more than 40
mm. the external faces shall be laid in courses of about 200 mm. height or as
specified and the internal face shall be finished with rubble backing.
6.02.02
6.02.03
The other specifications shall be same as per specifications for R.R. Masonry
mentioned above.
7.00.00
PRECAST CEMENT CONCRETE SOLID BLOCK MASONRY :
7.01.01
Precast cement concrete solid blocks shall be of best quality locally available /
manufactured at site and should be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before
incorporation in the work. The ingredient and cement concrete used stall confirm
to relevant I.S. as stipulated in specification for cement concrete works herein
before.
Attachment 2
Page 71 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
7.01.02
Minimum crushing strength of the solid blocks shall be 40 to 60 kg / Sqcm. at 28th
day after curing. The type of the bond to be adopted will be decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge but vertical joints shall be staggered. The size of the blocks
shall be 390 x 1 40 mm and 390 x 190 x 100 mm. and the proportion used in making
the blocks shall be 1:11 (1 cement : 11 fine and coarse aggregates). The blocks shall
be cured well at least for 14 days before incorporation in to the work. The cement
mortar for concrete blocks masonry shall be 1:4 and joints shall not be more than
10 mm. thick.
7.01.03
The workmanship shall be as stipulated in the specification for brick work as
applicable. The rate quoted shall include cost of all materials, labour including
form work in casting the blocks curing transporting, handling, hosting the blocks
to proper level, curing masonry etc. complete.
8.00.00
DAMP PROOF COURSE (DPC)
8.01.00
Damp proof course shall be 50 mm thick (unless specified otherwise)
consisting of cement concrete in the proportion 1:1 1/2:3 (1 cement, 1 ½ sand, 3
stone chips 10 mm down) with admixture of a water proofing compound as
approved by the Owner. The percentage of admixture shall be as per
manufacturer’s specification.
8.02.00
The surface of the brick work/ stone masonry work shall be leveled and prepared
before laying the cement -concrete. Edges of DPC shall be straight and even. The
side shuttering shall consist of wooden forms and shall be strongly and properly
fixed so that it does not get disturbed during compaction and mortar does not leak
through.
The concrete mix shall be of workable consistency and dense. When the side
shuttering is removed the surface should come smooth without any honey
combing. The top surface shall be double chequerred and cured by ponding for at
least 7 days. Cement concrete shall be allowed to dry for 24 hours after curing and
hot bitumen of grade 85/25 Conforming to IS: 702 at the rate of 1.7 kg/sqm shall
be applied over the dried surface of cement concrete properly cleaned with
brushes and finally with a cloth soaked in kerosene oil. The bitumen shall be
applied uniformly so that no blank spaces are left anywhere.
8.03.00
9.00.00
PLINTH PROTECTION
9.01.00
Unless otherwise shown on drawing plinths of all buildings shall be protected
with 1000 mm wide plinth protection consisting of 50 mm thick PCC M20 grade
with 12 mm maximum size aggregate over 200 mm thick stone soling using 40 mm
nominal size rammed consolidated & grouted with fine sand.
Attachment 2
Page 72 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
9.02.00
For the purpose of stone filling, the ground shall be dressed consolidated by
ramming or by light rolling & a 12 mm thick cushion of sand be laid. Over this 75
mm thick layer of stone aggregate, with stone size not more than 40 mm, shall be
spread uniformly. This shall be then compacted by light roller (by 1/2 ton roller &
4 to 5 passes) or any other means as approved by Owner. After compacting, sand
shall be uniformly spread & water shall be sprayed over it to ensure that the voids
are filled with sand. Water shall be spread in such a manner that bulking in sand
does not take place.
9.03.00
This process shall be repeated till the filling reaches the desired level. When it
reaches the finished level, surface shall be flooded with water for 24 hours,
allowed to dry & then rammed & consolidated to avoid any settlement at a later
stage.
9.04.00
Plinth protection shall be laid with a minimum outward slope of 1:50.
10.00.00
SAMPLING TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL
10.01.00
General
a) The Contractor shall carry out all sampling and testing in accordance with the
relevant Indian Standards and/or International Standards and shall conduct such
tests as are called for by the Owner. Where no specific testing procedure is
mentioned, the tests shall be carried out as per the prevalent accepted Engineering
practice to the directions of the Owner. Tests shall be done in the field and at a
laboratory approved by the Owner and the Contractor shall submit to the Owner,
the test results in triplicate within three days after completion of a test. The Owner
may, at his discretion, waive -off some of the stipulations given below, for small
and unimportant operations.
b) Material/work found unsuitable for acceptance, shall be removed and replaced
by the Contractor. The works shall be redone as per specification requirements and
to the satisfaction of the Owner.
10.02.00
Quality Assurance Programme
The Contractor shall submit and finalise a detailed Field Quality Assurance
Programme within 15 days from the date of award of the Contract according to the
requirements of the specification. This shall include setting up of a testing
laboratory, arrangement of testing apparatus/equipment, deployment of
qualified/experienced manpower, preparation of format for record, field quality
plan etc. On finalised field quality plan, Owner shall identify, customer’s hold
points beyond which work shall not proceed without written approval from the
Owner.
Attachment 2
Page73 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10.03.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
Frequency of sampling and testing including the methods for conducting the tests
are given in Table below. The testing shall be done at site. The testing frequencies
set forth are the desirable minimum and the Owner shall have the full authority to
carry out or call for tests as frequently as he may deem necessary to satisfy himself
that the materials and works comply with the appropriate specifications. Some of
the type tests and performance tests which are not included in the table shall be
carried out at the manufacturers premises or at an independent Government
approved laboratory.
FREQUENCY OF SAMPLING AND TESTING
SL
NO.
I
Type of
Material
/Work
Burnt bricks &
Fly ash lime
Bricks
Nature of Test /
Characteristics
Method of test
Dimensions
Relevant clause of IS
: 1077 for burnt clay
bricks and IS:12894
for fly ash lime
bricks
IS:3495(Part-I)
Compressive
Strength
Water absorption
II
III
IV
V
Sand
Cement
Water
Mortar
General Quality
Visual
Deleterious
material
IS:2386(Part-II)
Grading
Sieve analysis as per
IS:2386 (Part-I)
Setting time
IS:4031(part 5)
Compressive
Strength
IS:4031(part 7)
Harmful
substances, pH
Value
Initial setting
time
Compressive
strength
Compressive
Strength
IS:3025(part 11)
Consistency
Appendix-B of
IS:2250
Appendix-C of
IS:2250
Visual & Physical
measurement
Physical
measuement
Water Retentivity
VI
Masonry
Construction
IS:3495(Part-II)
Workmanship
Verticality and
Alignment
IS:4031(part 5)
IS:516
Appendix-A of
IS:2250
No. of Samples &
frequency of Test
Remarks
Max. 8 % deviation for non modular bricks. For
modular bricks as per clause no. 5.2 of IS:1077. for
face bricks as per IS:2691. For fly ash lime bricks as
per IS:12894
As specified
A set of 20 bricks
(min.) for each lot
of 50,000 or part
thereof for all
tests(a to c)
One set of samples
from each source of
material per 100
cu.m. or part
thereof
One set of samples
from each source of
material per 100
cum or part thereof.
One set of sample
from each source of
material per 100
cum. or part
thereof.
One set of sample
for each lot of
material received
One set of sample
for each lot of
material received
Once a month for
each source
Once a month for
each source
Once a month for
each source
One sample(
Consisting of min.
3 specimens)
One sample for
each type of mix
One sample for
each type of mix
All work
Max. 20%. However 15% for face bricks only
As Specified
Clause 3.3. of IS:2116
Table 1 of IS:2116
No separate testing is required in case cement is
tested for preparation of concrete mix.
No separate testing is required in case cement is
No separate testing is required in case water is
Table-1 of IS:2250
Clause 7.2 of IS:2250
Clause 7.3 of IS:2250
As per specification and clause no. 11.0 of IS:2212
for brickwork.
All work
Attachment 2
Page 74 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10.04.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
All masonry shall be built true and plumb within the tolerances prescribed as
below. Care shall be taken to keep the perpends properly aligned.
a) Deviation in verticality in total height of any wall of a building more than one
storey in height shall not exceed +/- 12.5 mm.
b) Deviation from vertical within a story shall not exceed +/- 6 mm per 3 m height.
c) Deviation from the position shown on the plan of any brickwork more than one
storey in height shall not exceed 12.5 mm.
d) Relative displacement between load bearing walls in adjacent storeys intended
to be in vertical alignment shall not exceed 6 mm.
e) Deviation of bed joint from horizontal in any length upto 12 m shall not exceed
6mm, and in any length over 12m it shall not exceed 12.5 mm total.
f) Deviation from the specified thickness of bed-joints, cross-joints or
perpends shall not exceed ± 3 mm.
Attachment 2
Page 75 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
PLASTERING & POINTING
1.00.00
SCOPE
1 .01.00
This specification covers the plastering work on brick or concrete faces of specified
thickness with architectural features wherever necessary. For application of
Cement and Cement lime - plaster finishing IS:1661-1972 “Code of practice for
application of cement and lime plaster finishes” shall be applicable.
2.00.00
MIX
2.01.00
Mortar for plastering in the proportion as specified on drawings/ specification,
shall be mixed in a dry state and then wetted and mixed thoroughly to obtain the
required consistency. The mortar shall be mixed in an approved manner including
machine mixing if desired by the Owner and in batches so that the mortar is
consumed within half an hour of mixing. Any mortar for plaster which is
partially set shall be rejected and removed from site.
2.02.00
The mix for plastering shall be as follows:
230 brick wall
Outside Plaster
Inside Plaster
115 brick wall (To be used only for inside walls)
Concrete Ceiling Plaster
3.00.00
3.01.00
3.02.00
3.03.00
3.04.00
First layer (base coat) of 12 mm thick 1:6
(1 Cement, 6 Fine sand and second layer
(finish coat) of 6 mm thick 1 : 4 (1 Cement,
4 Fine sand)
12 mm thick 1 : 6 (1 Cement, 6 Fine sand)
12 mm thick 1: 4 (1Cement, 4 Fine sand)
6 mm thick - 1 : 4 (1Cement, 4 Fine sand)
APPLICATION
Before application of plaster, surface is to be prepared conforming to IS:1661 latest
revision.
In all plaster work, mortar shall be applied with somewhat more than that the
required thickness and well pressed into the joint and in the surface and rubbed
and levelled with a flat wooden rule to give required thickness.
Plaster, when more than 12 mm thick, shall be applied in two coats base coat
followed by the finishing coat. Thickness of base coat shall be just sufficient to fill
up all unevenness in the surface; no single coat, however, shall exceed 12 mm in
thickness. The undercoat shall be thicker than the upper coat. The overall thickness
of the plaster shall not be less than the minimum thickness shown in the drawings
or specified in the specification. The undercoat shall be allowed to dry and shrink
before applying the second coat of plaster.
Cement mortar for plastering work shall be used within 30 minutes after adding
water to cement and should be kept agitated at intervals of 20 minutes.
Attachment 2
Page 76 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
3.05.00
The undercoat shall be scratched or roughened before it is fully hardened to form a
mechanical key. The method of application shall be ‘thrown on’ rather than
‘applied by trowel’. The finished surface shall be true to line and plumb and the
Contractor shall without any extra cost to Owner make up any irregularity in the
masonry/ concrete work with plaster. The mortar shall adhere to the surface
intimately when set and there should be no hollow sound when struck. All vertical
edges of pillars, door jambs etc. shall be chamferedor rounded off as directed by
the Owner. All corner must be finished to their true angles or rounded. Any
plastering that is damaged shall be repaired and left in good condition at the
completion of the job without any extra cost to Owner.
4.00.00
Cement Pointing
4.01.00
Where shown on drawing, Schedule of Items, or as directed by the Owner,
exposed brick faces shall be cement rule pointed. The mortar shall be raked out of
the joints to a depth of 12 mm. The dust shall be brushed out of the joints and the
wall well wetted.The pointing shall be kept wet for 7 days. During this period it
shall be suitably protected from all damages.
5.00.00
CURING
5.01.00
Each undercoat shall be damp cured for at least 2 days and kept damp
continuously till the next coat is applied. All final plastered surfaces after laying
and sufficiently hardened shall be kept wetted for a minimum period of seven (7)
days and shall be protected from excessive heat and sunlight by suitable approved
means.
6.00.00
LIME PUNNING (NEERU FINISH)
6.01.00
For plastered surface, where an even smooth surface is specified, lime punning
with 5 parts of shell lime properly slaked, sieved and aged, mixed with 1 part
clean, washed, sieved, fine sand by volume shall be done. The thickness of lime
punning shall not be less than 2 mm and not more than 3 mm. The plastered
surface shall be saturated with water before application of the lime punning. The
lime punning shall be applied by skilled workmen and given a smooth and even
finish.
Attachment 2
Page 77 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
C-06:
1.00.00
1.01.00
2.00.00
2.01.00
2.02.00
2.03.00
2.03.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
FLOORING & ALLIED WORKS
SCOPE
This specification covers furnishing, installation, finishing, curing, testing,
protection, maintenance till handing over various types of floor finishes and allied
items of work as listed below:
a) In situ Terrazzo finish
b) Integral finish to concrete base.
d) Metallic hardener like ‘Ironite’ finish
e) IPS Flooring
f) Terrazzo Tiled finish
g) Glazed tile finish
h) Acid resistant tile finish
i) PVC tile finish
General
Base: The base to receive the finish either formed concrete sub-base or floor slab
covered under other relevant specifications.
Commencement, scheduling and sequence of the finishing works shall be planned
in detail and must be specifically approved by the Engineer, keeping in view the
activities of other agencies working in the area. However, the contractor shall
remain fully responsible for all normal precautions and vigilance to prevent any
damage whatsoever till handing over.
Only workers specially experienced in particular items of finishing work shall be
engaged; where such workers are not readily available, with the Engineer’s
permission, experienced supervisors recommended by the manufacturer shall be
engaged. In particular cases where the Consultant so desire, the Contractor shall
get the finishing items installed by the manufacturer.
The surface to the treated shall be thoroughly examined by the Contractor. Any
rectification necessary shall be brought to the notice of the Consultant and his
approval shall be obtained regarding method and extent of such rectification work.
For all types of flooring, skirting, dado and similar works the base to receive the
finish shall be adequately roughened by chipping, raking out joints and cleaning
thoroughly all dirt, grease etc., with water and hard brush and (detergent if
required, unless otherwise directed by the manufacturer of any special finishing
treatment, the base shall be thoroughly soaked with water and all excess water
mopped up. The surface shall be donedry where adhesive are used for fixing the
finishes. Prior to commencement of actual finishing the approval of the Consultant
shall be taken as to the acceptability of the surface.
Attachment 2
Page 78 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
3.00.00
3.01.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
CODES AND STANDARDS
All applicable standards, acts and codes of practice referred to shall be the
latest editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions. A
Contractor.
Some of the applicable Indian standards, Codes, etc. are referred to here below:
3.02.00
3.03.00
IS :1237 1980 Specification for Cement concrete flooring tiles
IS : 1443 1972 Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement concrete flooring tiles.
IS : 2114 1984 Code of practice for laying in situ terrazzo floor
IS : 2571 1970 Code of practice for laying-in-situ concrete flooring
IS : 5318 1969 Laying of flexible sheet and tile flooring
IS: 4441 1980 Code of practice for use of silica type chemical resistant mortar
IS : 4457 1982 Specification for Ceramic unglaged vitreous acid resistant tiles.
IS : 13753 1993 Specification for dust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of E> 10% Group (B IiI)
IS : 13753 1993 Specification for dust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 6% <E< 10% Group (B II b)
IS : 13753 1993 Specification for dust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 3% <E< 6% Group (B II a)
IS : 13753 1993 Specification for dust pressed ceramic tiles with low water absorption of E< 3% Group (B
I)
4.00.00
MATERIALS
4.01.00
Materials required for individual finishing items are specified under respective
items. In general, all such materials shall be as per relevant IS Codes where
available. In all cases these materials shall be of the best quality available
indigenously unless specified otherwise.
The materials for finishing items must be procured from well-reputed specified
manufacturers and on the basis of approval of samples by the Engineer. The
materials shall be ordered, procured and stored well in advance to avoid
compulsion to use substandard items to maintain the construction schedule.
4.02.00
5.00.00
INTEGRAL FINISHING TO CONCRETE BASE
5.01.00
While the surface of the concrete laid as per specification for “cast-in situ concrete
and allied works” has been fully compacted and levelled but the concrete is still
‘green’ a thick slurry made with neat cement shall be applied evenly and worked
in with iron floats. When the slurry starts to set, it shall be pressed with iron floats,
to have a firm compact smooth surface without any trowel mark or undulations.
This finish shall be as thin as possible by using 2.2 Kg of cement per sqm. of area.
The surface shall be kept in shade for 24 hours and then cured for at least 7 days
continuously by flooding with water. The surface shall not be subjected to any load
or abrasion till 21 days after laying. As desired by the Engineer, the surface, while
still ‘green’ shall be indented by pressing strings. The markings shall be of even
depth, in straight lines and the panels shall be of uniform and symmetrical
patterns.
Attachment 2
Page 79 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
6.00.00
IN-SITU TERRAZZO FINISH
6.01.00
It shall consist of an underbed and a topping laid over an already laid and matured
concrete base.
6.02.00
Thickness
6.02.01
Unless otherwise specified the total thickness of the finish shall be minimum
50mm for horizontal and 25 mm for vertical surface of which the topping shall be
not less than 12 mm and 10mm respectively. While the topping shall be of uniform
thickness the thickness of underbed may vary, to provide necessary slopes. The
vertical surface shall project out 6 mm from the adjacent plaster or other finishes.
Necessary cutting into the surface receiving the finish shall be done to
accommodate the specified thickness.
6.02.02
All junctions of vertical with horizontal shall be rounded neatly to uniform radius
of 25 mm.
6.03.00
Mix
6.03.01
Underbed : the underbed for floors and similar horizontal surface shall consist of a
mix of 1 part cement, 2 part sand and 4 parts stone chips by volume. For vertical
surfaces the mix shall consist of 1 part cement to 3 parts of coarse and by volume.
The stone chips shall be 12.5mm down well graded. Just sufficient water shall be
added to give a workable consistency.
6.03.02
Topping : The mix for the topping shall be composed of cement, colour pigment,
marble powder and marble chips. Proportions of the ingredients shall be such as to
produce the terrazzo of colour, texture and pattern approved by the Engineer. The
cement shall be grey, to which pigment shall be added to achieve the desired
colour. To 3 parts of this mixture 1 part marble powder by weight shall be added
and thoroughly mixed dry. To 1 part of this mix, 1.5 parts of marble chips by
volume shall be added and thoroughly mixed dry again. The pigment added shall
conform to the relevant Indian Standard specification and must be stable and non
fading. It must be very finely ground. The marble powder shall be from white
marble and shall be finer than I S Seive No. 30. the size of marble chips may be
between 3 mm to 20 mm. Sufficient quantity to cover each visible area shall be
prepared in one lot to ensure uniform colour. Sufficient water to make it just
workable shall be added, to a quantity of mix that can be used up immediately
before it starts to set.
Laying
The underbed shall be laid in panels. The panels shall not be more than 5 sq.m. in
area of which no side shall be more than 2.5 m long. For exposed locations the
maximum area of a panel shall be 2.0 sq.m. The panels shall be laid in alternate
bays or chequered board pattern. No panels shall be in contact with another
already laid until the latter has contracted to the full extent.
6.04.00
6.04.01
Attachment 2
Page 80 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
6.04.02
Dividing strips made of aluminium shall be used for forming the panels. The strips
shall exactly match the total depth of underbed plus topping.
6.04.03
After laying, the underbed shall be levelled compacted and brought to proper
grade with a screed or float. The topping shall be laid after about 24 hours while
the underbed is still somewhat ‘green’ but firm enough to receive the topping. A
slurry of the mixture of cement and pigment already made shall be spread evenly
and brushed in just before laying the topping. The topping shall be rolled for
horizontal areas and thrown and pressed for verical areas to extract all superfluous
cement water and to achieve a compact dense mass
fully bonded with the underbed. The surface of the topping shall be trowelled
over, pressed and brought to a smooth dense surface showing a minimum 75%
area covered by marble chips in an even pattern of distribution.
Curing: The surface after laying shall be left for about 12 to 18 hours and then
cured by allowing water to stand on the surface or by covering with wet sack for
four days.
6.05.00
6.06.00
Grinding and Polishing
6.06.01
When the surface has sufficiently hardened it shall be watered and ground evenly
with rapid cutting coarse grade (No. 60) grit blocks, till the marble chips are
exposed and the surface is smooth. Then the surface shall be thoroughly washed
and cleaned. A grout, with already prepared mixture of cement and pigment shall
be applied to fill up all pinholes.
6.06.02
This surface shall be cured for 7 days by keeping it moist and then ground with
fine grit block (No. 120). It shall again be cleaned with water, the slurry applied
again to fill up pinhole that might have appeared and allowed to be cured again
for 5 days. Finally the surface is ground a third time with very fine grit blocks (No.
320) to get smooth surface without any pinhole. The grinding shall be done by a
suitable machine. Where grinding machine cannot be used hand grinding may be
allowed when the first rubbing shall be with carborundum stone of coarse grade
(No. 60), second rubbing with medium grade (No. 80) and final rubbing and
polished with fine grade (No. 120). The surface shall be cleaned with water, dried
and 4 covered with oil free clean sawdust. The final polishing shall be postponed
until just before handing over, if desired by the Engineer.
6.06.03
Just before handing over, the surface shall be dusted with Oxalic acid at the rate of
0.33 gm per sq. m., water sprinkled on it and finished by buffing with felt or
hessain bobs. The floor be cleaned with soft moist rag and dried.
Attachment 2
Page 81 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
7.00.00
METALLIC HARDENER FINISH
7.01.00
It shall consist of an underbed and a topping (incorporating iron particles) laid
over an already laid and matured concrete base.
Thickness:
7.02.00
7.02.01
7.03.00
7.03.01
7.04.00
Unless otherwise specified the total thickness of the finish shall be minimum
50mm for horizontal surface of which topping shall not be less than 12 mm. While
topping shall be of uniform thickness, the underbed may vary in thickness to
provide necessary slope. The vertical surface shall project 6 mm from adjacent
plaster or other finishes. Necessary cutting into the surface receiving the finish
shall be done to accommodate the specified thickness.
Material:
The hardening compound shall be uniformly graded iron particles, free from nonferrous metal impurities, oil, grease, sand, soluble alkaline compounds or other
injurious materials. When desired by the Engineer, actual samples shall be tested.
Mix
7.04.01
The underbed for floor and similar horizontal surfaces and for vertical surface
shall be as per clause 6.03.01 of this section.
7.04.02
Proportion of metallic hardener shall be as specified or as indicated by the
manufacturer. However, in absence of any such direction 1 part metallic hardener
shall be mixed dry with 4 parts cement, by weight. To this mixture 6 mm nominal
size stone chips shall be added in proportion of 1 part cement mixed with hardener
to 2 parts of stone chips by volume and uniformly mixed. Minimum quantity of
water shall be added to make it workable.
Laying
7.05.00
7.05.01
7.05.02
7.05.03
The concrete floor shall be laid in panels of 1m x 1m or as directed by the Engineer.
Alternate panels shall be laid on one day followed by the other group of alternate
panels the next day. The edges of the panels shall be supported either by wooden
strips or flat angle iron pieces fixed in position property. The concrete floor shall be
laid upto the required grade. The forms if any shall remain sufficiently projecting
to take the finish. The surface shall be roughened by wire brush as soon as
possible.
The junction of floor and walls, floors and dado or skirting shall be rounded off as
directed.
Wooden strips or flat iron pieces shall be removed from their places before the
succeeding alternate layers are laid. The finish shall be laid while the concrete
underbed is still very ‘green’ within about 3 hours of laying of the later. The finish
shall be of uniform thickness and even dense surface without trowel marks,
pinhole etc. The topping layer shall be pressed firmly and worked vigorously and
quickly to secure full bond with the concrete base. Just when the initial set starts
the surface shall be finished and smoothened with steel trowel. The finish floor
shall be cured for 7 days by keeping it wet.
Attachment 2
Page 82 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
8.00.00
IPS FLOORING (Concrete Floor finish with floating Coat of Neat Cement)
8.01.00
It shall consist of an underbed and topping laid on an already laid and matured
concrete base.
8.02.00
Thickness
8.02.01
It shall have thickness of 50 mm for horizontal and 20 mm for verticalsurfaces
unless otherwise specified. All junctions between vertical andhorizontal work shall
be rounded neatly to a uniform radius of 25 mm.
8.03.00
Underbed Mix
8.03.01
The underbed for floor and similar horizontal surfaces consists of a mix of 1 part
cement, 2 parts sand and 4 parts stone chips by volume. For vertical surfaces the
mix shall consist of 1 part cement to 3 parts sand by volume. The sand shall be
coarse. The stone chips shall be 12.5 mm down well graded. Only sufficient water
to be added to give a workable consistency.
8.04.00
Topping Mix
8.04.01
The topping shall be floating coat of neat cement using not less than 2.2 kg of
cement per sq. m. area.
8.05.00
Laying
8.05.01
The IPS flooring including the underbed shall be laid in alternate bays or in
chequered board pattern. No panel shall be cast in contact with another already
laid till the contraction of the latter has already taken place. The maximum area of
each panel shall be 5 m x 5m. A cement grout shall be applied and worked in to the
surface to receive the finish, the underbed then laid, compacted and levelled to
proper grade with a screed or float. The requisite slope as shown in the drawings
or directed by the Consultant shall also be provided in under bed only maintaining
a minimum thickness of 25 mm at the edges. The topping shall be applied evenly
on the underbed while it is not fully set but firm enough and rolled and pressed to
get full bond. The topping shall be trowelled to a dense finish to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. After the surface is sufficiently set, the finished floor shall be kept
moist for 7 days for curing.
Attachment 2
Page 83 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
9.00.00
TERRAZZO TILE FINISH
9.01.00
These shall include terrazzo tiles finish over already laid and matured base of
concrete or masonry by means of underbed cement : sand (1:4) mortar.
Thickness
9.02.00
9.02.01
The total thickness including the underbed shall be minimum 50 mm for floors and
32 mm for walls unless otherwise specified. The skirting, dado and similar vertical
surfaces shall project out 6 mm uniformly from the adjacent plaster or other wall
finishes. The necessary cuttings into the surface receiving tiled finish, to
accommodate the specified thickness shall be done.
9.03.00
Terrazzo Tiles
9.03.01
The tiles shall, unless specifically permitted in special cases, be machine made,
under quality control in a shop. The tiles shall be pressed hydraulically to a
minimum of 140 kg. per sq. cm. Each tile shall bear on its back permanent and
legible trade mark of the manufacturer. All angles of the tiles shall be right angles,
all edges sharp and true, colour and texture of the wearing face uniform
throughout. Tolerance on length, breadth and thickness of tiles shall be as specified
in lS:1237 latest edition. Wearing faces of the tile shall be plane, free from pinholes
and other blemishes.
9.03.02
The tiles shall be composed of a backing and topping. The topping measured as
per IS:1237 (latest edition) shall be of uniform thickness not less than 8 mm. The
total thickness including the topping shall be as specified but not less than 20 mm
in any case. The backing shall be composed of 1 part ordinary grey cement 2 parts
of sand and 3 parts of stone chips by weight mixed with water.
9.03.03
The topping shall be, as specified under Clause 6.03.00 of this section. The tiles
shall be cured at the shop for at least 14 days before delivery to the site. First
grinding shall be given to the tiles at the shop before delivery. Tiles shall be packed
properly to prevent damage during transit and storage. The tiles must be stored
carefully to prevent staining by damp, rust, oil and grease, or other chemicals.
Tiles made in each batch shall be kept and used separately so that colour of each
area of the floor may remain uniform. The manufacturer shall supply alongwith
the tiles the grout mix containing cement and pigment in exact proportions as used
in topping of tiles. The container for the grout mix shall be suitably marked to
relate it to the particular type and batch of tiles
Attachment 2
Page 84 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
9.04.00
Mix : Underbed
9.04.01
The underbed for floor and similar horizontal surfaces shall be 1 parts cement : 2
parts coarse sand : 4 parts stone chips by volume (12.5 mm nominal size), mixed
with sufficient water. For skirting and dado and all vertical surface it shall be 12
mm thick and composed of 1 part cement and 3 parts coarse sand by volume.
Laying
9.05.00
9.05.01
The underbed mortar shall be evenly spread and brought to proper grade and
consolidated to a smooth surface. The surface shall be roughened for better bond.
Before the underbed had time to set and while it is still fairly moist but firm,
cement shall be hand dusted over it or a cement slurry applied and the tiles shall
immediately be placed upon and firmly pressed by wooden mallet on to the
underbed until it achieves the desired level. The tiles shall be kept soaked for
about 10 minutes just before laying. The joints between tiles shall be as close as
possible and not more than 1.5 mm wide. Special care shall be taken to check the
level of the surface and the lines of the joints frequently so that they are perfect.
When tiles are required to be cut to match the dimensions, these shall be sawn and
edges rubbed smooth. The location of cut tiles shall be planned in advance and
approval of the Consultant shall be taken.
9.05.02
At the junction of horizontal surface with vertical surface the. tiles on the former
shall enter at least 12 mm under the latter. After fixing, the floor shall be kept moist
and allowed to mature undisturbed for 7 days. Heavy traffic shall not be allowed.
If desired dividing strips as specified under Clause 6.04.00 may be used for
dividing the work into suitable panels.
9.06.00
9.06.01
Procedure shall be same as Clause 6.06.00. Only grinding shall not commence
earlier than 14 days after laying of tiles.
Attachment 2
Page 85 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10.00.00
10.01.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
10.02.00
GLAZED TILE FINISH
This finish shall be composed of glazed earthware tiles of approved make and
quality, with an underbed laid over a concrete or masonry base.
Thickness
10.02.01
The total thickness shall be minimum 20 mm including the underbed.
10.02.02
The tile finish on vertical surface shall project out 6 mm uniformly from the
adjacent plaster or other wall finishes. The necessary cutting into surface receiving
the finish, to accommodate the specified thickness shall be done.
Tiles - Glazed
10.03.00
10.03.01
10.04.00
10.04.01
The tiles shall be of earthware, covered with glaze, white or coloured, plain or with
designs, of 150 mm x 150 mm nominal sizes and 5 mm thick unless otherwise
specified.. The tolerance shall be + 1.5 mm for length and breadth and + 0.5 mm for
thickness. Specials like internal and external angle beads, covers, cornices, corner
pieces etc. shall match. The top surface of the tiles shall be glazed with a gloss or
matt unfading stable finish as desired by the Engineer. The tiles shall be true in
shape and size. The colour shall be uniform and fractured section shall be fine
grained in textures, dense and homogenous.
The tiles shall be strong. and free from flaws like cracks, chips craze, spacks,
crawlings etc. and other imperfections. The edges and the underside of the tiles
shall be completely free from glaze and the underside shall have ribs or
indentations for better anchorage with the fixing mortar. The coloured tiles, when
supplied shall preferably come from one batch to avoid difference in colour.
Mix - Underbed
10.05.00
The mix for the under bed shall consist of 1 part cement and 3 parts coarse sand by
weight mixed with sufficient water or any other mix if specified.
Laying: Same as Clause 9.05.00.
10.06.00
Finishing
10.06.01
The joints shall be cleaned and flush pointed with white cement and cured for 7
days by keeping it wet. The surface shall be cleaned with soap or suitable
detergent, washed fully and wiped with soft cloth to prevent scratching before
handing over.
Attachment 2
Page 86 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
11.00.00
PVC TILE FINISH (Rubberised)
11.01.00
This shall include various types of tiles manufactured from rubber, set with an
adhesive on a concrete or masonry base. An underbed may be required to obtain a
satisfactory surface and grade.
Thickness
11.02.00
11.02.01
11.03.00
11.03.01
11.03.02
11.04.00
11.04.01
12.00.00
12.01.00
The thickness of the tiles shall be 3mm unless otherwise specified. The thickness
including underbed shall be 50 mm for floors and 30 mm for walls, unless
otherwise specified.
Tiles
Unless otherwise required the tiles shall be square and of approved
dimensions. The tolerance in dimensions shall be +/-1.5 mm.
The face of the tiles shall be free from porosity, blisters, cracks, embedded foreign
matter or other physical defects which affect appearance or serviceability. All
edges shall be cut true and square. The colour shall be nonfading and uniform in
appearance, insoluble in water and resistant to alkalis, cleaning agents and all
usual floor polishes.
Finishing
If any adhesive marks are present on the surface a soft cloth soaked in solvent shall
be used to wipe them off. The surface shall be cleaned with soft soap, dried and
polished or sealed with an approved type of polish or sealant just before handling
over.
ACID RESISTANT TILE FINISH
12.02.00
This finish shall be composed of ceramic unglazed vitreous tiles of approved make
and quality, with an underbed laid over a concrete or masonry base. The tile are
laid with chemical resistant mortars.
Thickness
12.02.01
The total thickness shall be minimum 25 mm including the underbed.
12.02.02
The tile finish on vertical surface shall project out 12 mm uniformly from the
adjacent plaster or other wall finishes. The necessary cutting into surface receiving
the finish, to accommodate the specified thickness shall be done.
Tiles – Ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resistant shall generally conform to IS:
4457.
12.03.00
Attachment 2
Page 87 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
12.0
The tiles shall be of vitreous ware and shall be free from deleterioussubstances.
The acid resistant shall be determined in accordance with appendix –F of IS: 4457.
The size of tile shall be 150 mm x 150 mm or 200 mm x 200 mm nominal sizes and
12 mm thick unless otherwise specified.. The tolerance shall be +/- 2.5 % for
length, breadth and thickness. Specials like internal and external angle beads,
covers, cornices, corner pieces etc. shall match. The tiles shall be true in shape and
size. The colour shall be uniform and fractured section shall be fine grained in
textures, dense and homogenous. The tiles shall be strong. and free from flaws like
cracks, chips craze, spacks, crawlings etc. and other imperfections. The edges and
the underside of the tiles shall be completely free from glaze and the underside
shall have ribs or indentations for better anchorage with the fixing mortar. The
coloured tiles, when supplied shall preferably come from one batch to avoid
difference in colour.
12.04.00
Mix – Underbed & Mortar
12.04.01
The mix for the under bed and joint filling mortar shall be also of chemical
resistant type conforming to IS: 4441.
12.05.00
Laying: The laying shall be done by approved specialist agency as per
recommendation of manufacturer
13.00.00
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
The finish shall be checked specially for
a) Level, slope, plumb as the case may be
b) Pattern, and symmetry
c) Alignment of joints, dividing strips etc.
d) Colour, texture
e) Surface finish
f) Thickness of joints
g) Details of edges, junction etc
h) Performance
i) Precautions specified for durability
Attachment 2
Page 88 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
STEEL DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS & LOUVERS
1.00.00
COPE
2.00.00
The work in general shall consist of supplying, erecting and installing of all metal
doors, windows, ventilators, louvers, glazed partitions etc. as stipulated here or
elsewhere in these specifications with all materials complete including labour and
equipment.
GENERAL:
2.01.00
The contractor shall submit 6 copies of shop drawing covering all types of work under
this specification before manufacture. The drawing shall show all dimensions, details
of construction, installation, relating to adjoining and related work etc
3.00.00
ODES AND STANDARDS
3.01.00
editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions. A complete set of
all these documents shall generally be available at site, with the Contractor.
3.02.00
3.03.00
IS : 1038 1983 Specifications for Steel doors, windows and ventilators
IS : 1081 1960 Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal (steel and aluminium) doors, windows
& ventilators
IS : 1361 1978 Specifications for Steel windows for industrial building
IS: 1477 (Part 1) 2000 Code of practice for painting ferrous metals in buildings - Pretreatment
IS: 1477 (Part 2) 2000 Code of practice for painting ferrous metals in buildings - Painting
IS: 2074 1992 Specifications for ready mixed paint, air drying, red oxide zinc chrome, priming
IS: 3564 1996 Specifications for hydraulically regulated door closers
IS : 4351 2003 Specifications for Steel door frames
IS : 7452 1990 Specifications for Hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and ventilators
Attachment 2
Page 89 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
4.00.00
MATERIALS
4.01.00
Steel sections used for fabrication of doors, windows, etc. shall be standard rolled steel
section specified in IS:1038, lS:1361 and IS:4351 or as specified in drawing. The Mild
Steel sheets for frames, shutters, louvre blades etc. shall be of approved quality and of
gauge mentioned in this specification. Hardware and fixtures of the best quality from
approved manufacturers shall only be used. The Contractor shall specifically state the
particular manufacturer’s materials he proposes to use. All hardware and fixtures shall
be able to withstand repeated use. Door closers shall conform to IS:3564 and shall be
suitable for doors weighing 61-80 kg unless otherwise stated. Each closer shall be
guaranteed against manufaturing defect for one year and any defect found within this
period shall be rectified or the closer replaced free of charge. Concealed door closes
shall be either floor mounted or transom mounted, suitable for installation with metal
doors. It shall conform to the performance requirements and endurance test stated in
IS:3564 - Appendix A.
4.02.00
The Contractor shall submit samples of each type of hardware to the Consultant. The
approved samples shall be retained by the Consultant for comparison with bulk
supply. The mastic for caulking shall be of best quality from a manufacturer approved
by the Consultant.
5.00.00
ABRICATION
5.01.00
oor Frames
5.01.01
Frames shall be reinforced for door closers. They shall be mortised,reinforced, drilled
and tapped for hinges, lock and bolt strikes. Flush butt welding to form a solid fused
joint, so that all frames are square and flat shall be used with sections cut to required
length and mitred. Rubber door silencers shall be furnished for the striking jamb.
Loose “T” masonry anchors shall be provided. Frames shall finish flush with floor and
adjustable floor anchors shall be supplied. Frames shall be brought to site with floor
ties/weather bars installed in place.
5.02.00
Double Plate Flush Door Shutters
Attachment 2
Page 90 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
5.02.01
Door shutters shall be 45 mm thick, completely flush design and shallcomprise of two
sheets of 18G steel sheets, rigidly connected and reinforced inside with continuous
vertical 20G stiff ners, spot welded in position at not more than 150 mm on centres.
Both edges of doors shall be joined and reinforced full. height by steel channels placed
immediately inside and welded to the door faces. Top and bottom of doors shall be
reinforced horizontally by steel channels running full width of door. Doors shall not
have more than 2.5 mm clearance at jambs and head, shall have proper level on lock
stiles and rails to operate without binding, and shall be reinforced at corners to
prevent sagging or twisting. Pairs or double doors shall have meeting stile edges
beveled or rebated.
5.02.03
Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped in shop for hinges, locks and
bolts. They shall also be reinforced for closer, push-plates and other surface hardware
where necessary. Any drilling and tapping required for surface hardware shall be
done at site. Wherever required, provision shall be made for fixing glazing, vision
panels, louvers etc. Glazing mouldings shall be of 18G mild steel or extruded
aluminum sections with profiles shown in drawings and suitable for fixing 6 mm
glass. Louver blades shall be V or Z shaped and made out of 16G sheets.
liding Doors
5.03.00
5.03.01
5.04.00
5.04.01
Sliding doors shall be either single or double plate construction as required and made
out of 18 Gauge steel sheets with adequate stiffeners. The Contractor shall specify the
weight of the door in his shop drawing and submit the manufacturer’s catalogue of the
sliding gear he proposes to use. Where shown on the drawings the Contractor shall
make provisions for openings in the door for monorail beams. Door shall close
positively to exclude rain water from seeping in. Sliding doors shall withstand
specified wind loads without buckling or jamming. The door shall slide freely under
all ambient conditions.
teel Windows, Sashes, Ventilators etc.
These shall conform in all respects to IS:1038, lS:7452 and lS:1361 and are asshown on
drawings. The details as called for in the above codes shall be applicable for coupling
mullions, transom, weather bars, pivot arrangements for ventilators etc.
Attachment 2
Page 91 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
5.04.02
Windows: Window shutters shall be hung on projecting hinges. One leaf of the hinges
shall be welded into a slot in the outer frame and the other leaf of the hinges riveted to
the opening shutters. Hinges may be of the friction type in which case the window
shall not be fitted with peg stay. In case of nonfriction projecting hinges, a brass or
bronze three holes peg stays 300mm. Long with pegs and brackets, welded or riveted
to the frame shall also be provided. Handles shall be of brass or bronze, and shall be
mounted on a mild steel handle plate welded to the shutter in such a way that it
should be fixed after the shutter is glazed. The handles shall have a two point nose
which shallengage with brass, bronze or aluminium alloy as specified, striking plate,
on the fixed frame so that it can hold the shutters in a slightly openable as well in a fast
position.
5.04.03
Top hung ventilators: These shall be fixed with plain hinges, riveted to the fixed
frames or welded to it after cutting a slot in it. A peg stay 300mm long of brass or
bronze with three holes, as in case of windows shall be provided. The locking bracket
shall either be fitted to the fixed frame or to the ventilators.
5.04.05
Centre Hung Ventilators: These shall be hung on two pairs of brass of lead / tin/
bronze cup pivots, riveted to the inner and outer frame of the ventilates to permit
these to swing through an angle of approximately 85 deg. The opening portion of the
ventilators shall be so balanced that it remains open at any desired angle under normal
weather condition.
5.04.05
A bronze or brass spring catch shall be provided at the top centre of theventilator. A
brass cord pulley wheel in a mild steel or malleable ironbrackets, shall be fitted with
screws or welded at the sill and a cord eye shallbe fixed to inner frame of ventilators to
facilitate opening of ventilators.
5.05.00
All welds shall be flush butt welded to form a solid fused joint so that all frames are
square and flat.
5.06.00
Where composite unit openings are shown on drawings, the individual window units
shall be jointed together with requisite transoms and mullions.All windows shall be
inside glazed, fixed with metal glazing beads. Allwindows, ventilators, sashes shall be
fixed with handles, peg stays etc. ofapproved make and best quality.
5.07.00
ressed Steel Louvers
5.07.01
The louver blade shall be ‘Z’ shaped and made out of 18G sheets in EZ7 steel frames.
The frames shall be of ISMC 100.
5.08.00
Fabrication drawings shall be submitted by the contractor which shall also inclusive
weights of the materials used and got approved from the Consultant.
Attachment 2
Page 92 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
6.00.00
HOP COAT OF PAINT
6.01.00
Unless otherwise specified in Sub-section, the shop paint for steel doors, windows,
ventilators, louvers etc. shall be best quality Zinc Chromate primer paint from
approved manufacturer conforming to lS:2074. All surface shall be thoroughly cleaned
of rust, grease, loose mill scales and foreign matter as per lS:1477 Part-I, and given one
coat of shop paint. Portions like mullions, transom etc. which will be inaccessible after
assembly of units shall be given an extra coat of paint before assembly.
6.02.00
All steel doors, windows, etc. shall have one shop coat and one site coat of Zinc
chromate paint (Primer) conforming to IS:2074 with a pigment to be specified by the
Consultant and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality and
conforming to relevant l.S. Code, unless specified otherwise in these specifications.
Wherever required, all steel doors, windows, etc. shall be hot dip galvanized to give a
coating weight of 460 gms to 610 gms per sq.m. One coat zinc chromate primer coat
shall then be applied as shop paint.
7.00.00
HANDLING AND STORAGE
All metal doors, windows, etc. shall be packed and crated properly before despatch, to
ensure that there will be no damage to the fabricated materials. Loading into wagons
and trucks shall be done with all care to ensure safe arrival of materials at site in
undamaged condition. All metal doors, windows etc. shall be stored under cover in a
way to prevent damage or distortion.
8.00.00
SSEMBLY AND ERECTION
8.01.00
In general, the fixing of metal doors, windows ventilators, louvers, etc. shall conform
to IS:1081. The Contractor shall assemble and install all steel doors, windows, sashes,
fixed metal louvers, etc. including transoms and mullions for composite units in
respective places keeping proper lines and levels, and in approved workmanlike
manner, to give trouble free and leak-proof installation. If required by the Consultant,
the installation shall have to be carried out under the supervision of the
manufacturer’s staff. The contractor shall take every precaution against damage of the
components during installation. Necessary holes chases etc. required for fixing shall be
made by the contractor and made good again as per original, after installation.
8.02.00
After installation of metal doors, windows, etc. all abrasions to shop-coat of paint shall
be retouched and made good with the same quality of paint used in shop-coat.
8.03.00
All coupling mullions, transoms, frames. etc. in contact with unpainted steel and other
members, shall be well embedded in mastic. The contractor shall bring to the site the
mastic cement in original sealed containers of manufacturer and shall apply it as per
the instructions.
8.04.00
Door shutters, partitions, hardware fixtures etc. shall be fixed only after major equipments have been installed
in rooms. Wherever required, nylon cords of approved quality shall be supplied alongwith pivoted sashes and shall be of
adequate length to terminate one meter from the floor. Loose ends of cords shall end in metal or plastic pull as approved by the
Consultant.
Attachment 2
Page 93 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
9.00.00
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
9.01.00
For Fabricated Items
a) Overall dimension shall be within + 1.5 mm of the size
b) Mullions, transoms etc. shall be in one length and permissible deviations from
straightness shall be limited to n 1.5 mm from the axis of the member.
c) Door and window shutters shall operate without jamming. The clearance at head
and jamb for door shutters shall not exceed 1.5 mm. For double leaf doors, the gap at
the meeting of stiles shall not be more than 1.5mm.
d) Door leaves shall be undercut wherever required.
e) Doors, windows, frames etc. shall be on a true plane, free from warp or buckle.
f) All welds shall be dressed flush on exposed and contact surfaces.
g) Correctness of location and smoothness of operations of all shop installed hardware
and fixtures.
h) Provision for hardware and fixtures to be installed at site.
i) Glazing clips, fixing devices etc. shall be supplied in adequate numbers
j) Shop coats shall be properly applied.
k) Glazing beads shall be cut with mitered corners.
9.02.00
For Installed Items
a) Installations shall be at correct location, elevation and in general, on a true vertical
plane.
b) Fixing details shall be strictly as shown on drawings.
c) Assembly of composite units shall be strictly as per the drawings with mastic
caulking at transoms and mullions, gaskets, weather strips etc. complete.
d) All frames on external walls shall be mastic caulked to prevent leakage through
joint between frames and masonry.
e) All openable sections shall operate smoothly without jamming.
f) Locks, fasteners etc. shall engage positively. Key shall be non interchangeable.
g) Cutting to concrete or masonry shall be made good and all abrasions to shop paint
shall be touched up with paint of same quality as shop paint.
Attachment 2
Page 94 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
C-08:
1.00.00
1.01.00
GLASS & GLAZING
SCOPE
The work in general shall consist of supplying and fixing all glass and glazing
including all clips, putty, mastic cement etc. wherever required as shown on
drawings.
2.00.00
2.01.00
CODES AND STANDARDS
2.02.00
2.03.00
IS : 419 1967 Putty for use on window frames
IS : 1081 1960 Code of practice for fixing and glazing metal (steel & aluminium) doors, windows and ventilators
IS : 2835 1987 Flat transparent sheet glass
IS : 3548 1988 Code of practice for glazing in building
IS : 5437 1994 Figured rolled and wired glass
IS : 14900 2000 Specification for transparent float glass
3.0000
3.01.00
MATERIALS
The Contractor shall supply and install all glass and glazing as required for
various doors, windows, sashes, ventilators, and fixed louvers, miscellaneous
glazing and partitions, unless otherwise stated, from approved manufacture
having uniform refractive index and free from flaws, specks and bubbles. The glass
shall be brought to site in the original packing from the manufacturer and cut to
size at site. The cut edges shall be straight and free from chips, spall or any other
damages.
3.02.00
The glass shall be plain float glass from approved manufacture, as specified and it
shall be free from bubbles, flaws specs, waves, air holes, distortion, scratches or
other defects. The glasses in bulk quantities shall be brought to site in Makers
original packings and Makers guarantee shall be produced if called for by the
Consultant. The glass shall be of required thickness as mentioned in the items of
schedule of quantities and / or drawing or as directed by the Consultant. The
contractor shall submit the sample of the glass which he proposes to use on the
work and only such approved quality of glass shall be used in the works. The glass
brought to site shall be protected against damages. Wherever frosted (obscure)
glass is mentioned in the item of schedule of quantities and / or shown in
drawings, the glass shall be of sand blown pattern and shall also be got approved
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Attachment 2
Page 95 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
3.03.00
After the inspection is over and permitted by the Consultant, glass panes shall be
cleaned off any labels paints smears and spots and shall be washed from both the
sides and all glazing left elar, perfect and free from rattling. The contractor shall
provide all the scaffolding tools and plants for fixing the glass panes at his own
cost. In case of steel
3.04.00
Glare reducing (tinted) or heat absorbing glass shall be “Calores” of Hindustan
Pilkington or approved equivalent and special care shall be taken to grind smooth
and round off the edges before fixing.
3.05.00
Clear glass shall be flat drawn and shall be at least 4 mm thick, Conforming to
lS:2835. Sheet glass for doors shall be minimum 6.3 mm thick.
3.06.00
3.07.00
Wired glass shall be 6 mm thick rolled glass with centrally embedded 24 G wire
mesh of Georgian type. This may be of clear or coloured glass, as required by
Engineer and shall conform to lS:5437.
Obscure glass shall have a cast surface on one side.
3.08.00
Coloured and figured glass shall be as per approved sample.
3.09.00
In general, the putty shall conform to lS:419 and be of best quality from approved
manufacturer. it shall be brought to site in the manufacturer’s original packing.
Quick setting putty shall be used for windows and sashes except when glare
reducing glass is used where it shall be of non-setting type.
Neoprene gaskets with snap-fit glazing shall be fixed as per manufacturer’s
instruction and shall fit firmly against the glass to give a leak proof Installation.
3.10.00
4.00.00
FIXING
4.01.00
The glass shall be cut to the required sizes of panels where it is to be fitted and it
shall be so cut that it fits properly in the frames without rattling. Premeasurement
of each panel prior to the cutting of glass is essential.
4.02.00
The beading shall then be fixed to glass panes and screwed at close intervals not
more than 10 cm. from each corner and the intermediate not more than 20 cm.
apart. When glass panes are fixed with wooden beadings having mitred joints or
aluminium beading thin layer of glazier putty shall be applied covering the area in
contact between the glass and sashbars and beadings. In case of louvers, all the
exposed edges of the glass shall be ground properly
4.03.00
All glazing clips, bolts, nuts, putty, mastic cement, etc. as required shall be
supplied by the Contractor.
Attachment 2
Page 96 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
4.04.00
All glass shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in positions. Each glass pane
shall be held in place by special glazing clips of approved type. As specified in
relevant l.S. Codes, four glazing clips shall be provided per glass pane, except for
large panes where six or more clips shall be used as per Engineer’s instructions. All
holes that may be necessary for holding the clips, glazing beads and all other
attachments shall be drilled by the Contractor.
4.05.00
Glass pane shall be set without springing, and shall be bedded in putty and back
putted, except where mouldings or gaskets are specified. Putty, mastic cement etc.
shall be smoothly finished to a true even line. Obscure and figured glass shall be
set with smooth. side out.
4.06.00
After completion of glazing work, the Contractor shall remove all dirt, stains,
putty etc. clean the glass panes and leave the work in perfectly acceptable
condition. All broken, cracked or dameged glass shall be replaced by new ones
4.07.0
The beading shall be of teak wood of superior quality timber in case of teak wood
doors and windows and / or required sizes mentioned in the items of schedule of
quantities and / or shown in drawing. In case of steel doors and windows the
beading shall be anodised aluminium beading of channel section as per size
mentioned in the item and / or shown in the drawing. The junction of the
beadings shall be mitre jointed.
5.00.00
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
a) All installations shall be free from cracked, broken or damaged glass. Edges of
large panes of thicker glass and heat absorbing glass shall be inspected carefully
for chipped, cracked or unground edges.
b) Glazing shall be carefully done to avoid direct contact with metal frames.
c) All glass shall be embedded in mastic or fixed by neoprene gaskets to give a
leak-proof installation.
d) At completion, the panes shall be free from dirt, stains, excess putty etc. and to
complete satisfaction of the Engineer.
Attachment 2
Page 97 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
C-09:
PAINTING, WHITE WASHING, DISTEMPERING AND OTHER
FINISHING WORKS
1.00.00
SCOPE
1.01.00
This Specification covers painting, white washing. polishing, distempering etc. of
both interior and exterior surfaces of masonry, concrete, plaster, plaster of Paris,
structural and other miscellaneous steel items, rain water down comer, floor and
roof drains, waste and service water pipes, and other ferrous and non-ferrous
metal items as indicated elsewhere in these specifications or as directed by the
Consultant.
1.02.00
If surface to be finished cannot be put in suitable condition for painting by
customary preparatory methods, the Contractor shall notify the Consultant in
writing or assume responsibility for and rectify and unsatisfactory f inishing.
Before commencing painting, the Contractor shall obtain the approval of the
Consultant in writing regarding the scheduling of work to minimise damage,
disfiguration or staining by other trades. He shall also undertake normal
precautions to prevent damage, disfiguration or staining to work of other trades or
other installations.
2.00.00
CODES AND STANDARDS
2.01.00
2.02.00
Attachment 2
Page 98 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
2.03.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
75-1973
77-1976
102-1962
103-1962
104-1979
133-1993
137-1965
158-1981
168-1993
217-1988
218-1983
290-1961
337-1975
338-1952
339-1952
340-1978
341-1973
345-1952
347-1975
348-1968
419-1967
427-1965
428-1969
524-1983
525-1968
533-1973
712-1984
1200-(Pt.-XII)1976
1200-Pt.-XIII)1987
1200-(Pt.-XV)1987
Linseed oil, raw and refined
Linseed oil, boiled, for paints
Ready mixed paint, brushing, red, lead, nonsetting, priming
Ready mixed paint, brushing, white lead, for priming and general purposes
Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, zinc chrome, priming
Enamel, interior (a) under coating (b) finishing colour as required
Ready mixed paint, brushing, matt or egg-shell flat, finishing interior, to Indian
Standard Colour, as required
Ready mixed paint, brushing, bituminous, black lead free acid
alkali, water and heat resisting for general purposes.
Ready mixed paint, air drying for general purpose.
Cut back bitumen
Creosote and anthrakene oil for use as wood preservatives
Coal tar black paint
Varnish, finishing interior
Varnish, under coating exterior, natural resin
Varnish, under coating, exterior, synthetic resin
Varnish, mixing
Black Japan, type A, E, & C
Wood filler, Transparent, liquid
Varnish, shellac for general purpose
French polish
Putty for use of window frames
Distemper, dry, colour as required
Distemper, oil emulsion colour as required
Varnish, finishing, exterior, synthetic
Varnish, finishing, exterior and general purposes
Gum spirit of turpentine (oil of turpentine)
Specification for building limes
Method of measurements of plastering and pointing
Method of measurements of white washing, colour washing, distempering and
other finishes
Methods of measurements of painting, polishing & varnishing
IS : 1477 (I & II)
Code of Practice for painting of ferrous metals in building
2095-1982
2096-1992
2339-1963
IS : 2395 (Iand II)
2547-1976
2932-1994
2933-1975
5410-1992
5411-(Pt.-I)-1974
6278-1971
IS : 13467
BS : 5493
Gypsum plaster boards.
Asbestos cement flat sheets.
Aluminium paint for general purposes, in dual container
Code of Practice for painting concrete, masonry and plaster surface
Gypsum building plaster
Enamel synthetic, exterior (a) Under coating (b) Finishing.
Enamel, Exterior (a) Under coating (b) Finishing
Cement paint, colour as required
Plastic emulsion paint for interior use
Code of practice for white washing & colour washing
Specification for chlorinated rubber for paints
Code of practice for protective coating of Iron & Steel structure against corrosion
Attachment 2
Page 99 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
3.00.00
MATERIALS
3.01.00
Materials shall be of highest grade products of well-known approved
manufacturer and shall be delivered to the site in original sealed containers,
bearing brand name, manufacture’s name and colour shade, with label intact and
seals unbroken. All materials shall be subject to inspection & approval by the
Consultant. It is desired that materials of one manufacturer only shall be used as
far as possible and paint of one shade be obtained from the same manufacturing
batch.
3.02.00
All paint shall be subjected to analysis from random samples taken at site from
painters bucket, if so desired by the Consultant.
3.03.00
All prime coats shall be compatible to the material of the surface to be finished as
well as to the finishing coats to be applied. All unspecified materials such as
shellac, turpentine or linseed oil shall be of the highest quality available and shall
conform to the reputed recognised manufacturer’s and shall be approved by the
Consultant.
3.04.00
All colour shall be as per painting schedule and tinting and matching shall be done
to the satisfaction of the Consultant. In such cases, where samples are required,
they shall be executed in advance with the specified materials for the approval of
the Consultant.
4.00.00
WHITE WASHING
4.01.00
Shall be done from pure shell lime or fat lime, or a mixture of both as
instructed by the Consultant, and shall conform to IS: 712. Samples of lime shall be
submitted to the Consultant for approval, and lime as per approved sample shall
be brought to site in unslaked condition. After slaking, it shall be allowed to
remain in a tank of water for two days, and then stirred up with a pole, until it
attains the consistency of thin cream. 100 grams of gum t o 6 litres of white wash
water and a little quantity of indigo or synthetic ultramarine blue shall be added to
the lime.
5.00.00
WATERPROOF CEMENT PAINT
5.01.00
Shall be made from best quality white cement and lime resistant colours with
accelerators, waterproofing agents and fungicides. The paint shall conform to IS:
5410.
Attachment 2
Page 100 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
6.00.00
ACRYLIC EMULSION PAINT
6.01.00
Shall be water based acrylic copolymer emulsion with rutile titanium dioxde and
other selected pigments and fungicide. It shall exhibit excellent adhesion to plaster
and surface and shall resist deteoration by alkali salts. The aint film shall allow the
moisture in wall to escape without peeling or blistering. The paint, after it is dried,
shall be able to withstand washing with mild soap and water without any
deterioration in colour, or without flaking, blistering or peeling.
7.00.00
SYNTHETIC ENAMEL PAINT
7.01.00
Shall be made from synthetic resin and drying oil with rutile titanium dioxide and
other selected pigments to give a smooth, hard, durable and glossy finish to all
exterior and interior surfaces. white and pastel shades shall resist yellowing and
darkening with aging. The paint shall conform to IS: 2932 and IS: 2933.
8.00.00
DRY DISTEMPER
8.01.00
Dry distemper of required colour conforming to IS:427 and of approved brand and
manufacturer shall be used. The primer where used shall be cement primer or
distemper primer. The shade shall be got approved from the Consultant. Dry
distemper as required shall be stirred slowly and in clean water using 0.6 litre of
water per kg of distemper or as specified by the manufacturer. Distemper shall not
be mixed in larger quantity than is actually required for one days work. Warm
water shall preferably be used. The treatment shall consists of a priming coat of
whiting followed by the application of two or more coats of distemper till the
surface shows an even colour.
9.00.00
OIL BOUND DISTEMPER
9.01.00
Oil bound distemper (IS:428-1969) of approved brand and manufacturer shall be
used. Any unevenness in surface shall be made good by applying putty. The
patched surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before the coat of distemper is
applied. One coat of distemper properly diluted with thinner as specified by the
manufacturer applied with brushes in horizontal strokes
followed immediately by vertical ones together will constitute one coat. Two or
more coats of distemper as found necessary shall be applied to obtain even shade.
Attachment 2
Page 101 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
10.00.00
COLOUR WASH
10.01.00
It shall be done with mineral colours, not affected by lime added to white wash.
No colour wash shall be done until a sample of the colour wash to the required tint
or shade has been approved by the Consultant. The colour shall be of even tint or
shade over the whole surface. If it is blotchy or otherwise badly applied, it shall be
redone by the Contractor at no extra cost to Owner.
11.00.00
CHLORINATED RUBBER BASED PAINT
11.01.00
Chlorinated rubber is the product obtained from the reaction of chlorine with
rubber. The product contains an average chlorine content of about 65%.
11.02.00
Chlorinated rubber shall be formulated with resins (for adhesion and gloss),
plasticizers (for flexibility and toughness), pigments (for colour), stabilizers and
solvents (for fluidity). This shall meet the general requirement s of IS:13467 &
BS:5493.
12.00.00
STORAGE
12.01.00
The Contractor shall arrange for safe and proper storage of all materials and tools.
Paints shall be kept covered at all times and mixing shall be done in suitable
containers. All necessary precautions shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent
fire.
13.00.00
PREPARATION OF SURFACE
13.01.00
Before starting the work the Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Consultant
regarding the soundness and readiness of the surface to be painted on.
13.02.00
Masonry, Concrete and Plastered Surfaces shall be free from all oil, grease,
efflorescence, mildew, loose paint or other foreign and loose materials. Masonry
cracks shall be cleaned out and patch filled with mortar similar to the original
surface and uniformly textured. Where this type of resurfacing may lead to the
finishing paint being different in shade from the original surfaces, the resurfaced
area shall be treated with minimum one coat of cement primer which should be
continued to the surrounding area for a distance of minimum 100 mm.
Attachment 2
Page 102 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
13.03.00
Surface with mildew, efflorescence shall be treated as -below.
a) Mildew: All mildewed surfaces shall be treated with an approved
fungicide such as ammoniacal wash consisting of 7 gm of copper carbonate
dissolved in 80 ml liquid ammonia and diluted to 1 litre ith
water or 2.5 per cent magnesium silico-fluoride solution and allowed to dry
thoroughly before paint is applied.
b) Efflorescence: All efflorescence shall be removed by scrubbing the
affected surfaces with a solution of muriatic acid in water (1 : 6 to 1 : 8) and
washed fully with clear water and allowed to dry thoroughly.
13.04.00
Metal Surfaces
13.04.01
All metal surfaces shall be absolutely clean, dry and free from wax, grease or dried
soap films. All steel and iron surfaces in addition shall be free from rust. All
galvanized iron surfaces shall be pre-treated with a compatible primer according
to the manufacturer’s direction. Any abrasion in shop coat shall be touched up
with the same quality of paint as the original coat.
14.00.00
APPLICATION
14.01.00
The method of application shall be as recommended by the manufacturer in case
of selection of special shades and colour (not available in standard shades) the
Contractor shall mix different shades and prepare test panels of minimum size 1
metre square as per instruction of the Consultant and obtain his approval prior to
application of finishing paints.
14.02.00
Proper tools and implements shall be used. Scaffoldings if used shall be
independent of the surface to be painted to avoid shade differences of the freshly
repaired anchor holes. Painting shall be done by skilled labourers in a workman
like manner. All materials shall be evenly applied, so as to be free of sags, runs,
crawls or other defects. All coats shall be of proper consistency. In case of
application by brush, no brush marks shall be visible. The brushes shall be clean
and in good condition before application of paint.
All priming undercoats for painting shall be applied by brush only and
rollers,spray equipments etc. shall not be used.
14.03.00
14.04.00
No work shall be done under conditions that are unsuitable for production of good
results. No painting shall be done when plastering is in progress or is drying.
Application of paint which seals of surface to moisture shall be done after the
moisture on and under the surface has dried out.
Attachment 2
Page 103 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
14.05.00
14.06.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
All coats shall be thoroughly dry before being sand papered or before the
succeeding coat is applied. Coats of painting as specified are intended to cover
surfaces perfectly.
In case the surface is not covered properly by applying the specified number of
coats, further coats shall be applied by the Contractor when so directed by the
Consultant, without any extra cost to Owner. All primers and undercoats hall be
tinted to approximate the colour of the finishing coats. Finished coats shall be of
exact colour and shade and as per approved samples and finish shall be uniform in
colour and texture. All parts of mouldings and ornaments shall be left clean and
true to finish.
14.07.00
White Washing: The surface where white washing is to be applied shall be cleaned
of all loose materials and dirt. All holes and irregularities of the surface shall be
filled up with lime putty and shall be allowed to dry up before application of the
lime solution. One coat of white wash shall consists of one stroke from top
downwards, another from bottom upwards over the first stroke and another from
eft to right before the previous one dries up. Second coat shall be applied after the
first dries up completely and similarly the third coat shall be applied and in case
the Consultant feels that one or more coats are required the Contractor shall do so
without any extra cost to the Owner. No brush marks shall show on the finished
surface. The inner plastered surfaces of walls shall be given three or more coats of
white washings.
14.08.00
Waterproof Cement Paint: Surface to be coated with cement paint shall be washed
and brushed down. As soon as the moisture has disappeared, the surface shall be
given one coat of paint. Care shall be taken so that the paint does not dry out too
rapidly. After 4 to 6 hours, the water shall be sprinkled ver the surface to assist
curing and prevent cracking. After the first coat has dried (24 to 48 hours) the
second coat shall be applied. In a similar manner the finished surface shall be kept
moist by occasional sprinkling with water for seven days after painting.
14.09.00
Acrylic Enamel Paint: Lime gauged cement plastered surfaces shall not be painted
for at least one month after plastering. A sample patch shall be painted to check
alkali reaction if so desired by the Consultant. Painting shall be strictly as per
manufacturer’s specification. Minimum two coats shall be applied.
Attachment 2
Page 104 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
14.10.00
Synthetic Enamel Paint: Shall be applied on properly primed surface.
Subsequent coats shall not be applied till the previous coat is dry. The
previous coat shall be lightly sand papered for better adhesion of subsequent coats.
Minimum two coats shall be applied.
14.11.00
Dry Distemper: The treatment shall consists of a priming coat of whiting followed
by the application of two or more coats of distemper till the surface shows an even
colour as per manufacturer’s instruction. The entire surface shall be coated with
the mixture uniformly, with proper distemper, in horizontal strokes followed
immediately by vertical ones which together shall constitute one coat. Subsequent
coats shall be applied only if the previous coat has dried.
14.12.00
Oil Bound Distemper: Any unevenness in the surface shall be made good by
applying putty. The patched surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before coat
of distemper is applied. One coat of distemper properly diluted with thinner as
specified by the manufacturer shall be applied with brushes in horizontal strokes
followed immediately by vertical ones which together will constitute one coat.
Two or more coats of distemper, as found necessary shall be applied to obtain even
shades.
14.13.00
Colour Washing: For new work, the priming coat shall be of white wash with lime
or with whiting. Two or more coat shall than be applied on the entire surface till it
represents a smooth and uniform finish. The finished dry surface shall not be
powdery and shall not readily come off on hand when rubbed. Indigo (neel) shall
however, not be added.
15.00.00
PAINTING OF IRON & STEEL WORKS
15.01 .00
Paint to be used for various items of work shall be of best quality and shall be
obtained ready mixed in sealed containers from approved manufacturer. The
contractor shall obtain the Consultant’s approval for the make and colour of the
paint he proposes to use.
15.02.00
All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, loose particles and rust, and
approved prior to application of paint. Workmanship shall conform to lS:1477
(Part - I & III).
15.03.00
Specific number of coats shall be applied and at least 24 hours shall elapse between
the applications of successive coats. No painting shall be carried out on exterior
work in wet weather or on surfaces which are not entirely dry.
Attachment 2
Page 105 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
16.00.00
CHEMICAL RESISTANT PAINT
16.01.00
For chemical resistant paint stipulation of BS: 5493 shall also be followed.
17.00.00
PROTECTION
17.01.00
Furniture and other movable objects, equipments, fittings and accessories shall be
moved, protected and replaced upon completion of the painting work. All
stationary items of equipments shall be well covered so that no paint can fall on
them. All protection shall be as per instruction of the Consultant.
18.00.00
CLEANING UP
18.01.00
The Contractor shall, upon completion of painting etc. remove all marks and make
good the surface, where paint has been spilled, splashed or splattered, including
all equipments, fixtures, glass, furniture, fittings etc. to the satisfaction of the
Consultant.
19.00.00
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
a) All painted surfaces shall be uniform and pleasing in appearance.
b) The colour, texture etc. shall match exactly with approved samples.
c) All stains, splashes and splatters of paints shall be removed from surrounding
surfaces.
Attachment 2
Page 106 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
C-10:
1.00.00
PILING WORKS -BORED CAST IN-SITU PILES
SCOPE
1.00.01
This specification covers the technical requirements for bored cast in situ concrete
piles.
1.00.02
This specification also covers the Supplying of all materials, plant, labour,
equipment, tools and services for complete and proper installation of bored cast. in
situ concrete piles, as shown on the Drawing. or specified, includingall surveying
and setting out necessary for correct location of piles, furnishing everything
necessary for forming working pile., test piles and anchor pile, excavations (if
required) for pile cut-off, cut-off of all piles to a true plane at elevations specified,
load test of single pile, and for pile groups as specified and designated for the
purpose or as directed by the CONSULTANT during the, progress of the work and
clean-up of the working area. The CONTRACTOR shall also exhume test pile,
before/after load tests as directed by the CONSULTANT and when so specified
for checking the quality of the pile shafts after installation. The CONTRACTOR
shall provide everything requisite and necessary to exhume the pile as instructed.
2.00.00
General
2.01.00
Bored cast in situ piles are formed by any of the following techniques:
a) Using Direct Mud Circulation or Reverse Mud Circulation Method
with bentonite slurry as drilling mud and appropriate equipment, and with
temporary guide casing through unstable strata only upto a
maximum of 5 m below working ground level
b) Using percussion type of boring technique and bentonite slurry to
stabilise the hole, with temporary guide casing through unstable strata only upto a
maximum of 5m below working ground level
c) Using permanent rigid liner of steel or any other material approved by the
CONSULTANT. Temporary casings of length exceeding 5 m below working
ground level shall not be used for forming the pile bores. Concrete piles formed
shall be free of any necking and excessive bulging.
2.02.00
All works shall have to be carried out in accordance with the relevant
standards and codes of practice or in their absence, in accordance with the best
accepted current Engineering practices or as directed by the CONSULTANT from
time to time. Items for which separate specifications have not been included shall
be carried out in consultation with and as directed/approved by the
CONSULTANT. The decision of the CONSULTANT as regards the specification to
be adopted and their interpretation and the mode of execution
of work shall be final and binding on the CONTRACTOR and no claim whatsoever
will be entertained on this account.
Attachment 2
Page 107 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
2.03.00
Notwithstanding what is contained in this document, the CONTRACTOR shall
execute all the work in a professional manner, exhibiting workmanship of the best
quality. Prior to mobilisation, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the
OWNER/CONSULTANT for approval, his programme for Quality Assurance and
Quality Control that be will adopt for the work, along with three copies of
documentation format for enabling enforcement of his QA-QC programme.
2.04.00
Prior to submitting his proposal, the CONTRACTOR shall acquaint himself fully
in regard to the scope of the work in accordance with the intent and meaning of
the subsurface data as indicated by the geo-technical investigation report and other
data given by the OWNER, and the drawings and specifications. He is deemed to
have examined the site and premises sufficiently to compare them with the
Drawing. and specifications and satisfy himself in regard to the condition of the
site, obstructions, accessibities, etc. required in connection with the work. Failure
to comply with this requirement shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR of his
responsibility to perform the work complete in accordance with the specification.
The information given in the geotechnical investigation report has been made
available to the CONTRACTOR in good faith. The OWNER will not be held
responsible for any inaccuracies or discrepancies therein and no claim whatsoever
from CONTRACTOR on this account will be entertained by the OWNER.
2.05.00
Nothing contained in the contract documents will relieve the CONTRACTOR
from, the responsibility of obtaining approval from the CONSULTANT for all the
installation criteria.
2.06.00
Access to the work areas shall be kept unobstructed and clear at all times so as not
to hamper the work of other trades.
2.07.00
The CONTRACTOR shall remove overhead, surface and underground
obstructions as directed by the CONSULTANT at, no extra cost and backfill the
voids in the ground with suitable material through which sound pile. can be
readily bored and constructed.
3.00.00
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.01.00
All applicable documents, including standards, codes, rules, laws, regulations of
regulatory bodies referred to herein shall be of latest issue or edition and shall be
considered part of this specification, except as may otherwise be stated herein.
Attachment 2
Page 108 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
3.02.00
4.00.00
4.01.00
5.00.00
5.01.00
5.02.00
5.03.0
10000011 / HB / 11094
Unless otherwise stated ,the design, materials and workmanship shall conform to
the following standards : IS: 2911 -Code of Practice for Design and Construction of
Pile Foundations
a) Part-1 -Concrete piles, Section-2.
b) Part-2 -Bored cast in situ piles
c) Part-4 Load test on piles
IS: 2131 -Method of standard penetration Test for soils
IS: 456 -Code of practice for plain and Reinforced Concrete.
IS: 8112 -Specification for Ordinary Portland Cement, 43 grade.
IS: 1489 -Portland pozzolana cement.
IS: 8112 -High strength ordinary portland cement.
IS: 12330 -Sulphate resistant cement.
IS: 383 -Specifications for Coarse and fine aggregates from natural
sources for concrete.
IS : 2386 -Method of Test for Aggregates for concrete.
IS : 432 -Specification for Mild Steel and Medium Tensile Steel bars
and Hand Drawn Steel Wire for concrete Reinforcement.
IS : 1786 -Specification for cold twisted steel Bars for concrete
Reinforcement.
IS: 3764 -Safety code for Excavation work.
IS: 1200 -Method of measurement of Building works – Part XXIII.
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS
Copies of geo-technical investigation report will be available with the
OWNER or Consultant as indicated in Data sheet A. The CONTRACTOR shall
note that all the above information has been given in good faith and no claim from
the CONTRACTOR will be entertained for any accuracy or discrepancy in the
same.
TYPE OF PILES
This specification covers bored cast in situ concrete piles of circular crosssection
only. These piles shall be formed by boring to the specified depth as shown and
called for on the drawings or as directed at site by the CONSULTANT. Execution
of the pile bore shall be by one of the methods outlined in Clause 1.01.01 above
and in Data Sheet-A.
The temporary casing or permanent liner and the pile bore shall be of diameter
adequate enough to give the necessary nominal finished diameter of the concrete
piles. The inner diameter of the upper guide casing shall not be less than the
specified nominal diameter of the pile. In case a permanent liner is used, the liner
diameter of the permanent liner shall correspond to the specified nominal
diameter of the pile.
The bored hole shall exclude any subsoil or detrimental material before
reinforcement and concrete is placed inside the casing borehole. The
CONTRACTOR shall, in his Bid, fully outline the methods that he proposes to
adopt to accomplish this.
Attachment 2
Page 109 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
6.00.00
TRIAL BOREHOLES FOR LOCATING FOUNDING STRATUM
6.01.00
To ascertain the subsurface strata and their characteristics, the
CONTRACTOR may be permitted to conduct trial boreholes only with the
permission of the OWNER/ CONSULTANT.
The locations of trial bore holes shall be subject to approval by the
CONSULTANT / OWNER.
Completion of the investigations, all trial bore holes shall be back filled upto below
cut off level of the piles in that area by sand and subsequent filling shall be done
by excavated clay or cement bentonite grout unless directed otherwise
by the CONSULTANT. The CONSULTANT’s approval shall be obtained prior to
commencement of back filling of the trial boreholes.
Cost of all such trial bore holes including all necessary back filling shall be to the
CONTRACTOR’S account. No concessions in time schedule will be granted on this
account.
SETTING OUT
6.02.00
6.03.00
6.04.00
7.00.00
7.01.00
7.02.00
The CONTRACTOR will be furnished with one reference benchmark and with two
mutually perpendicular reference axes. The CONTRACTOR shall locate accurately
the position of piles and install stakes as directed or as required by Drawings, with
reference to the reference bench mark and axes furnished. The CONTRACTOR
shall make good to the satisfaction of the CONSULTANT, defective or infructuous
work arising out of error in field layout, notwithstanding that the layouts and
marking may have been checked and approved by the CONSULTANT.
The CONTRACTOR shall check the coordinates of initial guide casing or
permanent liner position for each pile during and immediately after placing the
casing on the ground prior to its driving and confirm the same with the
coordinates of that pile as shown on the Drawing.
8.00.00
CONTINUITY OF CONSTRUCTION
8.01.00
Any pile that is taken up for execution from boring to final concreting shall be
executed at a continuous stretch without interruption. Stoppage of work in
between shifts will be permitted only during boring stage of the pile execution if
further boring is pending. Thereafter right from boring or chiselling of the final
portion of the length of the pile, through subsequent activities of flushing,
lowering of reinforcement cage, lowering of tremie, pre-concrete flushing and up
to concreting, no halt whatsoever in the execution of the pile will be permitted.
Attachment 2
Page 110 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
8.02.00
In case there is a halt of work during any of these activities except
concreting, the CONTRACTOR shall take steps to bore an extended length of
further 300mm or as decided by the CONSULTANT, or adopt any other measure
as decided by the CONSULTANT.
8.03.00
If there is any stoppage of work during concreting, this pile shall be
abandoned altogether.
8.04.00
Costs of remedial measures and their consequences shall be borne by the
CONTRACTOR if the stoppage is due to the CONTRACTOR’S act of commission
or omission.
9.00.00
MATERIALS
9.01.00
CONCRETE
9.01.01
General
9.01.02
All concrete work shall conform to relevant IS specifications and as
described below:
9.01.03
Aggregates
a) The CONTRACTOR shall get the source of supply of all aggregates
approved by the CONSULTANT prior to commencement of work. Sample. of both
fine and coarse aggregates shall be tested for soundness as per IS:2386 in a
laboratory approved by the CONSULTANT for each quarry location or source.
Aggregates shall be particularly tested for any evidence of expansive reaction
between the aggregates and the cement to be used. The costs of supplying sample
of aggregate and the costs of all tests thereon shall be born, by the CONTRACTOR.
b) Coarse and fine aggregates shall be totally free of chlorides and other
deleterious matters. All aggregates shall be washed to the satisfaction of the
CONSULTANT. Marine and creek sources of aggregates shall be avoided to the
extent possible and shall be used only through written permission of the
CONSULTANT. Extra care shall be exercised in this regard if sulphate-resisting
cement is used.
Attachment 2
Page 111 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
c) All aggregates brought to site shall be free of, and kept free from
deleterious matter. Aggregates, from different sources, of different type and of
different sizes shall be stored separately in different stockpiles or different
hoppers. Where stored on the ground, care shall be exercised during retrieval, the
batch is not contaminated by soil or organic matter.
d) Sieve analysis of aggregates shall be conducted at regular intervals to ensure
that the grading conforms to that in the design mix. If a change in grading or
angularity of coarse aggregates is unavoidable, the mix shall be redesigned. Only
20 mm downgraded aggregates shall be used.
9.02.00
WaterOnly water permitted by the CONSULTANT shall be used for making
concrete. All testing of water shall be got done by the CONTRACTOR at no extra
cost to the OWNER.
9.03.00
Cement
Cement used shall be ordinary Portland cement 43 grade/Sulphate resisting
cement conforming to 1S:8112/ 1S:12330 unless specified otherwise in Data SheetA due to deleterious effect of sulphate and chlorides in ground water. The C3A
content in cement shall range between 5% and 7% unless approved otherwise by
the CONSULTANT. Where Portland pozzolana cement is specified to be used,
only cement, which does not contain fly ash as pozzolana,
shall be used.
All concrete for both piles and pile caps shall be produced only by weighbatching
the ingredients as specified.
9.04.00
9.05.00
Concrete shall be of minimum grade designation M25 or as specified in Data
Sheet-A. It shall conform to IS:456-2000
9.06.00
The cement content shall not be less than 400 kg/m3. The water cement ratio shall
not exceed 0.45, or that specified in Data Sheet-A if necessitated by adverse
subsurface environment.
The slump as measured at the pile head itself shall range between 150 mm to 200
mm. To achieve the slump within this required range with the water cement ratio
within the limit specified special plasticiser admixture shall be used. The
plasticiser to be used shall be got approved from the CONSULTANT. Any
admixture containing chlorides or nitrates shall not be used. The plasticiser shall
be added as per manufacturer’s instructions or as directed by the CONSULTANT.
9.07.00
9.08.00
Cube tests of preliminary mix design as well as works cubes shall be done in a
laboratory approved by the CONSULTANT. All such tests including supplying
and transporting the cubes to this laboratory and all other related works shall be at
the CONTRACTOR’S cost.
Attachment 2
Page 112 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
9.09.00
While evolving a concrete mix, no admixture or plasticiser shall be used.
9.10.00
At least one series of tests for cube strength of concrete shall be conducted for
every 20 piles constructed or 50 cubic metres of concrete whichever is least and not
less than one set of tests shall be conducted for any one shift’s concreting
operations. Each set of tests shall consist of nine work test cubes, field cured. Three
cubes shall be tested at 7 days and three at 28 days. The balance three cubes shall
be kept for testing at 14 day in case the 7 days test results are not satisfactory.
Records of all cube test results shall be communicated to the CONSULTANT
identifying the pile being concreted while making the cubes. The CONSULTANT
reserves the right to reject piles of deficient concrete strengths. Such rejected piles
shall be replaced by the CONTRACTOR with additional piles along with
necessary extended pile cap as described by the CONSULTANT and the cost of
this additional and extended work shall be wholly borne by the CONTRACTOR.
9.11.00
The CONTRACTOR shall provide at his own cost all labour, materials and
equipment necessary for routine site tests on all aggregates, water, slump tests on
concrete, cube tests and all other tests as specified and shall carry out the same as
required by CONSULTANT.
9.12.00
REINFORCEMENT
9.12.01
All reinforcement shall be as per the approved design. The reinforcement shall be
assembled and tied together and made up into cage sufficiently rigid to withstand
handling without damage and distortion. Where indicated in Data Sheet-A, the
reinforcement bars shall Fe 415 grade TMT-HCR bars.
9.12.02
Where the number and diameters of reinforcement bars change as per the
Drawing, laps of reinforcement bars shall be as indicated on the Drawing. Joints in
longitudinal bars, if unavoidable, shall be made by lapping. Laps shall be tackwelded as approved by the CONSULTANT to prevent distortion of the reinforcing
cage. The number of joints in longitudinal steel bars shall be kept to a minimum
and staggered. Joints in reinforcement shall be such that the full strength of each
bar is effective across the joint and shall, be made such that there is no detrimental
displacement of the reinforcement during the construction of the pile. Mechanical
splices, if and as approved by the CONSULTANT may be used for jointing
reinforcement bar of samediameters.
Attachment 2
Page 113 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
9.12.03
The projecting lengths of the longitudinal bars beyond the pile cut-off level shall be
equal to a minimum of 50 times bar diameter or such length as shown on the
Drawings.
9.12.04
The lateral links or helical reinforcement shall fit closely around the main
longitudinal bars and be fixed to them by soft annealed 16 gauge black iron wire,
the free ends of which shall be turned toward. the centre.
9.12.05
Concrete cover over all reinforcement including lateral links or helicals. shall be 50
mm, unless shown otherwise on the Drawing. Suitable and adequate cover blocks
shall be provided. The cover blocks shall be circular with a concentric hole of
adequate size to allow lateral reinforcement to pass through and allow free
rotation. The cover blocks shall be manufactured of concrete of grade higher than
that of concrete designated for the pile, using, the same grade and type of cement.
Alternately, the cover block shall be of more durable material approved by the
CONSULTANT, which will not lead to corrosion of the reinforcement or spalling
of the concrete cover. The cover blocks shall be placed all along the length of the
reinforcement cage with adequate number in the upper portion over the length of
the temporary casing.
The cover blocks shall be aligned for smooth lowering of the cage into the pile bore
and for lifting of the temporary casing without displacing the reinforcement cage.
from its seated position.
9.12.06
Stiffner bars, spreader forks and lacings within the reinforcement cage shall be
provided to prevent twisting or any type of distortion of the reinforcement cage
during its lifting, handling and lowering into the pile bore. These shall be placed in
a manner and pattern such that the inside dimension of the reinforcement cage is
adequate for concentric placement of the tremie pipe and its operation without
disturbing the cage during concreting.
10.00.00
TEMPORARY STEEL GUIDE CASING
10.01.00
Temporary steel guide casing for bored cast in situ concrete piles shall have an
internal diameter equal to the nominal diameter of the pile. The thickness shall be
adequate for strength to withstand driving without damage. Length of each casing
component shall be maximum possible. Joints shall be welded, lock seamed or
screwed.
10.02.00
Guide casings shall be free from any distortion and buckling and of uniform crosssection throughout. The inside of the guide casing shall be free from projections
and encrusted concrete.
Attachment 2
Page 114 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
11.00.00
PERMANENT LINERS
11.01.00
Permanent liners shall be used for bored cast in situ concrete piles where specified.
The scope of this specification excludes geo-fabrics as permanent liners and
includes only liners of approved rigid material.
11.02.00
The inner diameter of permanent liners shall correspond to the specified nominal
diameter of the pile. The liners shall be of mild steel or of material approved by
ENG1NEER in writing. Thickness of the liner shall be at least as specified, or more
if required to withstand handling, driving etc. without any damage, denting,
distortion or buckling. If the CONTRACTOR is of the opinion that a thicker liner
than that specified is required he shall get the approval for use of thicker gauge
from the CONSULTANT in writing. Liners, which are damaged, distorted, dented
or buckled in any manner, shall not be
used.
11.03.00
The inside surface of the liners shall be clean and free of any loose scales, rust, soil,
debris, encrusted concrete or any projections.
11.04.00
Liner joints shall be welded. It shall be ensured that the vertical axes of the liners
being welded coincide and the liners are not welded together with eccentricity.
11.05.01
Where specified, the outer surface of the permanent liner shall be coated or treated
accordingly.
12.00.00
BENTONITE DRILLING MUD
12.01.00
Bentonite powder and bentonite suspension fluid shall conform to
requirements specified in IS:2911 (Part I/Sec.2). The CONTRACTOR is advised to
obtain Manufacturer’s test certificate for each consignment delivered to the site to
ensure the conformity of the material delivered. However each batch of bentonite
powder delivered and the suspension fluid made there from shall be tested by the
CONTRACTOR and results presented to the CONSULTANT. Any batch not
conforming to required specifications shall be rejected.
The bentonite powder shall be mixed thoroughly with clean, potable water to
make a suspension of density as specified. The temperature of the water used and
that of the bentonite fluid supplied to the pile bore shall not be lower than 5 Deg.C.
Where saline or chemically contaminated ground water occurs, special precautions
shall be taken as approved by the CONSULTANT to modify the bentonite
suspension or prehydrate the bentoniite with fresh, potable water so as to render
the fluid suitable for construction of piles. The pH of the fluid shall range from 9.5
to 12. The bentonite suspension fluid shall be continuously circulated and agitated
using circulating pumps to prevent deposition of suspension and coagulation.
12.02.00
Attachment 2
Page115 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
12.03.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
13.00.00
The suspension fluid shall be regularly tested to ensure its suitability for use as
drilling mud. The frequency of testing the fluid and the method of sampling shall
be proposed by the CONTRACTOR for approval prior to the commencement of
the work. The frequency may subsequently be varied as deemed necessary by the
CONSULTANT. These tests shall ensure consistency of the fluid properties, after
the mixing process blending of freshly mixed bentonite suspension and any
process which may be adopted to remove impurities from previously used
bentonite suspension.
PILE BORING
13.01.00
FORMATION OF PILE BORES
13.01.01
Pile bores for bored cast in situ concrete piles shall be executed upto minimum
depth specified on the Drawings or as modified by the CONSULTANT in writing
during progress of boring. The pile shall achieve its required capacity to take
downward and upward force and horizontal forces in combination as specified.
13.01.02
Pile bores shall be executed by any of the following methods
a) Using the Direct Mud Circulation or Reverse Mud Circulation Methods with
bentonite slurry as drilling mud and appropriate equipment
b) Using percussion type of drilling and bentonite, slurry to stabilize the hole
c) Using permanent rigid liners of steel or any other material approved by the
CONSULTANT and boring through the liners.
The BIDDER shall indicate along with his bid which of the above methods, he
proposes to adopt for this work. However the decision of the CONSULTANT
regarding the method to be adopted for executing the bores shall be binding on the
CONTRACTOR.
Use of temporary guide casings through unstable strata is permitted only upto a
maximum of 5 m below ground level.
The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that bores formed are true to a cylindrical shape
to the extent possible and over cutting is minimized.The CONTRACTOR shall also
ensure that water cavities behind temporary casings are altogether avoided so as to
ensure quality concrete for the pile shaft.
Boring shall not be carried out within a distance of five times the diameter of the
pile from a pile which has been freshly concreted within the past forty-eight hours.
13.01.03
13.01.04
13.01.05
13.02.00
STANDARD PENETRATION TESTS
13.02.01
The CONTRACTOR shall conduct Standard Penetration Tests (SPT) within the pile
bore at pile locations and at depths as indicated on the Drawing or as directed by
the CONSULTANT. The procedures for conducting these SPTs in soil and rock
shall be as per the relevant IS codes.
Attachment 2
Page 116 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
13.02.03
SPTs shall be conducted as the boring for the pile bore progresses and at the
founding level of the pile (pile tip).
13.03.00
BORE LOGS AND EXTRACTED MATERIAL SAMPLES
13.03.01
A complete log of the subsurface profile shall be maintained during
execution of boring for each and every pile shaft. A copy of such log shall be
submitted to the CONSULTANT for his scrutiny prior to commencement of
reinforcement cage lowering.
13.03.02
All through the boring operations, the subsurface material (soil or rock cuttings) as
extracted through the flap valve bailers. or wash of circulating mud shall be
preserved in polythene bags at regular 0.5 m to 1 m intervals of depth or as
directed by the CONSULTANT. The sample shall be labelled, indicating the
unique pile number and depth. The labelled sample will be placed in another
polythene bag. All these samples shall be handed over to the CONSULTANT.
DIRECT MUD CIRCULATION METHOD
13.04.00
13.04.01
13.04.02
13.04.03
13.04.04
13.05.00
13.05.01
13.05.02
The initial boring of about 1.5 m shall be done by bailer and the guide casing shall
then be lowered into the bore hole. The bore shall be filled with bentonite slurry
fed from bentonite installation.
The center line of the guide casing shall be checked with respect to the reference
points before proceeding with further boring. Further boring shall proceed with
the use of direct mud circulation chisel upto the founding strata.
The chisel used to bore the hole, shall be of diameter appropriate for the specified
nominal diameter of the hole to be bored. The chisel shall be connected to API rods
of adequate diameter and thickness through which bentonite slurry shall be
pumped.
Bentonite slurry shall be pumped through the chisel rods by means of high
pressure pump. The chisel shall have suitable ports for the bentonite slurry to flow
out at high pressure. The bentonite slurry and the cuttings, which are carried to the
surface by the rising flow of slurry shall pass through a settling tank of adequate
size to remove the cuttings and spoils from the slurry before the slurry is
recirculated to the pile bore. A suitable bentonite slurry mixing and recirculation
plant shall be designed and installed.
REVERSE MUD CIRCULATION METHOD
The CQNTRACTOR shall adopt Reverse Mud Circulation Method only where
strata encountered are such that there is no danger of loosening of the subsoil
during the boring operations and the subsoil gradually becomes denser and more
compact with progressive depths or where bedrock is being penetrated at shallow
depths. This Method shall he adopted only if approved by the CONSULTANT.
The Method is essentially the same as the Direct Mud Circulation Method except
that the bentonite slurry shall be sucked through the chisel instead of being
pumped through it. Except for this, the specifications for direct mud Circulation
Method apply here also.
Attachment 2
Page 117 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
13.06.00
BAILER BORING USING BENTONITE SLURRY
13.06.01
This process is essentially the same as the Mud circulation method except that all
boring shall be done by flap valve bailer or flap valve bailer and chisel) upto the
founding stratum, using bentonite slurry. Bentonite slurry shall be allowed to flow
into the casing through pipes or channels, so that the guide casing is always kept
filled with bentonite. The material extracted by the bailer shall be left alongside the
boring if so directed by CONSULTANT, Fresh bentonite slurry shall be allowed to
flow into the casing so that the top level of the bentonite is kept the same at all
times.
13.06.02
Except as modified here in above, the specification for Direct Mud Circulation
method shall apply to Bailer Boring also.
13.07.00
BORING FOR PILES WITH PERMANENT LINERS
13.07.01
Where specified, permanent liners shall be used for bored cast in situ piles. The
permanent liners shall be installed simultaneously as the boring for the pile
progresses.
13.07.02
Pile boring shall be done from within the permanent liner by flap-valve bailer
boring or by any percussive method or rotary method as approved by the
CONSULTANT. to the extent possible, the bottom of the permanent liner shall be
driven ahead of the boring except where SPTs are to be conducted. Where SPTs are
specified to be conducted, the permanent liner bottom shall be maintained at least
300 mm above the bottom of the bore.
13.08.00
LOSS OF DRILLING MUD WHILE BORING
13.08.01
In the event of a rapid loss of drilling mud in a pile bore, the CONTRACTOR shall
immediately draw the attention of the CONSULTANT and take necessary action
as approved by the CONSULTANT.
FINAL POST-BORE FLUSHING AND CLEANING
13.09.00
13.09.01
On completion of the total length of the pile bore, the bore shall be thoroughly
cleaned and flushed.
13.09.02
If the pile bore has been executed by either of the mud circulation methods, fresh
bentonite slurry shall be pumped through the chisel resting at the base of the bore
to completely remove all cuttings and other loose material from the base. During
the flushing the speed of the bentonite circulation pump shall be raised to maintain
high pressure. Such flushing shall be continued for at least 20 minutes while
occasionally agitating the chisel. Flushing shall be continued beyond 20 minutes if
the return slurry indicates presence of cuttings still within the bore.
Attachment 2
Page 118 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
13.09.03
In case the pile bore has been executed by Bailer boring with bentonite Slurry, the
bore shall be initially cleaned of loose material by light tamping of the flap-valve
bailer. Thereafter the bailer shall be withdrawn and a string of API rods shall be
lowered upto the base of the bore and bentonite slurry shall be pumped through
under high pressure as in the case of the Mud Circulation Method. Agitation shall
be effected by circular movement of the string of rods around the pile bore.
Flushing shall be thus continued for at least 20 minutes. Flushing shall continue
beyond 20 minutes till the return wash indicates that the bore is clean to the
satisfaction of the CONSULTANT.
13.09.04
Where permanent liners have been used, the bore shall be filled with water that
has been certified for concreting and a flap valve bailer shall be used to remove the
loose material by light tamping. The bailer shall then be withdrawn and a string of
API rods shall be lowered down to the base of the bore. The certified water shall
then be pumped through the string of rods at high speed for at least 20 minutes.
Agitation shall simultaneously be effected by a gentle vertical movement and
vigorous circular movement to the rods. Flushing shall continue thus beyond 20
minutes till the return wash indicates that the bore is clean to the satisfaction of the
CONSULTANT. The water from within may be
pumped out with approval of the CONSULTANT. However no pumping out shell
be done if the ground water table is above the bottom of the bile bore and/or if the
subsoil around the bottom of the pile bore is likely to be disturbed by pumping out
the water.
14.00.00
PLACEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT CAGE
14.01.00
Immediately after successful completion of final post bore flushing and cleaning,
the reinforcement cage shall be lowered into the pile bore. All care shall be taken
during transporting lifting and lowering of the cage that the cage does not twist or
distort out of alignment.
Attachment 2
Page 119 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
14.02.00
The cage shall be lowered into the pile bore by gravity and shall not be forced into
the bore. Care shall be exercised that no collapse of any portion of the unlined bore
occurs while lowering. In case the total length of the pile is such hat handling of
the entire length of the cage becomes unwieldy, the cage shall e fabricated in two
lengths. The location of such jointing shall however be got approved by the
CONSULTANT in writing. After the first section of the cage is lowered and held
with the top of the bars adequately outside the bore, the upper cage section shall
be lifted, held vertical and gradually lowered over the lower cage section so that
the main longitudinal reinforcement bars of the. two cage sections are aligned for
bar jointing of the respective bars of the two cages shall be done as per Clause 8.2.2
above. The integral cage shall then be lowered into the pile bore and into final
position and held in place by slings or suitable devices approved by the
CONSULTANT.
14.03.00
Longitudinal reinforcement above the ground level shall not be arbitrarily bent for
seating the concrete tremie hopper. If the reinforcement cage has been fabricated
longer than that required on the Drawing (in view of a shorter pile bore than that
envisaged earlier), the excess length shall be cut. Outward flaying of the main
reinforcement bars of the cage shall not exceed 5 degrees with the vertical to avoid
breaking of the bars while rebending the
reinforcement back into position after the concreting. In any case, the internal
radius of the bend shall not be less than five times the bar diameter. While flaying
the reinforcement cage outwards, it shall be ensured that the cover to
reinforcement within the pile bore to be concreted is maintained.
15.00.00
FINAL PRE-CONCRETING FLUSHING
15.01.00
Immediately after the reinforcement cage is positioned, the concrete tremie pipe
shall be lowered into the pile bore concentrically within the reinforcement cage,
with the bottom of the tremie pipe just above the bottom of the bore. The top of the
tremie pipe shall be connected to a high speed bentonite pump and flushing with
bentonite slurry shall be resumed. If concreting of the pile bore is to be done by
concrete pump, flushing shall be done through a string of API rods lowered into
the pile bore concentrically within the reinforcement cage with the bottom of the
string of rods just above the bottom of the pile bore.
Attachment 2
Page 120 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
15.02.00
The procedure for flushing shall be the same as that indicated in Clause 9.9 above.
At the end of such flushing the CONTRACTOR shall ensure that heavy
contaminated bentonite suspension, which could impair free flow of the concrete
from the tremie pipe or concrete pump trunk has not accumulated in the bottom of
the pile bore. The suspension shall be sampled from the pile bore bottom by a
suitable device approved by the CONSULTANT and the density of the suspension
checked by a calibrated hydrometer. The density of the sampled suspension shall
not exceed 1.2 gm/cc. In case this value is exceeded, flushing shall be resumed as
per Clause 9.9 till the suspension is within the desired density range.
16.00.00
PILE CONCRETING
16.01.00
GENERAL
16.01.01
Concreting of pile bores shall be executed only through a tremie system or
concrete pump over the entire length of the pile. Tipping in of concrete from
ground level or above into the pile bore is prohibited even if the pile bore is dry (as
may perhaps be the case for pile bores with permanent liners).
16.01.02
Only freshly mixed concrete shall be used. Placement of the concrete shall be a
continuous operation. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that concrete mixers of
adequate capacity are provided at the site with standby, If concrete pump is to be
used for concreting a standby pump shall be provided. The pile shall be
abandoned if concreting operations are suspended due to any reason by more than
20 minutes. It shall also be ensured that there are no air pockets created within the
concrete shaft.
16.02.00
TREMIE CONCRETING SYSTEM
16.02.01
Tremie pipe concreting shall be done as per IS:456 and IS:2911 (Part 1/ Sec.2). The
minimum diameter of the tremie pipe shall be 200 mm. The steel hopper at the top
of the tremie pipe shall have a volume in excess of the total volume of the tremie
pipe below. The neck of the hopper shall be fitted with a steel plate covering the
entire opening. Suitable arrangements shall be made to remove the steel plate and
uncover the hopper neck aperture when the hopper is full of concrete. The hopper
and the entire length of the tremie pipe shall be thoroughly clean and free of any
encrusted concrete or internal protusions such as sleeves, collars etc., or any soil or
debris. The entire tremie pipe-hopper system shall be watertight.
Attachment 2
Page 121 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
16.02.02
After the final pre-concreting flushing has been successfully executed, the tremie
pipe shall not be extracted but shall continue to remain upto the bottom of the pile
bore. Suitable ramps or staging shall be provided to facilitate easy and smooth
feeding of the hopper with concrete either manually or by mechanised means. The
ramps or staging shall be flexible enough to allow concrete feeding if the hopper is
raised during concreting.
16.02.03
A sliding plug of polystyrene (or similar material lighter than water and approved
by the CONSULTANT) shall be placed in the tremie pipe to prevent direct contact
between the first charge of concrete in the tremie and the bentonite slurry. At the
commencement of concreting, the steel plate shall first cover the hopper neck while
the hopper is completely filled with concrete. The steel plate shall then be removed
and the concrete in the hopper allowed to flow into the tremie pipe. Subsequent
charges of concrete shall be maintained as continuous as possible until the pile
bore is completely concreted as specified in Clause 12.5 below. The tremie pipe
shall at all times penetrate the concrete by minimum two metres after placing of
the concrete has commenced, and shall not be withdrawn from within the concrete
until completion of concreting. Particular care shall be exercised when vertical
movement is imparted on the tremie pipe to force the concrete down the tremie
pipe. Such movements shall be limited. The CONTRACTOR shall note that the pile
shall be abandoned if in the opinion of the ENGNEER, the tremie pipe bottom has
been raised above the concrete level within the pile bore. While raising the tremie
pipe, care shall be exercised that the reinforcement cage is not disturbed from its
position.
16.03.00
CONCRETE PUMP
16.03.01
If the concrete pump is used to feed the hopper of a tremie concreting system,
provisions of Clause 12.2 shall apply.
16.03.02
If the concrete pump is used for placing concrete directly into the pile bore, the
trunk of the pump shall be placed upto the bottom of the pile bore immediately
after the string of API rods used for final pre-concreting flushing have been
removed after successful flushing. The trunk shall at all times penetrate the
concrete after commencement of concreting by at least two metres and shall not be
withdrawn from within the concrete until the completion of concreting. The
CONTRACTOR shall note that the pile shall be abandoned if in the opinion of the
CONSULTANT, the trunk has been raised above the concrete level within the pile
bore. While raising the trunk, care shall be exercised that the reinforcement cage is
not disturbed from its position.
Attachment 2
Page 122 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
16.04.00
LIFTING OF TEMPORARY CASING
16.04.01
The temporary casing shall be carefully withdrawn only after the concrete surface
in the pile bore has risen to not less than three metres above the bottom of the
casing or not less than one metre above the level of ground water whichever is
higher. The casing shall be lifted only to the extent that there is minimum one
metre of concrete above the casing bottom. The level of concrete shall be checked
vis a vis the casing bottom and ground water level by suitable methods as
approved by the CONSULTANT.
16.04.02
While withdrawing the temporary casing, care shall be exercised that the
reinforcement cage is not pulled out along with the casing. It shall also be ensured
that no voids or ground water pockets are formed around the pile shaft during
withdrawal. Adequate precautions shall be exercised to ensure that the concrete is
not lifted up along with the casing and that no necking or waisting occurs in the
pile shaft. Special care shall be exercised when the ground water level is high.
During withdrawal, the movement of the temporary casing shall
be maintained in an axial direction relative to the pile.
16.05.00
COMPLETION OF CONCRETING
16.05.01
Irrespective of the specified pile cut-off level, concrete shall be poured into the pile
bore until all the contaminated concrete at the top of the bore overflows the top of
the pile bore and neat concrete appears continuously as overflow. Concreting shall
then be terminated after permission of the CONSULTANT.
17.00.00
PILE CUT-OFF AND EXTENSION
17.01.00
Excavation for pile cut-off shall be done by the CONTRACTOR unless indicated
otherwise in Data Sheet-A. The extent of excavation shall not exceed the minimum
necessary for the required pile cut-off. The CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate
side slopes/shoring at no extra cost to the OWNER, in order to provide safe
working space for pile cut-off. Excavated material shall not be stacked near the
edge of any excavation. The material shall be stacked at spots designated by the
OWNER near the excavation within the plant limits at no extra cost to the
OWNER.
17.02.00
Pile cut-off to specified levels shown on the Drawing shall be done by the
CONTRACTOR for all piles at no extra cost. The CONTRACTOR shall station at
site an adequate work force for the same.
Attachment 2
Page 123 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
17.03.00
When cutting off and trimming piles to the specified cut-off level, the
Contractor shall take care to avoid shattering or otherwise damaging the rest of the
pile. Any cracked or defective concrete shall be cut away and the pile repaired in
an approved manner to provide a full and sound section at the cut-off level.
17.04.0
Minimum chipping of the pile shall be 600 mm or till sound concrete is met with or
specified cut off level, whichever is greater. While chipping the concrete, care shall
be taken to ensure that the reinforcement is not damaged in any way. If the
reinforcement is damaged while chipping or bending back, the CONTRACTOR
shall rectify the same as directed by the CONSULTANT at no extra cost to the
OWNER. If the specified cut—off level is less than 600 mm below the ground level
(which is the concrete overflow level after all temporary casings are withdrawn) or
if the cut-off level is above the ground level, the concrete shaft shall be chipped by
minimum 600 mm or till sound concrete is met with, whichever is greater.
Thereafter, if found necessary, additional reinforcement shall be jointed as
specified earlier in Clause 8.2.2 above. The pile shall then be built up to the
specified cut-off level using suitable circular form work and concrete of grade
specified for the pile shaft.
17.05.00
If due to any defective concreting, honeycombing, exposure of reinforcement,
snapping of reinforcement bars etc., stripping of pile, concrete is required to be
done to a level lower than the specified cut-off level to obtain dense and sound
concrete, the pile shall be built up with the good concrete of specified grade for the
pile shaft upto the specified cut off level by the CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to
the OWNER, Such building up including excavation, concreting, form work and
compacted back filling shall be at CONTRACTOR’S cost.
17.06.00
On completing pile cut-off for any pile, all exposed reinforcement surface shall be
coated with cement wash at no extra cost to the OWNER.
17.07.00
The CONTRACTOR shall backfill all excavation done by him for pile cut-off to
levels specified by the CONSULTANT or as shown on the Drawing. These levels
shall be lower than or at least equal to the original working level.
17.08.00
Any extra-excavation and back filling of the same with consolidation shall be at no
extra cost the OWNER.
Attachment 2
Page 124 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
18.00.00
TOLERANCES
18.01.00
POSITIONAL.
8.01.01
18.02.00
For a pile cut off at or above ground level, the maximum permitted deviation of
the pile centre from the centre-point shown on the Drawing shall be 75 mm in any
direction. An additional tolerance for the pile head cut off below ground level will
be permitted in accordance with the Clauses 14.2 and 14.3 below.
VERTICAL
18.02.01
Tolerance of verticality shall be within 1 in 75 for the completed pile shaft.
18.03.00
RAKER
18.03.01
The equipment governing alignment of the inclined permanent casing and boring
tool shall be set to give the correct alignment of the pile to within a tolerance of 1 in
50.
18.03.02
The maximum deviation of the finished pile from the specified rake shall be 1 in 25
for piles raking upto 1:6 and 1 in 15 for pile raking more than 1:6.
18.04.00
CORRECTIVE MEASURES
18.04.01
No forcible corrections to piles to overcome errors of position or alignment shall be
attempted.
18.04.02
If after excavation for pile cut off, any pile or piles are found to exceed the
specified positional and/or alignment tolerances, these shall be replaced or
supplemented by the CONTRACTOR by additional pile(s) as directed by the
CONSULTANT at no extra cost to the OWNER. Also if as a result of pile(s)
exceeding the specified permissible positional deviations, and/or the consequent
addition of any replacement pile(s), any pile cap is required to be enlarged, the
extra cost of such pile cap enlargement shall be to the Contractor’s account.
Attachment 2
Page 125 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
19.00.00
ABANDONED PILE BORES AND REJECTED PILES
19.01.00
Abandoned pile bores shall be filled with sand, which constitutes fine
aggregate used for making concrete. If a permanent liner has already been driven,
the same shall be withdrawn progressively as the sand is poured in. However no
attempts shall be made to extract the liner if, in the opinion of the CONSULTANT,
this can damage or set out of alignment of any other pile in the vicinity.
19.02.00
No attempt shall be made to forcibly extract a rejected pile shaft. Rejected piles
shall be cut off as directed by the CONSULTANT. The CONTRACTOR shall install
replacement pile or piles in lieu of rejected pile as directed by the CONSULTANT.
19.03.00
The CONTRACTOR shall not be paid any additional amount for filling up
abandoned pile, bores or cutting off rejected piles, provision of extra piles,
enlargement of pile cap etc., necessitated due to faulty work of the
CONTRACTOR.
20.00.00
PILE CAPACITIES
20.01.00
Safe structural capacity of the pile shall be taken as the load calculated on the basis
of permissible concrete stresses as indicated in Data Sheet-A and permissible steel
stresses as per 1S:456.
20.02.00
The negative skin friction shall be determined using results of the pull-out test of
short piles. Skin friction component of total load carrying capacity shall be
determined by conducting initial cyclic pile load tests on piles installed to full
length. Also the capacity of piles to resist uplift forces shall he determined by
conducting pull-out, tests on piles installed to full length.
20.03.00
Maximum estimated safe axial loads, both downward and upward that the piles
are required to take sizewise are listed in Data Sheet-A. The maximum estimated
lateral capacities of the piles sizewise are also listed in Data Sheet- A. Pile load tests
on both initial piles as well as working piles shall be carried out to establish and
prove these capacities.
Attachment 2
Page 126 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
21.00.00
LOAD TESTS
21.01.00
GENERAL
21.01.01
The number of initial test piles and test on working piles shall be as specified in the
schedule of items or at the discretion of the CONSULTANT. The CONTRACTOR
shall provide everything necessary including equipment, measuring devices, jack,
structural framework, kentledges etc. This includes installation of test piles also
and concreting of pile cap either temporary or permanent over single or group of
piles for testing the piles. The pile cap concreting will not be paid for separately.
21.01.02
Load tests shall in general be carried out as per1S:2911 (Part IV) except as modified
herein or directed otherwise by the CONSULTANT.
21.01.03
Piles to be load tested shall either be so designated on the Drawings or
specified/selected by CONSULTANT in the field.
21.01.04
Test load shall be applied to the piles by any suitable means preferably by a
properly calibrated hydraulic jack with a remote control pump. Test load applied
to the piles shall be such that a constant load is maintained under increasing
settlement.
21.01.05
The required reaction may be derived from either a loaded platform or anchor
piles. Anchor pile, shall not be closer than 6 times the pile diameter on either side.
Working piles shall not be used as anchor piles. Anchor piles, if provided, shall be
at CONTRACTOR’S cost.
21.01.06
Load tests shall be carried out not earlier than 28 days from the day of casting the
pile. Initial load shall be completed well the schedule start regular piles. However
routine load test may be concurrently with pile installation operation by
maintaining adequate as directed CONSULTANT.
21.01.07
The design and arrangement of application of loading etc., for all types of load
tests, shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR to the CONSULTANT for his
approval.
21.01.08
All load tests shall be conducted under the supervision of the CONSULTANT. All
responsibilities for conducting the tests safely and properly shall rest with the
CONTRACTOR.
Attachment 2
Page 127 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
21.02.00
CALIBRATION OF EQUIPMENTS
The CONTRACTOR shall ensure, that all the equipment/instruments are properly
calibrated, at the start of the tests, to reflect the correct values. If so demanded by
the CONSULTANT, the CONTRACTOR shall have all or such specific instruments
tested at an approved testing laboratory at the Contractor's cost and the test report
shall be submitted to the CONSULTANT. It the CONSULTANT desires to
witness/inspect such tests, the CONTRACTOR shall arrange for this and also
provide such access and facilities for inspection which are required.
21.03.00
INITIAL LOAD TESTS
21.03.01
Immediately on mobilization to site, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare to install
piles for conducting initial vertical load (downward and pull-out) and lateral pile
load tests.
21.03.02
In case the cut off is below ground level, a suitable excavation shall be made to
provide access to the level after breaking oft the unsound concrete as specified
earlier in Clause 13.0.
21.03.03
For the compression type of test, the pile head shall be cut off level and capped by
a R.C. cap to provide horizontal plane bearing surface upon which a steel plate
shall be placed. Earth from under the pile cap shall be scooped out so that pile cap
has no soil support. Thereafter, the kentledge and all other accessories outside the
pit pertaining to and necessary for conducting the test shall be set up. An easy and
safe access to the pile test head shall be provided.
21.03.04
It the pile test head is below the ground water level, the CONTRACTOR shall
provide suitable sumps and dewater the pit so as to render the pit dry enough, to
enable conducting the test. Any dewatering will be considered as part of the test
and the CONTRACTOR shall not be separately paid for the same.
21.03.05
The test load shall be so applied that it reaches the pile in a static manner. The
loading may be applied directly by kentledge or jacking against a reaction system
provided by means of kentledge, tension piles or ground anchors. Where
kentledge is used, it shall be supported on a properly designed frame or gantry
such that there is no possibility of the load tilting or collapsing. The foundations of
this frame or gantry should be sufficiently far way from the test pile so as not to
affect its behaviour to any significant extent. Where tension piles or ground
anchors are used, they shall be located a minimum distance of six times the test
pile size from the centre of the test pile to the centre of the pile/anchor.
Attachment 2
Page 128 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
21.03.06
The displacement of the test pile shall be related to a fixed datum. This may consist
of a reference beam (data bar) supported by two foundations positioned outside
the zones of influence of the reaction support area. The deflection measuring
equipment must be set up in such a way that any tilting of the test pile will not
cause errors in the measurements. Dial gauges shall be used for measuring
deflection. The least count of the dial gauges shall be at least 0.02mm. At least two
but preferably four dial gauges shall be used and shall be placed at diagonally
opposite corners.
21.03.07
The reference bars for the dial gauges shall be adequately rigid and on firm
supports. The support., for the reference bars shall be so located that they are
beyond the zone of influence of the loaded test pile (equal to three times the pile
size from pile edge) and the zone of influence of kentledge supports. The bars shall
be adequately stiffened and placed on supports in a manner such that any effect
due to ambient temperature variations and vibrations due to traffic etc. are
minimized. The reference bars and dial gauges shall not be exposed to direct sun
and the pit shall be protected by tarpaulin sheets while the test is in progress.
21.03.08
The total test load shall be three (3) times the estimated safe load-carrying capacity
of the pile or failure, whichever is earlier, and shall be applied in equal increments
of 20 percent of the estimated safe load. Unloading may however be in higher
decrements with total number not less than five. At each load increment, pile
deflection shall be observed accurate to 0.02 mm at an interval of 1, 5, 10, 15, 25, 35,
50 and 60 minutes and thereafter at half hourly intervals, upto a time when the rate
of deflection of the pile top reduces to 0.1 mm in half hour or 0.2 mm. in one hour.
The load increment in any case shall be maintained for 1 hour at least. The design
load as well as the final load shall be maintained for 24 hours at least or as
indicated in Data Sheet-A. At these load increments, after the first hour deflection
readings shall be taken at every one hour interval.
21.03.09
During the release stage, each load decrement shall be maintained at least for 30
minutes and readings of deflection noted. When the load is fully released to zero,
measurements of rebound shall be continued till the deflection of the pile top is not
more than 0.1mm per half hour.
21.03.10
Initial cyclic tests shall be carried out to determine skin friction and point
resistance of piles. This shall be carried out as per 1S:2911 (Part-V). However, each
cycle of loading and unloading shall be repeated allowing a time Interval of 10
minute. between the end of one cycle and the beginning of the next.
Attachment 2
Page 129 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
21.03.11
For the initial lateral pile load test, pairs of piles for lateral load tests shall be.
driven. Lateral load test shall be conducted as per IS:2911 (Part—IV) with
horizontal loading increment as specified in Data Sheet-A, stage wise till failure
occurs. Load shall be applied at cutoff level.
21.03.12
Piles specified for pull out test, shall be subjected to pull-out force in equal
increments of not more than 2.5 tonne till the rise exceeds 12 mm. or specified
ultimate pull-out force is reached whichever is earlier. A graph of pull out force
and the corresponding rise of pile top shall be plotted immediately.
21.03.13
If the initial test pile(s) which is (are) load tested fails (fail) to attain the specified
safe structural capacity of piles and if this can be attributed to defective
workmanship and/or negligence on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER
reserves the right to terminate the contract and to award the contract to other
parties. In such an event, all costs of mobilization, installation and testing of test
pile(s) and any other work in connection with the test pile, shall be borne entirely
by the CONTRACTOR.
21.03.15
While executing the pile bore for all test piles, a record of bore log and Standard
Penetration Tests shall be maintained over the continuous length of boring in an
approved format. Subsoil samples and rock cuttings shall be collected and
systematically preserved as per Clause 9.3.2 above.
LOAD TESTS ON WORKING PILES
21.04.00
21.04.01
These tests shall be carried out on piles selected by the CONSULTANT after they
have been cast. Tests to be carried out on working piles shall essentially be
ordinary compression type. The test will be similar to that conducted on initial test
piles, except that the capacity of the pile shall be limited to 1.5 times the safe pile
capacity, the maximum settlement during test loading not exceeding 12 mm
21.04.02
The working pile shall be considered to have stood the test satisfactorily if total
settlement under final test load is not more than 12 mm and net (residual)
settlement after removal of test load not more than 6mm.
21.04.03
If the pile does not satisfy these requirements and if this can be attributed to
defective workmanship or negligence on the part of CONTRACTOR, all costs of
the load test, the cost of providing and installing additional piles, cost of additional
or enlarged pile caps and other work necessitated because of the detective pile,
shall be at the cost of CONTRACTOR.
Attachment 2
Page 130 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
21.05.00
RECORDS OF LOAD TEST RESULTS
21.05.1
Within 48 hours of completion of each test, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish a
copy of all recorded test data to the CONSULTANT. Upon completion of pile, load
tests, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the CONSULTANT at no extra cost with a
pile test report in triplicate and this shall include the following information where
applicable.
a) Identification of working pile/test pile as per Drawing.
b) Coordinate axes of pile, elevation of bottom of pile, cut off level of
pile, type of pile, pile size.
c) Pile Borelog Records
d) SPT results
e) Deviation from designated location/alignment.
f) Jack gauge calibration curves from approved Test House.
g) Tabulation of loads and settlement reading. during the loading and
unloading of the pile.
h) Graphic representation of the test results in the form of time- load –
settlement curves.
i) Graphic analysis of Initial Cyclic test results to separate skin friction
and end bearing as set out in 1S:2911 (Part-IV)
j) Remarks concerning any unusual occurrences during installation or test loading
of the working
26.00.00
INDIRECT INTEGRITY TESTS FOR PILES
26.01.00
The CONSULTANT may desire to get bored cast in situ piles subject to integrity
tests by indirect methods through another agency. The CONTRACTOR shall give
all co-operation in getting such tests conducted. The CONSULTANT reserves the
right to give due weightage and consideration to results of these tests which will
affect the integrity of the installed piles.
21.02.00
Alternately, if indicated in Data Sheet-A and in the Schedule of Quantities. the
CONTRACTOR shall arrange to get such tests conducted, all as specified in Data
Sheet-A.
23.00.00
INSTALLATION RECORDS
23.01.00
The CONTRACTOR shall submit each working day, detailed pile installation
records in duplicate for each pile installed in the enclosed formats. The
CONSULTANT’s piling plans will show all piles serially numbered as per the
piling layout plan. The cost of all labour. materials and services called for herein
shall be included in the CONTRACTOR’S unit rates.
Attachment 2
Page 131 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
23.02.00
A.
10000011 / HB / 11094
The details of the record shall include but not be limited to the list below PILE
INSTALLATION RECORD
BASIC DATA
1. Piling Layout Drawing No.
2. Pile Number
3. Location Coordinates
4. System/Structure
5. Pile Type: Vertical/Raker
6. Pile Nominal Diameter
7. Pile Tip Elevation
8. Pile Cut-off Elevation
9. Ground Level at Pile Location
10. Grad. of Concrete Specified
11. Reinforcement Details(Draw sketch if complex)
12. Safe Capacity of Pile Specified
B.
PILE BORE DATA
1. Date and Time of Start
2. Date and Time of Completion
3. Method of Boring
4. Inner Nominal Diameter of Temporary casing/ Permanent Liner
5. Length of Temporary Casing/Permanent Liner
6. Material of Permanent Liner
7. Method of Jointing Temporary Casing/Permanent Liner
8. Treatment to Permanent Liner
9. Length Bored in Soil
10. Length Bored in Rock (The rock shall be as defined in Data Sheet A or Notes to
Schedule of Quantities for purpose of measurement).
11. Bore Log and Standard Penetration Tests(Draw sketch or refer to separate
sheet)
12. Number of Subsoil Samples/Rock Cuttings collected
13. Ground Water Elevation
14. Any Artesian Conditions
15. Any Bore Collapse and Details
16. Any Loss of Drilling Mud and Detail.
17. Any Other Details or Phenomena Observed.
C.
FLUSHING RECORD
1. Date and Time of Start of Final Post-bore Flushing
2. Date and Time of Completion of Final Post-bore Flushing.
3. Remark. on inspection of Wash of Post-bore flushing.
4. Date and Time of Start of Final Pre—concreting Flushing.
5. Date and Time of Completion of Final Pre-concreting Flushing.
6. Remarks on Inspection of Wash of Pre-concreting Flushing.
Attachment 2
Page 132 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
D.
10000011 / HB / 11094
CONCRETING RECORD
1. Date and Time of Start of Concreting
2. Date and Time of Completion of Concreting
3. Grade of Cement and Name of Manufacturer
4. Date of Manufacture of Cement.
5. Grade of Concrete as Mixed
6. Grade of Concrete Specified
7. Slump of Mixed Concrete at Pile Head
8. Cube Test Results
9. Method of Concrete Placement in Pile Bore
10. Theoretical Volume of Concrete:(Pile Tip to Top of Pile as Cast)
11. Actual Volume of Concrete : (Pile Tip to Top of Pile as Cast)
12. Ratio of Actual Volume to Theoretical Volume of Concrete : (Express as
Percentage)
13. Any Delay. during Concreting and Reasons
14. Overflow Quantity
15. Any Other Details.
24.00.00
CLEAN-UP
24.01.00
All throughout the work, the CONTRACTOR shall take all steps to prevent
spillage of bentonite slurry on the areas outside the immediate vicinity of boring.
The slurry shall not be allowed to flow into any water courses, nallas, site drains or
any public drains.
24.02.00
Any discarded and/or used bentonite shall be removed from the site without any
undue delay.
24.03.00
Upon completion of piling work, all casings equipment, construction tools,
protective coverings and any debris resulting from the work shall be removed
from the premises.
24.04.00
All debris, empty containers, scrap timber etc. shall be removed as directed by the
CONSULTANT/OWNER.
24.05.00
Exposed and finished concrete and dowel surfaces shall be left in a clean condition
satisfactory to the CONSULTANT.
24.06.00
Any pits made for bentonite mixing shall be excavated and back filled with good
earth and consolidated.
Attachment 2
Page 133 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
25.00.00
MEASUREMENTS AND RATES
25.01.00
Rates shall be quoted as indicated for respective items of Schedule of
Quantities.
25.02.00
For the purpose of payment and measurement for vertical and raker piles all
lengths referred to in the Schedule of Quantities and elsewhere shall be measured
as follows
a) For pile boring in soil, the length for boring in soil shall be measured along the
pile axis from the working ground level to the top of rock, if rock is encountered.
The definition of “rock” for this purpose shall be as indicated in Schedule of
quantities which shall be reflected in the Pile Installation Record Sheet and
endorsed by the OWNER/CONSULTANT. If rock is not encountered, the length
for boring in soil shall be measured along the pile axis from working ground level
to the tip of the pile as recorded in the Pile Installation Record Sheets and endorsed
by the OWNER/CONSULTANT.
b) For pile boring in rock alone, the length of chiselling into the rock shall be
measured along the pile axis from top of rock (as defined above) upto the tip of the
pile, all as recorded in the Pile Installation
Record Sheets and endorsed by the OWNER/CONSULTANT.
c) For concreting of pile shaft, the lengths of concreting shall be measured along
the pile axis from pile cut-off level as specified to the tip of the pile as recorded in
the Pile Installation. Record Sheets are endorsed by the OWNER/ CONSULTANT.
Nothing extra will be paid for mandatory concreting above pile cut-off. concrete
overflow, chipping to cut-off level and building up of pile to cut-off level unless
indicated otherwise in Data Sheet-A or Notes to Schedule of Quantities.
25.03.00
The rates for boring in soil and chiselling in rock shall also include for
removing excavated muck from the bores and used and/or discarded bentonite
from within the area of operation upto a maximum distances of 1000m and
disposed off without creating any environmental problems.
25.04.00
Rates for all types of pile load tests shall also account for
excavation/shutteeing/shoring back filling and continuous dewatering to keep the
excavated observation area dry throughout the setting up and test period.
Attachment 2
Page 134 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
DATA SHEET-A
Sl No.
Description
Type of
Cement
Type of
Concrete
Grade of
Concrete
Dia of
piles
envisaged
Capacity
of piles
Type of
Piles
1
Piling Works at
Sulphate
Design
M30
450 Dia
70 T (ver) Bored
KMML
Resisting
mix
3.5T (hor) cast in
EXPANSION
Cement
17.5T
situ
TIO2 PROJECT
43
(uplift)
piles
Quilon , Kerala
grade
conforming to IS2911
Reinforcement
2
High corrosion resistant TMT bars (Fe415 TMT-HCR from SAIL/(Fe415-TISCON-TMT bars
from
TATA) with strength requirement conforming to IS-1786
Geo technical Information
Soil data
3
Soil exploration details of BH , located near
Notes:
1. The Pile diameters and Capacity envisaged are indicative only. The final design
and arriving at the capacity of the piles are the responsibility of the tenderer.
2. Piles shall be designed to take a horizontal load of 5% of its vertical
capacity and an uplift of 25% of its vertical capacity.
3. Design calculations for pile shall be submitted and got approved by
OWNER/ CONSULTANT
4. For additional information regarding soil data if any required, refer clause
number 6.03.00 of piling specification. Cost of additional work of soil investigation
shall be born by the tenderer.
Ground improvement by driving wooden ballies
Wooden ballies shall be of best quality locally available and it shall be approved by
the engineer. The wooden ballies shall be of 100mm diameter, 1.5 meter length and
it shall be kept at a spacing of 0.5M c/c. The ballies shall be made in the form of
truncated cone or a pyramid at driving end and having the end area shall be 25
Sqcm. The length of the truncated cone shall not be less than 150mm.
Driving of wooden ballies
The driving of wooden ballies shall be done manually or mechanically by
dropping hammer over the head. The hammer blows shall be axial to the wooden
posts and the ballies shall not be strained to bring it vertical. Proper care shall be
taken while driving. To prevent splitting and reduce brooming,, ballies shall be
hooped with a suitable MS ring or wrapped with wires. While driving the head
shall be further protected by provision of cushion blocks.
Attachment 2
Page 135 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
ROAD AND PAVEMENTS
1.00.01.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The work contemplated under these specifications refers to earth work in excavation, forming embankments, soling, WBM.
Bituminous Macadam. Wearing course/sealing coat etc. for foad and pavement works.
2.00.01.1
EARTH WORK IN EXCAVATION :
2.01.00
The specifications for “Excavation & Back filling” described earlier shall be
generally followed.
Forming embankment :
2.02.0
2.02.01
The work shall include preliminaries of clearing site, setting out and preparing the
ground and there after forming embankment for the roads, paths etc. With
approved material available form excavations under this contract (excavation paid
separately under respective items) or elsewhere, spreading in layers, watering and
compacting to the required density and lines, curves, grades, chambered cross
section and dimensions shown in the plan or as directed by the owner. When the
embankment is to be laid on hill sides or slopes, the existing slopes are to be
ploughed deeply. If the cross slopes are steeper than 1 in 3, steps with reverse
slope shall be cut into the slopes to give proper hold and seating to the bank as
directed by the Owner. The top 15cm of soil shall be scarified and watered if
directed and compacted to the same density as specified for the embankment
before any material is laid for the embankment work.
2.02.02
Only the approved excavated earth shall be placed in the embankments in
successive horizontal layers not exceeding 200mm, extending to the full width of
the embankment including the slopes at the level of the particular layer and 30 cm,
more on both sides to allow compaction of the full specified section. The extra
loose stuff at the edges shall be trimmed later after completion of the bank work
without extra cost leaving the correct section fully compacted.
2.02.03
Keeping the width of the bank initially less and widening it later by dumping
loose earth on the slopes shall not be permitted as the additional width and slopes
will remain loose and un-compacted. Similar procedure to extend the embankment
by dumping the material longitudinally shall also not be llowed. Each layer of the
embankment shall be watered, levelled and compacted as specified here-in-after,
before the succeeding layers are placed. The surface of the embankment shall at all
times during construction, be maintained in such a manner so as to prevent
ponding. Water to be used shall be free from all armful elements which may cause
efflorescence etc. and approved by the Owner .
Attachment 2
Page 136 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
2.02.04
10000011 / HB / 11094
If the material for embankment contains moisture less than the optimum
moisture, water shall be added in the 100mm, layers of the embankment to
bring moisture uniformly upto requirement. It the excavated material contain
more than required moisture, it shall be allowed to dry until the moisture is
reduced to required extent. If due to the wetness, the moisture content of the
soil cannot be reduced to the appropriate amount by exposure, embankment
work shall be suspended till suitable conditions prevail at no extra
claim/compensation.
2.02.05
When loose layer is levelled manually or mechanically and moistened or dried to a
uniform moisture content suitable for maximum compaction, it shall be compacted
by 8 to 10 tonne power roller or sheep foot rollers or heavy hauling or dozing
equipment to give the specified 90% of the proctor density, if on testing, the
density is found to be less than 90% of the proctor density, the contractor shall do
additional compaction necessary to get the specified density after adding water if
required. If the density cannot be improved by such reasonable efforts, the work
may be accepted as substandard work by the Owner. If he thinks it is not harmful
for the purpose and paid for at a reduce rate. Test shall be made to determine the
maximum density of the material to be used by the proctor method before starting
the work. Density test shall be carried out for the embankment work during the
progress of the work. One set of three core samples for every 1000 sqm. (about
1000 sq.yd.) area of each layer of embankment work shall be taken and tested. The
average density shall not be less than 90% of the proctor density, obtained in the
laboratory.
2.02.06
Arrangement for obtaining the samples and transporting the same to
laboratory, shall be made by the contractor his own cost.
2.02.07
Embankment not accessible to rollers, such as those adjoining bridges, culverts and
other works shall be carried out independently of the main embankments and
shall have the layers placed in 150 mm to 200 mm height and each layer shall to
moistened and thoroughly compacted with mechanical or manual tamper. Before
placing the next layer, the surface of the under layer shall be moistened and
scarified so as to provide a satisfactory bond with the next layer.
2.02.08
The embankment shall be finished and dressed smooth and even, in
conformity with the alignment levels and cross section, and dimensions shown on
the drawing. On curves, section shall be provided with super elevation and
increased width, is shown on the plans as directed by the Consultant.
Attachment 2
Page 137 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
2.02.09
Joining of old and new embankment shall be done by stepping in and overall slope
of about 1 to 5.
2.02.10
The contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the embankment work in
satisfactory conditions at his own cost till finally accepted including making good
any damage.
3.00.00
SUB GRADE :
3.01.00
Preparation of Sub-grade : The surface of the formation for a width of subbase
which shall be as per drg. shall first be cut to a depth equal to the combine depth of
sub-base and surface courses below the proposed finished level (due allowance
being made for consolidation). It shall then be cleaned of all foreign substances.
Any ruts or soft yielding patches that appear due to improper drainage conditions,
traffic hauling or from any other cause, shall be corrected and the sub-grade
dressed off parallel to finished profile.
3.02.00
Consolidation: The sub grade shall be consolidated with a power road roller of 8 to
12 tonnes. The roller shall run over the sub grade till the soil is evenly and densely
consolidated and behaves as an elastic mass (the roller shall pass a minimum of 5
runs on the sub grade). All undulations in the surface that develop due to rolling
shall be made good with fresh material or quarry spoils as the case may be and the
sub grade is re-rolled.
3.03.00
Surface Regularity : The finished surface shall be uniform and conform to the lines,
grades and typical cross sections shown in the drawings. When tested with the
template and straight edge, the variation shall be within the tolerances specified in
the Table below :
Permissible tolerances of surface regularity
Longitudinal profile
Maximum permissible undulation
when
measured with a 3 metre straight
edge
Cross profile
Maximum permissible variation from
specified profile when measured with a
camber-template
15 mm
24 mm
3.04.00
Where the surface irregularity of the sub-grade falls outside the specified
tolerances, the contractor shall be liable to rectify these with fresh material or
quarry spoils as the case may be, and the sub grade rerolled to the satisfaction of
the Consultant.
Attachment 2
Page 138 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
4.00.00
SUB-BASES :
4.01.00
Water bound Macadam Sub-base with stone aggregate : Stone aggregate of size 90
mm shall be used. This consists of clean crushed coarse aggregate mechanically
interlocked by rolling using power road roller of 8 to 10 t and voids thereof filled
with screening and blinding material with the assistance of water, laid on a
prepared sub grade/ sub base.
4.01.01
Quantities of Materials : Quantities of coarse aggregate, screening and
blinding material required to be stacked for 100mm approximate compacted
thickness of WBM sub-base course for 10 sqm. Shall be as per table given below:
Coarse Aggregate
Classification Size range
Grading-1
90mm to
Net Qty
1.2 Cum.
to .28Cum
Stone screenings
Grading/Classification
and size
Type A 13.2mm
Net Qty
0.27Cum
to
Blinding
material
0.08 Cum
to
0.10 Cum
NOTE :
Net Quantity = Loose quantity measured in stack minus 7.5%
4.01.02
Preparation of foundation : In the case of an existing unsurfaced road, where new
materials is to be laid, the surface shall be scarified and reshaped to the required
grade, chambered shape as necessary. Weak places shall be strengthened,
corrugations removed and depressions and pot holes made good with suitable
materials, before spreading the aggregate for WBM.
4.01.03
Spreading Aggregate : The coarse aggregate shall be spread uniformly and evenly
upon the prepared base in required quantities with a twisting motion to avoid
segregation. In no case shall these be dumped in heaps directly on the area where
these are to be laid nor shall their hauling over a partly completed base be
permitted. The aggregates shall be spread uniformly to proper profile by using
templates placed across the road six meters part. Where specified, approved
mechanical devices may be used to spread the aggregates uniformly. The levels
along the longitudinal direction upon which the metal shall be laid, shall be first
obtained at site to the satisfaction of Owner and these shall be adhered to .
4.01.04
The surface of the aggregate spread shall be carefully trued up and all high spots
by removing or adding aggregate as may be required.
Attachment 2
Page 139 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
4.01.05
The WBM sub-base shall be normally constructed in layers of 115 mm
compacted thickness. No segregation of large or fine particles shall be allowed and
the coarse aggregate as spread shall be of uniform gradation with no pockets of
fine material.
4.01.06
The coarse aggregate shall normally not be spread in lengths exceeding three days
average work ahead of the rolling and blending of the proceeding section.
4.02.0
Rolling :
4.02.01
Immediately following the spreading of the coarse aggregate, it shall be compacted
to the full width by rolling with either a three-wheel power roller of 8 to 10t
capacity or an equivalent vibratory roller. Initially, light rolling is to be done which
shall be discontinued when the aggregate is partially compacted with sufficient
void space in then to permit application of screenings.
4.02.02
The rolling shall begin from the edges with the roller running forward and
backward and adding the screenings simultaneously until the edges have been
firmly compacted. The roller shall then progress gradually from the edges to the
centre paralled to the centre line of the road and overlapping uniformly each
preceding rear wheel track by one half width and shall continue until the entire
area of the course has been rolled by the rear wheel. Rolling shall continue until
the road metal is thoroughly keyed with no creeping of metal ahead of the roller.
Only slight sprinkling of water may be done during rolling, if required. On super
cleaved curves, the rolling shall proceed from the lower edge and progress
gradually continuing towards the upper edge of the pavement.
4.02.03
Rolling shall not be done when the sub-grade is soft or yielding or when the
rolling causes a wave like motion in the sub-base of sub-grade. When rolling
develops irregularities that exceed 12mm when tested with a three metre straight
edge, the irregular surface shall be loosened and then aggregate added to or
removed from it as required and the area rolled until it gives a uniform surface
conforming to the desired cross-section and grade. The surface shall also be
checked transversely by template for chambered any irregularities corrected in the
manner descried above. In no case shall the use of screenings to made up
depressions be permitted.
Application of screening :
After the coarse aggregate has been lightly rolled to the required true surface,
screenings shall be applied gradually over the surface to completely fill the
interstices. Dry rolling shall be continued while the screening are being spread so
that the jarring effect of the roller causes them to settle into the voids of the coarse
aggregates. The screenings shall not be dumped in piles on the coarse aggregate
but shall be spread uniformly in successive thin layers either by the spreading
motion of the hand shovels or a mechanical spreader.
4.03.0
4.03.01
Attachment 2
Page 140 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
4.03.02
The screening shall be applied at a slow rate (in three or more applications) so as to
ensure filling of all voids. Rolling and brooming shall continue with the spreading
of the screenings. Either mechanical brooms or hand brooms or both may be used.
In no case shall the screenings be applied, so fast and thick as to form cakes, ridges
on the surface making the filling of voids difficult, or to prevent the direct bearing
of the roller on the coarse aggregates. The spreading, rolling and brooming of
screenings shall be performed on sections which can be completed within one
day’s operation and shall continue until no more screening can be forced into the
voids of the coarse aggregate. Damp and wet screenings shall not be used under
any circumstances.
4.04.00
Sprinkling and Grouting :
4.04.01
After spreading the screening and rolling, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled
with water, swept and rolled. Hand brooms shall be used to sweep the wet
screening into the voids and to distribute them evenly. The sprinkling, sweeping
and rolling operations shall be continued and additional screenings applied where
necessary until the coarse aggregates are well bonded and firmly set for the entire
depth and until a grout has been formed of screenings and wa ter that will fill all
voids and form a wave of grout ahead of the wheels of the roller. The quantity of
water to be used during the construction shall not be excessive so as to cause
damage to the sub-base or sub-grade.
4.05.00
Application of Blinding Material :
4.05.01
After the application of screenings and rolling, a suitable blinding material shall be
applied at a uniform and slow rate in two or more successive thin layers. After
each application of blinding material, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with
water and the resulting slurry swept-in with hand brooms or mechanical brooms
or both so as to fill the voids properly. The surface shall then be rolled by a 8-10 t
roller, water being applied to the wheels in order to wash down the blinding
material that may get stuck to the wheels. The spreading of blinding material,
sprinkling of water, sweeping with brooms and rolling shall continue until the
slurry that is formed well, after filling the voids form a wave ahead of wheels of
the moving roller.
Attachment 2
Page 141 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
4.06.00
Setting and Drying :
4.06.01
After final compaction of the course, the road shall be allowed to cure
overnight. Next morning defective spots shall be filled with screenings or blinding
material, lightly sprinkled with water, if necessary and rolled. No traffic shall be
allowed till the macadam sets.
Surface Evenness:
4.07.00
4.07.01
The surface evenness of completed WBM sub-base in the longitudinal and
transverse directions shall be as specified in the table given below:
Cross profile
of Longitudinal profile
Size
coarse
aggregates
45-90 mm
Maximum permissible
Maximum
permissible
undulation when measured variation from specified profile
with a 3 metre straight edge
when measured with a camber
template
15 mm
12 mm
The longitudinal profile shall be checked with a 3M long straight edge at the
middle of each traffic lane along a line parallel to the centre line of the road.
The transverse profile shall be checked with a series of three chamber boards
at intervals of 10M.
4.08.00
Rectification of Defective Construction : Where the surface irregularity of the WBM
sub-base course exceeds the tolerances specified in the table given above or where
the course is otherwise defective due to sub-grade soil mixing with the aggregates,
the layer to its full thickness shall be scarified over theaffected area, reshaped with
added material or removed and replaced with fresh material as applicable, and
recompacted. The area treated in the aforesaid manner shall not be less than 10
sqm. In no case shall depressions be filled up with screenings and blinding
material.
5.00.00
RUBBLE SOLING :
5.01.00
Rubble soling for road work including foot paths, culverts, side drains etc. shall be
carried out as specified here-in before 3.3 for rubble stone soling, as far as they are
applicable, with the following additions.
Attachment 2
Page 142 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
5.02.00
Subgrade for soling shall be prepared by cleaning of all foreign substances
including rank vegetation, if any, Any ruls or soft yielding places that appear due
to improper drainage conditions, traffic, hauling or from any other cause shall be
corrected by filling/cutting upto 150 mm and compacted and the Subgrade
dressed off parallel to the finished profile and the same shall beapproved by the
Consultant, before laying of soling. Soling shall be lai in regular lines and
staggered joints. The stones shall be laid as closely as possible and packed well.
The stones shall be so laid as to have their bases and the target area resting on the
Subgrade and in contact with each other.
5.03.00
Soling shall be laid to proper gradient and chamber which shall be checked
frequently to ensure accuracy. Rolling shall then be carried out by a 8 to 10 t power
roller and soling consolidated properly shall be lightly sprinkled juring rolling, if
ordered by the Consultant.
5.04.00
The surface thus prepared shall first be passed by the Consultant, after which
40mm to 50mm thick layer of selected hard murrum available from excavation
shall be spread over the soling as directed by the Consultant, and rolled again such
that the hard murrum gets into the interstices, It shall, however, be ensured that a
thin layer of murrum/grit shall remain on the finished surface of soling.
5.05.00
The area of soling actually done of specified consolidated thickness limiting to the
dimensions as per drg. shall be measured in square metre upto two decimal places.
6.00.00
WATER BOUND MACADAM :
6.01.00
Metal : Metal required for water bound macadam surfacing shall broken from the
first sort rubble. The rubble shall be broken to required size by the contractor at his
own cost. However, the metal required for water bound macadam shall conform to
IRC specification in all respects. It shall be hard, sound, trap stone metal free from
decay and weathering and obtained from approved quarries, and shall be of 50
mm nominal size.
Collection of metal : Metal shall be of first sort black trap stone and shall be
collected in stacks on level ground and stacked on the sides of the roads as
directed. The metal shall be free from all earth, rubbish and vegetable matter and
graded before stacking and closely packed in stacks. The metal supplied by the
contractor shall be arranged in stacks for measurement. No deductions will be
made for voids. The size of stack shall be 1m wide at top 2.2m wide at bottom and
60m high. The length shall be as directed by the Owner. The contractor shall
provide the templates required to ensure, compliance with size of stack stipulated.
6.02.00
Attachment 2
Page 143 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
6.03.00
Supply of Murrum : The contractor shall be permitted to excavate in the selected
areas in the township/site of work, as approved by the Consultant, for collection
of murrum. The excavation shall be done by the contractor to correct line and level,
transport and stack the same at site of work as directed by the Owner. Alternately,
the contractor will be permitted to bring from outside, approved graded hard
murrum 10mm, down to dust (but not silt) as directed by the Owner and shall also
be collected in stacks on level ground along side of the road.
6.04.00
Laying and preparation of water bound macadam surface :
6.04.01
After preparation of the existing surface as specified above, 50mm, size metal
collected in stacks shall be spread to uniform thickness over the prepared surface
and consolidated to 75mm thickness as specified here in after.
6.04.02
Templates properly made of full width and gauge or templates fitted with central
plumb to each of edge fixed with it must be used. The depth of the plank forming
the gauge shall be the thickness of the metal layer in loose state so that when the
metal has been properly spread, the gauges are buried just flush with the surface.
The intermediate work shall be tested with cord stretched between the gauge.
Three templates shall be provided and used with a distance of about 7.5m between
each but not exceeding 15m. A spirit level shall invariably be used with the
templates to ensure that the edges of metalling are truly levelled. The metal shall
be spread and rolled with to 10t power roller until well compacted and there is no
appreciable movement (in the metal) when walked upon, or no appreciable wave
in front of the advancing roller, Rolling shall be done by roller perfectly, by a 8 to
10 t power roller, till proper internal packing of adjacent pieces of stones has been
achieved. Excessive dry rolling shall be avoided.
6.04.03
Rolling shall commence from the edge to the centre of the road. In case of super
elevated curve, rolling shall commence from the inside edge of the center and
progress towards the outside edge. Where the gradient is steeper than 1 in 60, the
roller shall run up grade, i.e. rolling shall be started from lower level to upward
direction for the 1St rolling.
Attachment 2
Page 144 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
6.04.04
While rolling the surface in two or more parts, a strip of about 230mm to 300mm
along the predetermined cross section shall be left unrolled while consolidating the
first half. This shall be properly jointed when the metal is being spread on the
second half and consolidated with it. Care must be taken to avoid the occurrence
of a continuous longitudinal furrow along cross section of the road. Full width of
road will be rolled at a time.
6.04.05
The metalling shall be moderately kept saturated and rolling continued until
consolidation is completed. Just enough watering shall be done so as to flush the
metal slurry into the interstices. Care shall be taken to avoid excess water softening
the subsoil. The full consolidation stage shall be tested by (a) putting a piece of
metal about the size of wall not on the surface and roller passed over it. If it is
crushed the surface shall be deemed as well consolidated (b) there shall be no
creeping of stone ahead of the roller.
6.05.06
Until the above conditions are satisfied, no blinding or surfacing materials shall be
put on the surface. No rolling shall be done where signs of metal crushing are
noticed or rolling causes wave like motions in the base course of well compacted.
Before starting rolling, the metal shall be dressed accurately to chamber. No fresh
metal shall be added once dry consolidation has commenced. The part of the road
must be fully racked up so that the metal is thoroughly incorporated into the body
of road.
6.06.00
Blinding Course : When the required consolidation has been completed, the
blinding material of approved graded murrum/stone grit and dust (unscreened)
as specified shall be spread over the surface and brushed backwards and forwards
to fill in the surface voids and rolling and watering continued to such an extent
that the blinding materials are formed into a slurry and is grouted into the
interstices. After the road has been fully consolidated, the surface shall be covered
with 12mm layer of murrum/stone grit and dust (unscreened) and road opened to
traffic after 4 days. The road shall be kept watered for 14 days or such other period
as specified by the Owner. Where tracks are likely to be formed by the traffic on
the road, barriers such as tree branches etc. shall be put to divert the traffic. After
15 days, light watering and rolling shall be done. For joints across the road, the end
of each layer shall be given a flat slope and well consolidated together and hump
formation must be avoided.
Damages to the Owner’s Property : Any damage to the departs property due to
negligence of the contractor while executing the work shall be made good to the
original conditions at his own cost.
6.07.00
Attachment 2
Page145 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
7.00.00
Bituminous macadam and bituminous concrete surfacing for road
(general) :
7.00.01
The work covered under these specifications provides for bituminous
treatment for roads consisting of providing 38 mm thick bituminous macadam and
12mm thick seal coat or bituminous concrete of thickness as specified in item in the
schedule of quantities.
7.00.02
The contractor shall make at his own cost, all the arrangements for controlling the
traffic during the execution of the work. All arrangements such as proper
barricading of road, diversion of road if necessary, red and green flags during the
day, red lights at nights shall be made by the contractor at his own cost to control
and safeguard the traffic.
7.01.00
Bituminous Macadam over water bound Macadam :
7.01.01
Preparation of existing water bound macadam surface :
a) The existing water bound macadam surface shall be brushed, cleaned properly
with wire brushes and coir brooms, so as to free from all loose materials, murrum,
earth, silt and caked mud etc. The surface shall then be dusted clean with gunny
bags etc. if during the process of cleaning the sub grade (water abound macadam),
soft spots and packets, hollows etc. are found, such spots/pockets will be filled
with approved precoated bituminous chips, consolidated and finished to proper
level, rolled with power roller if necessary. The potholes shall be excavated
properly in a rectangular or rhomboidal shape with vertical edges. The bottom and
sides shall be cleaned as stated above. The sides and bottom shall then be
thoroughly painted with heated 30/40 penetration bitumen. The pot holes shall
thereafter be filled with premixed bituminous chips so that after thorough tamping
and rolling, the surface is flush with surrounding road surface all as directed by
the Owner. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that the
Subgrade is even and is finished to camber and slope as shown on the drgs. or as
directed by the Consultant.
b) The surface of the Subgrade shall be checked for its trenches by means of the
scratch template resting on side forms having scratch points placed at not less than
200mm. apart and set to the exact profile of the base course. The template shall be
drawn along the forms at right angles to the road.
Attachment 2
Page 146 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
c) Unevenness of the surfaces as indicated by the scratch points shall not exceed
10mm in 30m. The area of depression shall then be painted or sprayed with 30/40
penetration bitumen at the rate of 0.75 kg per sqm and the levelling course applied
by hand or machine to grade and chamer and rolled. If the depressions are deeper
than 50mm, the levelling course shall be applied in two or more layers and rolled
as directed by the Consultant.
d) The prepared surface shall be closed to traffic and maintained fully clean and no
asphalting work shall be started unless this prepared surface is approved by the
Consultant.
7.01.02
MATERIALS
Representative samples of materials proposed to be used shall be submit
ted
to the Owner and got approved. No material shall be used unless it is approved by
the Consultant.
7.01.03
HOT MIXED HOT LAID BITUMINOUS MACADAM:
a) Coarse Aggregate:
i) It shall consist of crushed hard trap stone metal, free crom coatings of clay, silt
and any objectionable material. Metal brought by contractor for different items of
work shall strictly conform to I R C specifications in all respects. The aggregate
shall be obtained by crushing approved stones of specified type in mechanical
crusher and shall be hard, close grained, sound trap stone metal, free from decay
and weathering and obtained from approved quarries.
ii) Metal shall be collected in stacks on level ground and neatly stacked at site of
mixing. The metal shall be free from all earth, rubbish, vegetation and other
foreign matter and graded before stacking and closely packed in stacks.
iii) Tests considered necessary shall be carried out in an approved laboratory when
the Owner considers the quality to be doubtful or there is dispute about the
quality. The cost of testing shall be borne by the contractor.
iv) Aggregate grading : The requirements of base course shall be as under:
B.S. Sieve Designation
32 mm (about 1.25”)
20 mm (about ¾”)
12 mm (about ½”)
6 mm (about ¼”)
No. 10
No. 200
Equivalent I S Sieves
40MM (1.5”)
20 mm
12.5 mm
6.3 mm
1.7 mm
75 micron
Passing percentage
100
50 – 100
30 – 60
18 – 30
10 – 20
0–5
Attachment 2
Page 147 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
v) The aggregate/chips shall be entirely dry at the time of mixing.
b) Bitumen : Bitumen to be used shall conform to I.S. 73.1992 for paving bitumen,
with 30/40 penetration and shall be from approved manufacturers.The contractor
on demand by the Consultant, obtain and furnish a laboratory test certificate to the
effect that the material conforming to the requirement of the specified grade, to the
satisfaction of the Owner. Bitumen (30/40 penetration) content 3.7% to 4.7% by
weight of the total mix, shall be used in the mixture.
c) Tack Coat : Bitumen of the same grade as that used for premix shall be heated to
a temperature of 1630 C to 1770C (3250 F to 3500 F) in a bitumen boiler and the hot
bitumen shall be applied evenly to the thoroughly cleaned and prepared road
surface (as specified here-in-before)@ 7.5 kg per 10 sqm leaving no part of the
surface unpainted. Application shall be done by a mechanical pressure sprayer or
if permitted, by perforated pouring cans. The tack coat shall be applied just before
the macadam is laid. Application of tack coat shall be only slightly in advance of
laying premixed chips. In case of surface already asphalted, application of tack
coat is not necessary.
d) Premixing Chips :
i) The bitumen shall be heated to 1630 C to 1770 C (3250 F to 3500 F) in boiler The
aggregate of the approved grading or as decided by the preliminary shall be dried
and heated in an aggregate drier to a temperature of 1490 C to 1770 C (3000 F to 3500
F) and fed into a twin shaft peddle type mixer at a temperature not less than 1490
C (about 3000 F). The bitumen, the approved aggregate and the filler shall be
measured separately and accurately to the proportions in which they are to be
mixed and mixed intimately till all the particles are completely coated with
bitumen. Asphalt/bituminous mixing plant proposed to be used by the contractor
for the preparation of Asphalt/bituminous mixing shall conform to all of the
requirements of the job, which shall produce uniform mixtures of the required
quality, an got approved by the Owner before mixing.
ii) The temperature of the premix bituminous macadam when leaving the mixer
shall not be less than 1300 C (about 2800 F) and it shall not be
less than 1210 C (about 2500F) at the time of laying.
Attachment 2
Page 148 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
iii) Bituminous macadam shall be transported to site of work in suitable tipping
vehicle properly insulated and covered with canvas or other suitable materials to
protect the mixture from weather conditions and to retain the heat. The road
surface shall be suitably marked to ensure correct and uniform application. Width
of macadam to be laid shall be slightly more (not exceeding 50 mm on each side)
than the required carriage way as per drawing. Excess on either side shall be
neatly cut after full compaction to get final width of carriage way as per drawing.
The premixed bituminous macadam shall be laid by a mechanical self powdered
spreader and compactor and finished to correct line, level, & final consolidation
done by means of power roller not less than 10 tonne. Any irregularities shall be
corrected during rolling.
e) Compaction : The base bituminous macadam course shall be compacted
thoroughly and evenly with 10 to 12 tonne power roller immediately after it is laid.
Compacted thickness shall be as specified in schedule of quantity.
7.01.04
The surface shall be checked for correct grade during and after rolling. Any
irregularities shall be corrected by adding precoated chips or removing the
surplus. The disturbed surface shall be well compacted again. If necessary the
roller wheel shall be coated with oil to prevent the coated chip from sticking to the
wheels. Rolling shall be continued till no wheel marks are left on the surface. The
speed of the roller shall be sufficiently slow to prevent any pushing under the
wheels.
8.00.00
HOT MIXED HOT LAID BITUMINOUS CONCRETE WEARING
COURSE (SEAL COAT)
8.01.00
Bituminous concrete : Shall consist of mixture of mineral aggregate, sand and filler,
graded to fill the voids, mixed with bitumen binder to obtain the maximum
stability. It shall be spread and compacted on a prepared bituminous macadam
base in conformity with lines, grades and cross section shown in the drawings. The
aggregate shall be preheated the temperature specified for the bitumen and the
mixture shall be prepared and laid hot.
8.02.00
Coarse Aggregate :
Attachment 2
Page 149 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
8.02.01
The coarse aggregate brought by contractor shall be I.R.C. hard black trap, crushed
in mechanical crushers and shall be clean, strong, tough, dense, close grained,
angular but not flaky, and free from soft, decayed, weathered portion, coating of
dust, dirt or other objectionable matter. Maximum size of the aggregate shall be
suitable for the thickness of the seal coat (12mm/15mm or as specified).
8.02.02
The aggregate grading composition and characteristics of surface (wearing course
mix) shall conform to standard code of practice. The mix shall satisfy the following
requirements:
Bitumen:
7.25 (+/-) 0.25% by weight of total mix.
Voids of air in total mix
2% by weight of mix and 4% by volume
Specific gravity
Marshall stability
Flow
Water absorption
Not less than 2.3
453.6 kg (1000 lb) minimum
1020
0.50%
8.03.00
Fine Aggregate : The fine aggregate shall be clean, natural , river bank or pit sand
or quarry sand produced in a crushing plant and satisfying the requirement of the
grading of aggregate for the bituminous concrete as stated above or as determined
by the preliminary tests.
8.04.00
Filler : The filler shall be dry and clean lime stone powder hydrated lime having
calcium oxide content of not less than 60% both passing B S sieve No.8. It shall be
free from lumps and loosely bonded aggregation. When tested by laboratory
sieves. 100% shall pass through B S sieve No. 14, 80% shall pass through B S sieve
No.8 . Fillers shall be added to the aggregate to give the above grading determined
by preliminary tests.
8.05.00
Bitumen : Bitumen shall be of 30/40 penetration or such other grade specified by
the Owner and shall conform IS 73-1961The contrcator shall indicate the exact
grading, bitumen content, voids, specific gravity etc which they propose to adopt
for type to treatment offered by them.
8.06.00
Preparation of Base : Dirt, dust and other foreign materials if accumulated shall be
cleared off leaving the surface entirely clean. The prepared surface shall be closed
to traffic and so maintained fully clean till the seal coat is applied.
8.07.00
Mixing and Laying Wearing Course :
Attachment 2
Page 150 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
8.07.01
Grade 30/40 bitumen shall be heated to a temperature of 1630 C to 1770 C (3250 F to
3500 F) in a boiler. The aggregate of the suitable approved grading or as decided by
preliminary tests, shall be dried and heated in an aggregate drier to a temperature
of 1490 C to 1770 C (3000 F to 3500 F) and fed into a twin shaft peddle type mixer at a
temperature not less than 1490 C (3000 F). The bitumen, the aggregate and the filler
shall be measured separately and accurately to the proportions in which they are
to be mixed and mixed intimately till all the particles are completely coated with
bitumen. The quantities of aggregate, bitumen and the filler shall be such as to
obtain the percentage of each as specified above or decided after tests. Continues
batching and mixing plant shall be used. Asphalt/bituminous mixing plant
proposed to be used by the contractor for the preparation of asphalt/bituminous
mixes shall conform to all of the requirements of the job, which shall produce
uniform mixtures of the required quality.
8.07.02
The temperature of bituminous concrete when leaving the mixer shall not be less
than 1380 C (2800F) and it shall not be less than 1210 C (2500 F) at the time of laying.
8.07.03
The bituminous concrete shall be transported to the site of work in suitable tipping
vehicles properly insulated and covered with canvas or other suitable materials to
protect the mixture from weather conditions and to retain the heat.
8.07.04
The mixture shall be spread with mechanical self powered spreader. The
bituminous concrete shall be laid to the specified line, curve, grade camber Any
irregularities shall be corrected immediately before rolling is started. Before laying
the mixture, the faces of the joints shall be painted with a uniform coating of hot
bitumen. The bituminous concrete shall be laid to such loose depth as to give a
compacted layer of specified thickness as per item in the schedule of quantities.
8.08.00
Compaction : The bituminous concrete layers shall then be allowed to cool
sufficiently such that it does not spread under wheel load of 10/12 tonne power
roller. The compaction shall be done by the roller till no wheel mark are left on the
surface and no further compaction is possible. The road shall be opened to traffic
on cooling of the concrete to the atmospheric temperature or after a lapse of 24 to
40 hr after laying.
Attachment 2
Page 151 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
9.00.00
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BITUMEN MACADAM & SEAL COAT
9.01.00
Testing : The contractor shall have a well equipped testing laboratory with a
competent laboratory staff. Daily test (not less than two specimen per day) shall be
made by them on the bituminous mixture produced to ensure compliance with
these specification and copy of the test results duly signed by the competent
authority shall be submitted to Owner for record. Tests shall include water
absorption, stability, filler content etc. The contractor shall give all facilities at all
items to the Owner or his representative to inspect the work or testing done by
him 9.02.00 Weighing : Each lorry leaving the plant must be weighed on a weigh
bridge in the presence of the representative of the Owner and a challan must be
issued along with the lorry in duplicate showing the weight of the material loaded
in the lorry. As and when required, the said lorries shall also be weighed at the
Owners weigh bridge or any other weigh bridge approved by the Owner to check
the tonnage of the material stated on the challans. In case of short fall, the same
shall be made good by the contractor without extra cost.
9.03.00
Testing Surface : The completed surface when ready for acceptance shall be
thoroughly compacted, smooth, true to line, grade, camber and free from
irregularities when tested by means of a straight edge of 3m long, laid on the
finished surface parallel with the centre line of the road, the surface shall in no
place vary more than 6mm from the working edge.
9.04.00
Maintenance : It will be binding on the contractor to maintain the road free of cost
for a period of 5 (five) years from the date of completion of the work.
Security deposit will be released as per clause 17 of general conditions of contract
against a guarantee bond for the maintenance period of five years against the
following defects.
9.05.00
The defects in the bituminous paving which the contractor may be called upon to
rectify are of the following type
a) Deformation of bituminous pavement resulting in waves or ruts
b) Cracking of bituminous pavement resulting in admission of water to the subgrade and the deterioration of the bituminous pavement adjoining the cracks.
c) Disintegration/Revealing of bitumen pavement resulting in the formation of pot
holes.
d) Polishing of the bitumen pavement under traffic resulting in a
surface on which the vehicles are liable to skid.
Attachment 2
Page 152 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
9.06.00
Defects in areas in bitumen pavement under guarantee shall, when they exceed the
limits specified below, be remedied immediately by the contractor. The limiting
valves of the defects shall be the following
a) Deformation : 25mm in 3 m
b) Cracks : 1500 mm in lengths and 3mm in width
c) Disintegrated revealed patches : 2.00 sqm and/ or 12mm in depth.
10.00.00
IS / IRC CODES
IRC:37 Guidelines for design of flexible pavements
IRC:73 Geometric design of roads
IS – 73 Paving Bitumen
IS – 702 Industrial Bitumen
IS – 1201 Methods of testing tar and Bituminous materials
Attachment 2
Page 153 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
TECHNICAL SPEC. FOR WOODEN WORK, CARPENTRY & JOINERY
1.00.00
SCOPE
This shall include supply, fitting and fixing of timber frames to doors and windows
with M.S. Holdiasts, panelled or flush doors, windows, shutters, etc. as shown in
drawings, including a prime coat of approved paint, varnish or fixing of plastic
laminate where called for. This shall also include the supply and fixing of all hardware
and fixtures.
2.00.00
2.01.00
CODES AND STANDARDS
editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions. A complete set of
all these documents shall generally be available at site, with the Contractor.
2.02.00
2.03.00
IS: 204 (Part 1991
1)
IS: 204 (Part 1992
2)
IS: 205
1992
IS: 206
1992
IS: 207
1964
IS: 208
1996
IS: 281
1991
IS: 287
1993
IS: 303
IS: 362
IS: 363
IS: 364
IS: 401
IS: 451
IS: 452
IS: 453
IS: 723
1989
1991
1993
1993
2001
1999
1973
1993
1972
IS: 729
1979
Specification for Tower bolts- ferrous metals ; Part
– 1992 : Non ferrous metals)
Specification for Tower bolts- Non ferrous metals)
Specification for Non-ferreus metal butt hinges
Specification for Tee and strap binges
Specification for Gate and shutter hooks and eyes
Specification for Door handles
Specification for Mild steel sliding door bolts for
use with padlocks.
Recommendation for maximum permissible
moisture contents of timber used for different
purposes.
Specification for Plywood for general purpose
Specification for Parliament hinges
Specification for Hasps and staples
Fanlight catch
Code of practice for preservation of timber
Technical supply condition for wood screws
Specification for Door springs, rail-tail type
Specification for Double acting spring hinges
Specification for Steel counter sunk head wire
nails
Specification for Drawer locks, cup board locks,
and box locks
Attachment 2
Page 154 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
IS: 848
1974
IS: 851
1978
IS: 852
1994
IS: 1019
IS: 1141
IS: 1200 (Pt.
XIV)
IS: 1200 (Pt.
XXI)
IS: 1328
IS: 1341
IS: 1378
IS: 1658
IS: 1659
IS: 1823
IS: 1868
IS: 1911
IS : 2191
(Part 1)
1974
1993
1984
1973
1996
1992
1987
1977
1990
1980
1996
1967
1983
IS : 2191 1983
(Part 2)
IS: 2202 (Part 1999
1)
IS: 2202 (Part 1983
2
IS: 2209
1976
IS:
2380 1977
(parts 1 to
21)
IS: 2380 (Part 1981
22)
IS: 2380 (Part 1981
23)
IS: 2681
1993
10000011 / HB / 11094
Specification for Synthetic resin adhesives for
plywood (Phenolic & Aminoplastic)
Specification for Synthetic resin adhesive for
construction work (non structural ) in wood
Specifications for animal glue for general wood
working purposes.
Specification for Rim latches
Code of practice for seasoning of timber
Method of measurement of Building and Civil
Engineering works - Glazing
Method of measurement of Building and Civil
Engineering works- Wood work and joinery
Specification for Veneered decorative plywood
Specification for Steel Butt hinges
Specification for Oxidized copper finishes
Specification for Fiber hard board
Specification for Block boards
Specification for Floor door stoppers
Specification for Anodic coating on Aluminium
Schedule of unit weights of building materials
Specification for wooden flush door shutters
(cellular & hollow core type) – plywood face
panels
Specification for wooden flush door shutters
(cellular & hollow core type) - Particle board face
panels and hard board
Specification for wooden flush door shuters (solid
core type) – plywood face panels
Specification for wooden flush door shuters (solid
core type) – Particle board face panels and hard
board
Specification for Mortise locks (vertical type)
Method of test for wood particle board and boards
from lignocellulosic materials
from lignocellulosic materials – Determination of
surface gulability
from lignocellulosic materials – Vibration test for
particle boards
Non ferrous metal sliding door bolts (aldrops) for
use with pad locks
Attachment 2
Page 155 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
IS: 2835
IS: 3087
IS: 3097
10000011 / HB / 11094
1987 Flat transparent sheet glass (3rd Revision).
1985 Specification for wood particle board
(medium density) for general engineering
purpose
1980 Specification for Veneered particle boards (1st
Revision)
1980 Method of test for vulcanized rubbers Hardness
IS: 3400-(Pt.IV)
1987 Method of test for vulcanized rubbers Accelerated aging
IS: 3400-(Pt.IX)
1978 Method of test for vulcanized rubbers Relative density and density
IS: 3564
1986 Specification for Door closers (Hydraulically
regulated)
IS: 3618
1966 Phosphate treatment of iron and steel for
protection against corrosion
IS: 3813
1967 Specification for ‘C’ hooks for use with
swivels
IS: 3818
1992 Specification for Continuous (Piano) hinges
IS: 3847
1992 Specification for Mortise night latches
IS: 4020 (Part 1 to 16) 1998 Methods of tests for wooden flush Doors
(Type tests)
IS: 4021
1995 Specification for Timber door, window and
ventilator frames
IS: 4827
1983 Electroplated coating of nickel and
chromium on copper and copper alloys
IS: 4948
2002 Specification for Welded steel wire fabric for
general use.
IS: 4992
1975 Specification for Door Handles for mortise
locks (vertical type)
IS: 5187
1972 Specification for Flush bolts
IS: 5523
1983 Method of testing anodic coating on
aluminium & its alloys.
IS: 5930
1970 Specification for Mortise latch (vertical types)
IS: 6318
1971 Specification for Plastic window stays &
fasteners
IS: 6607
1972 Specification for Rebated mortise locks
(vertical type)
IS: 6760
1972 Specification for Slotted countersunk head
wood screws
IS: 7196
1974 Specification for Hold fasts
IS: 7197
1974 Specification for Double action floor springs
(without oil check) for heavy doors
IS: 7534
1985 Specification for Mild steel bolts with holes
for padlocks
IS: 3400-(Pt.II)
Attachment 2
Page 156 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
3.00.00
3.01.00
3.01.01
MATERIALS
Timber
Unless otherwise specified, all timber shall be best quality well seasoned Grade I
teakwood free from large or loose knots, cracks or other defects. Where specified,
timber shall be treated with approved wood preservative before use. Before starting
the carpenter’s work, the Contractor shall have the rough timber approved by the
Engineer. Size of doors and windows frame shall be 100 x 60mm.3.02.00 Laminated
Plastic Sheets
3.02.01
All laminated plastic sheets shall be minimum 1.5 mm thick and shall be ‘Formica’,
‘Decolam’ or approved equivalent make. The colour, pattern, finish and texture shall
be approved by the Engineer and the bulk supply procured in sheet sizes which will
ensure the least number of joints in one surface.
Flush doors
Flush door shall be solid core doors with commercial or decorative faces and
hardwood edges. It shall have 3 layer flat pressed teak wood particle board
(Commercial veneer) bonded with BWP type phenol formaldehyde conforming to
lS:848 and total thickness of shall be 35 mm. The board core shall conform to lS:3087
type - 1. The door shall be given 35 x 12 mm teak wood beading all around as per
drawings and as directed by the Engineer.
3.03.00
3.03.01
3.04.00
Fittings and Fixtures
3.04.01
Fixtures and fittings for doors, windows, furniture etc. shall be as shown on drawing
and as directed by the Engineer. These shall be of heavy type, best quality and from
approved manufacturer.
4.00.00
JOINERY
4.01.00
General
4.01.01
The work shall be done by skilled carpenters as per details shown on drawings or as
instructed by the Engineer. Framing timber and other work shall be closed fitting with
proper wood joinery, accurately set to required lines or levels and rigidly secured in
place.
4.01.02
The surface of frames etc. which will come in contact with masonry after fixing, shall
be given two coats of approved paint before fixing. Mastic caulking shall be done after
fixing external door and window frames. Special care shall be taken to match the grain
of timber of plywood which will be subsequently polished. Screwing or nailing will
not be permitted to the edge plywood or chip board sheets.
Attachment 2
Page 157 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
4.01.03
Fixing of frames and partitions shall generally be with 25 mm x 6 mm x 225 mm long
M.S. Hold fasts at bifurcated end and grouted with 1:2:4 cement concrete, The gap
between masonry and external door and window frame shall be caulked with mastic.
M.S. grills or guard bars shall be provided to windows where called for in the
specification.
4.02.00
Finish
4.02.01
All carpentry work after finishing shall be sand papered smooth, A prime coat of paint
shall be given after inspection by the Engineer to all surfaces other than those which
shall be subsequently polished or covered with laminated plastic sheet.
4.03.00
Surface Treatment
4.03.01
When shown on drawings decorative ply or laminated plastic sheets shall be bonded
under pressure to the surface to be finished. The adhesive used shall be of a approved
brand and brought to site in sealed containers. The rate of application and the length
of time for which the pressure is to be applied shall be as per the manufacturer’s
instructions. The edge of sheets shall be protected by teak lipping or beveled as shown
on drawings.
4.04.00
Preservative
4.04.01
Where required as per the drawings or by the Engineer, timber shall be treated with
specified preservative strictly in accordance with the manufactuer’s instructions and to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
05.00.00
FITTINGS AND FIXTURES :
5.00.01
The work covered under these specifications consist of supplying different types of
fittings and fixtures required for teak wood door shutters etc complete in strict
accordance with these specifications and drawings/samples approved.
Attachment 2
Page 158 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
05.00.02
All fittings and fixtures shall be of heavy quality brass anodised aluminium, iron
oxidised (M.S) or as specified. These shall be well made, reasonably smooth and free
from sharp edges, corners, flaws and other defects. Screws holes shall be counter sunk
to suit the heads of the specified screws. All hinges pins shall be of steel for brass
hinges and aluminium alloy NR-6 or steel pins for aluminium hinges with nylon
washers or as specified. All riveted heads pertaining to hinge pins shall be well formed
Screws supplied for fittings shall be of the same metal and finish as the fittings.
However brass cadmium plated / chromium plated screws shall be supplied with
aluminium fittings. Samples of each fixture / fitting shall be furnished by the
contractor for the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge and got approved from him
before placing bulk order for purchase. The fittings and fixtures to be incorporated in
the work shall be strictly according to the approved sample. Fittings shall be fixed in
proper position as shown in the drawing and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
These shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be. Screws shall be driven
home with a screws driver and not hammered in. Recess shall be cut to the exact size
and depth of fittings and fixtures & shall be done in a workman like manner and any
damages (one either to fittings and fixtures or the shutter frames etc.) should be
rectified by the contractor at his own cost.
05.01.0
BUTT HINGES :
05.01.01
Brass and aluminium hinges shall be manufactured from the extruded sections and
shall be free from cracks and other defects. M.S. butt hinges shall be cranked and
manufactured from M.S. Sheets. All butt hinges conform to latest I.S. specifications.
The size of butt hinges shall be taken as the length of the hinge. Width of the hinge
shall be measured from the centre line of hinge pin to end of flange.
05.02.00
PARLIAMENTARY HINGES :
05.02.01
These shall be manufactured from extruded section for brass and aluminium from
M.S. sheets for iron oxidised and shall be free from cracks and other defects. The size
of the parliamentary hinges shall be taken as the width between open flanges, while
the depth shall be as specified.
05.03.00
PIANO HINGES :
05.03.01
These shall be conformed I.S. specifications for Piano ninges and shall be either brass
oxidised, aluminium anodised, iron oxidised (M.S.) or as specified. Piano hinges shall
be fixed in the entire length of the cupboard shutters in a single piece. No joints are
allowed.
Attachment 2
Page 159 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
05.04.00
TOWER BOLTS :
05.04.01
The tower bolts shall be of the following types :
a) M.S. semi barrel tower bolt with m.s. sheet pressed barrel and G.I. bolt or with m.s.
barrel and m.s. sheet bolt.
b) Oxikdised brass barrel tower bolt with brass sheet barrel and rolled or drawn brass
bolt.
c) Anodised aluminium tower bolt with barrel and bolt of extruded sections of
aluminium alloy.
In case of M.S. tower bolt plates and straps after assembly shall be firmly revetted or
spot welded properly.
The knobs of brass tower bolts shall be cast and the bolt fixed into the knob firmly as
per I.S. specifications. The tower bolt shall be finished to correct shape and pattern so
as to have a smooth action. Wherever specified, aluminium barrel tower bolts shall be
manufactured from extruded sections of barrel and bolts.
Knobs shall be properly screwed to the bolt and reveted at the back. The size of the
tower bolt shall be taken as the length of barrel without top socker.
5.04.02
5.04.03
5.04.04
5.05.00
FLUSH BOLTS :
5.05.01
These shall be cast brass and shall be finished chromium plated / oxidised, as
specified. The size of the flush bolt shall be taken as the length of the flush plate
without top socket.
5.06.00
ALDROPS :
5.06.01
These shall be oxidised brass or anodised aluminium, iron oxidised or as specified and
shall be capable of smooth sliding action and shall be as per I.S. 2681-1964. Brass
sliding door bolt (aldrop) shall be made from rolled brass. The hasp shall be of cast
brass and screwed to the bolt in a workman like manner. Alternatively the hasp and
the bolt may be in one piece. Bolts shall be finished to shape and threaded with worth
standard and provided with round brass washers and nuts of square or hexagonal
shape. All components shall be smooth and polished. The leading dimensions of
aldrop shall be as the length of the bolt and specified diameter.
DOOR HANDLES – BOW / PLATE HANDLES :
5.07.00
5.07.01
These shall be of cast brass of specified size, shape and pattern as approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Brass handles shall be finished bright, chromium plated or
oxidised as specified. Aluminium or iron oxidised (m.s) handles shall be of specified
size, shape and pattern. The size of the handle is taken as the inside grip of the handle.
In case of iron oxidised handles, the same shall be manufactured from m.s. sheet
pressed into oval section as per I.S.
Attachment 2
Page 160 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
5.08.00
MORTISE LOCK :
5.08.01
Mortise lock with latches and a pair of level handles shall be 6 levers, with zinc alloy
pressure die cast / brass or as specified body of approved quality, and shall be right or
left handed as specified. The pair of handles shall be either brass chromium plated or
anodixed aluminium of approved shape and pattern or as specified. It shall be of the
best Indian make of approved quality. The size of the lock shall be determined by its
length. The lock for single leaf door shall have plain face and that for double leaf door
a rebated face. Level handles with springs shall be mounted on plates and shall be of
approved quality, anodised aluminium or as specified.
HYDRAULIC DOOR CLOSER :
5.09.00
5.09.01
Hydraulic door closer shall be of approved quality and make. The operation of the
Hydraulic door closer shall be very smooth.
5.09.02
This should be of H.D.-66 for external / main doors and elegant – 63 for all internal
doors. The overall height should not be more than 170 mm. for H.D.-66 and 160 mm.
for elegant-63 base shall be 110 x 60 mm. for H.D.-66 and 100 x 55 mm. for elegant - –3
weighing not less than 4.5 kg. For H.D. – 66 and 4 kg. For elegant – 63. Speed of the
Hydraulic door closer shall be adjustable and latch closing also shall be adjustable
type. Suspension and lubrication of door closer shall be in perfect line and level.
5.10.00
The contractor shall provide for all the incidentals required for fixing these fixtures
and fittings such as cadmium plated screws etc. Fittings and fixtures shall be fixed
securely in a workman like manner all as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Any of
the fixture damaged during the fixing shall be removed and new one fixed in their
place and the surface of joinery made good where affected, at his own expense.
Mortise plates shall be used over holes where the bolts enter in the wood work. Metal
sockets shall be provided to all bolts where the shoot enter brick, stone, concrete etc.
The incidental fixtures like mortise plates, metal sockets, screws etc. shall not be paid
for separately
6.00.00
Acceptance Criteria
6.01.00
Door and Window Frames
6.01.01
All frames shall be square and flat at the time of delivery and shall be checked
for dimensions and corner angles. After fixing they shall be in a true vertical
plane. All external door and window frames shall be caulked with mastic.
Attachment 2
Page161 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
6.02.00
Door and Window Shutters
6.02.01
These shall be of proper size, shape and design and free of warps. When fixed
to frames these shall operate smoothly without jamming and all latching or
locking devices shall engage properly without under pressure.
6.03.00
Door and window fittings
6.03.01
One set of all approved door and window fittings shall be submitted to the Consultant/Owner for reference and
comparisons with the fittings being provided.
TECHNICAL SPEC FOR ALUMINIUM WORKS
1.00.00
1.01.00
SCOPE
The work in general shall consist of fabrication, supplying, erecting and installing of all aluminum doors, windows,
ventilators, louvers, glazed partitions etc. as stipulated here or elsewhere in these specifications with all materials complete
including labour and equipment.
2.00.00
GENERAL:
2.01.00
The contractor shall submit 6 copies of shop drawing covering all types of work
under this specification before manufacture. The drawing shall show all
dimensions, member designations details of construction, installation, relating
to adjoining and related work etc The work shall be carried out as per
approved shop drawings relevant detailed approved shop drawings.
2.02.00
The contractor shall submit 6 copies of shop drawings covering all type/details of work and generally shown in
architectural drawings and envisaged under these specifications before manufacture. The drawings shall show all
dimensions details of constructions, installation of fixtures and relation to adjoining and related works. No fabrication
work shall be undertaken prior to obtaining approval of the shop drawings from the
Consultant/Owner/Owner/Owner. The Contractor shall intimate at the time of tendering the type of sections he
proposes to use on the works.
3.00.00
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.01.00
All applicable standards, acts and codes of practice referred to shall be the
latest editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions. A
Contractor.
3.02.00
In case of conflict between this specification and those (IS Standards, Codes
etc.) referred to in clause 3.03.00 the former shall prevail.
Attachment 2
Page 162 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
3.03.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
IS : 733 1983
Specifications for wrought aluminum and aluminum alloy
bars, rods, sections (for general engineering purposes)
IS : 1081 1960
IS : 1868 1996
Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal (steel and
aluminum) doors, windows & ventilators
Specifications for anodised coatings on aluminum and its
alloys
4.00.00 MATERIALS
4.01.00
Aluminum alloy for extruded sections for the above work shall correspond to
I.S 733 (extruded sections shall conform to IS Designation HE 9 – WP. Hollow
sections shall conform to IS Designation HV9-WP) and shall be anodised before
incorporating in the work. The door, window, ventilator, glazing framework,
beadings, hinges, pegstays, stiles, mullions, beadings, transoms and handles etc
shall be of aluminum anodised section as shown in detailed approved
drawings. All aluminum sections shall be from approved reputed
manufacturer.
4.02.00
The contractors can also propose nearest alternative section they
manufacture/posses without changing the elevation, structural stability and
functional requirement. Consultant/Owner/Owner/Owner reserves the right
to accept the alternative section or otherwise. The sections shall be structurally
suitable to withstand all the loads; the members have to sustain.
4.03.00
Counter sunk screws, nuts, bolts, washers, rivers and other miscellaneous
fastenings devices shall be of approved brass cadmium plated or stainless as
specified in the approved drawing. Each door leaf shall be prepared to receive
glazed panel of required thickness.
4.04.00
Glazing shall be done with neoprene dry set glazing gasket (of best quality and
approved make) with snap – in – beveled white anodised matt finish
aluminium metal glazing stops inside and outside,
Attachment 2
Page 163 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
5.00.00 FABRICATION:
5.01.00
Doors
5.01.01
The frames shall be manufactured square and flat, the corners of the frame being fabricated to true right angle. All the
fixed, sliding and opening frames shall be constructed of sections, which have been to length, mitred, welded and
mechanically fixed at the corners.
Where hollow sections are used with welded joints, argon-arc welding or flash butt welding shall be employed (Gas
welding or brazing not to be done). In case welded joints are used, anodising shall be done after fabrication as a whole.
All welding shall be on unexposed sides in order to prevent pitting / discoloration of other surface imperfections after
fixing etc.
5.01.02
5.01.03
Necessary allowance shall be made while manufacturing the aluminum door entrances, wall spans and glazing for
receiving plaster. Field fabrication of frames shall be done only if permitted by Consultant/Owner/Owner/Owner.
5.01.04
A thick layer of clear transparent lacquer based on methacrylates or cellulose butyrate shall be applied on the finished
sections of the aluminum work by the contractor to protect the surfaces from wet cement, lime, dirt, dust etc during the
construction activities. The size for door, window or ventilator frames shall not vary by more than (+/-) 1.5 mm.
5.01.05
All aluminum surfaces in contact with masonry or concrete shall be given a
thick coat of bitumastic paint. After fabrication, aluminum sections shall be
protected from construction hazards that may damage their appearance or
finish. All exposed surfaces of aluminum door entrance shall be protected by
masking tape during transshipment and erection
5.02.00
Windows, Ventilators and glazing
5.02.01
The frames shall be manufactured square and flat. The corners of the frames
shall be fabricated to true right angles. All the fixed, sliding, openable frames
shall be constructed from sections, which have been cut to length, mitred and
mechanically jointed or welded at the corners.
5.02.02
Where hollow sections are used with welded joints, argon are welding or flash
butt welding shall be employed (Gas welding or brazing not to be done). Subdividing bars of units shall be tennoned and rivetted into the frames. In case
welded joints are used, all welding shall be on unexposed sides in order to
prevent pitting, discoloration and other surface imperfections after finishing.
5.02.03
The dimensions shown in the drawing are overall heights and widths to the
outside of frames of aluminum windows. The side-hung shutters shall have
projected friction type hinges of aluminum alloy. Concealed projected hinges
having structural stability and of good quality will also be considered only
after the inspection of the sample submitted by the Contractor
Attachment 2
Page 164 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
5.02.04
The necessary pegstays, handles, window fasteners etc shall be of aluminum.
The handle shall be mounted on a handle plate riveted to the opening frame.
The pegstays shall be 300 mm. Long or as required complete with peg and
locking bracket and shall have holes for keeping the shutter open in three
different positions. Field fabrication of frames shall be done only if permitted
by consultant/Owner/Owner/Owner.
5.02.05
The complete fabricated assembly shall be anodised in approved satin finish
with minimum film thickness of 0.015 mm for the entire surface. A thick layer
of clear transparent lacquer based on methacrylate or cellulose butyrate shall be
applied on the finished sections of the aluminum windows etc. by the supplier
to protect the surfaces from wet cement, lime, dirt, dust etc during the
installation. The lacquer coating shall be removed after installation is complete,
if approved by the Consultant/Owner/Owner/Owner and all sections of the
windows shall be protected by PVC film covering
6.00.00
HARDWARE:
6.01.00
All sections and hardware shall have anodic film and cover a minimum
thickness of 0.015 mm
6.02.00
All doors shall have offset pivots; double action (180 minimum swing) floor
springs with oil check boxes of approved manufacture. All doors shall have 4
lever concealed brass body mortise lock without handles as per manufactures
design, with concealed flush C.P. brass tower bolts provided at suitable
locations. All doors shall have push plates of design shown in the approved
drawing as described in the schedule of quantities. All entrances shall be
without thresholds.
6.03.00
All cutouts, recess, mortising or milling and operations required for fixing the hardware shall be accurately made
reinforced with pacing plate as required to ensure adequate strength of the connection.
6.04.00
All the hardware accessories shall be of best-approved type and of anodised finish same as of rate frames and other
sections. Each lock shall be supplied with two stainless steel keys and each key shall be with number stamped thereon
according to the number on doors so installed.
6.05.00
All hardware shall be free from defects which may affect the appearance and serviceability. All hardware shall be fixed
after obtaining the prior approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
6.06.00
Approved samples of hardware shall be kept in the custody of the Engineer-in-charge. Working and moving parts of
lock sets shall be accurately fitted to smooth, close bearings and shall be free from rattle.
0
Attachment 2
Page165 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
6.07.00
The floor springs shall be of heavy-duty type and should allow door operation smoothly.
6.08.00
The contractor shall furnish a guarantee for all finishing and quality of hardware covered under this section and which
shall remain free from defects of any kind, either materials and / or workmanship for a period of one year (unless
otherwise specified) from the date of competition/handling over of work.
6.09.00
The contractor shall repair of replace any and all defective work and damage caused, at any time or times during that
period within 3 days from the written notice. This shall be done without any extra cost to the Owner.
7.00.00 FIXING
7.01.00
The frames shall be accurately fixed in the flooring/brick masonry or R.C.C works. The fixing of the frame shall be
done with cadmium plated brass counter sunk screws driven on to the teak wood rough ground, or fixed to the wall
with hodfasts as directed by the Consultant/Owner/Owner/Owner, and as shown in approved drawings.
7.02.00
All aluminum works shall be fixed in position as per relevant Indian Standard Specifications and code of practice for
fixing and glazing of aluminum work. Joints between metal and masonry shall be neatly painted with matching cement
and excess materials shall be removed.
7.03.00
Fixing of aluminum door entrances, hardware etc shall be done in best workmanship like manner true to line, level,
plane, plumb etc and all as directed by the Consultant/Owner/Owner/Owner. Breaking of floor for providing floor
springs and restoration of the floor finishes to the original specification and finishes and minor additions and
alternations to the openings shall be deemed to have been included in the quoted rates.
7.04.00
All aluminum windows shall be fixed in position as per IS 1081. All joints between metal and masonry / rough ground
wooden frame shall be fully caulked with music or ploysulphidc compound in order to ensure watertight joints. Joints
shall be neatly painted with matching cement and excess materials shall be removed. Hardware shall be fixed in
workman like manner all as directed by the Consultant/Owner/Owner/Owner.
7.00.00
All aluminum doors, windows, etc. shall be packed and crated properly before
dispatch, to ensure that there will be no damage to the fabricated materials.
Loading into wagons and trucks shall be done with all care to ensure safe
arrival of materials at site in undamaged condition. All doors, windows etc.
shall be stored under cover in a way to prevent damage or distortion.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
8.00.00
9.01.00
b) Mullions, transoms etc. shall be in one length and permissible deviations
from straightness shall be limited to n 1.5 mm from the axis of the member.
c) Door and window shutters shall operate without jamming. The clearance at
head and jamb for door shutters shall not exceed 1.5 mm. For double leaf
doors, the gap at the meeting of stiles shall not be more than 1.5mm.
e) Doors, windows, frames etc. shall be on a true plane, free from warp or
buckle.
Attachment 2
Page 166 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
g) Correctness of location and smoothness of operations of all shop installed
hardware and fixtures.
i) Glazing clips, fixing devices etc. shall be supplied in adequate Numbers
9.02.00
For Installed Items
a) Installations shall be at correct location, elevation and in general, on a true
vertical plane.
b) Fixing details shall be strictly as shown on drawings.
c) Assembly of composite units shall be strictly as per the drawings with mastic
caulking at transoms and mullions, gaskets, weather strips etc. complete.
d) All frames on external walls shall be mastic caulked to prevent leakage
through joint between frames and masonry.
e) All openable sections shall operate smoothly without jamming.
f) Locks, fasteners etc. shall engage positively. Key shall be noninterchangeable.
g) Cutting to concrete or masonry shall be made good and all abrasions to shop
paint shall be touched up with paint of same quality as shop paint.
Attachment 2
Page 167 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
TECHNICAL SPECS FOR STEEL DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS &
LOUVERS
1.00.00
SCOPE
The work in general shall consist of supplying, erecting and
installing of all metal doors, windows, ventilators, louvers, glazed
partitions etc. as stipulated here or elsewhere in these specifications
with all materials complete including labour and equipment.
2.00.00
GENERAL:
2.01.00
The contractor shall submit 6 copies of shop drawing covering all
types of work under this specification before manufacture. The
drawing shall show all dimensions, details of construction,
installation, relating to adjoining and related work etc
3.00.00
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.01.00
All applicable standards, acts and codes of practice referred to shall
be the latest editions including all applicable official amendments
and revisions. A complete set of all these documents shall generally
be available at site, with the Contractor.
In case of conflict between this specification and those (IS
Standards, Codes etc.) referred to in clause 3.03.00 the former shall
prevail.
3.02.00
3.03.00
Some of the applicable Indian standards, Codes, etc. are referred to
here below:
IS : 1038 1983 Specifications for Steel doors, windows and
ventilators
IS : 1081 1960 Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal
(steel and aluminium) doors, windows &
ventilators
IS : 1361 1978 Specifications for Steel windows for industrial
building
IS: 1477 2000 Code of practice for painting ferrous metals in
buildings - Pretreatment
(Part 1)
IS: 1477 2000 Code of practice for painting ferrous metals in
(Part 2)
buildings - Painting
IS: 2074
1992 Specifications for ready mixed paint, air drying,
red oxide zinc chrome, priming
IS: 3564
1996 Specifications for hydraulically regulated door
closers
IS : 4351 2003 Specifications for Steel door frames
IS : 7452 1990 Specifications for Hot rolled steel sections for
doors, windows and ventilators
Attachment 2
Page 168of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
4.00.00
MATERIALS
4.01.00
Steel sections used for fabrication of doors, windows, etc. shall be
standard rolled steel section specified in IS:1038, lS:1361 and IS:4351
or as specified in drawing. The Mild Steel sheets for frames,
shutters, louvre blades etc. shall be of approved quality and of
gauge mentioned in this specification. Hardware and fixtures of the
best quality from approved manufacturers shall only be used. The
Contractor shall specifically state the particular manufacturer’s
materials he proposes to use. All hardware and fixtures shall be
able to withstand repeated use. Door closers shall conform to
IS:3564 and shall be suitable for doors weighing 61-80 kg unless
otherwise stated. Each closer shall be guaranteed against
manufaturing defect for one year and any defect found within this
period shall be rectified or the closer replaced free of charge.
Concealed door closes shall be either floor mounted or transom
mounted, suitable for installation with metal doors. It shall conform
to the performance requirements and endurance test stated in
IS:3564 - Appendix A.
4.02.00
The Contractor shall submit samples of each type of hardware to
the Consultant/Owner/Owner/Owner. .The approved samples
shall be retained by the Consultant/Owner/Owner/Owner for
comparison with bulk supply. The mastic for caulking shall be of
best quality from a manufacturer approved by the
Consultant/Owner/Owner/Owner.
5.00.00
FABRICATION
5.01.00
Door Frames
5.01.01
Frames shall be reinforced for door closers. They shall be mortised,
reinforced, drilled and tapped for hinges, lock and bolt strikes.
Flush butt welding to form a solid fused joint, so that all frames are
square and flat shall be used with sections cut to required length
and mitred. Rubber door silencers shall be furnished for the
striking jamb. Loose “T” masonry anchors shall be provided.
Frames shall finish flush with floor and adjustable floor anchors
shall be supplied. Frames shall be brought to site with floor
ties/weather bars installed in place.
5.02.00
Double Plate Flush Door Shutters
Attachment 2
Page 169 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
5.02.01
Door shutters shall be 45 mm thick, completely flush design and
shall comprise of two sheets of 18G steel sheets, rigidly connected
and reinforced inside with continuous vertical 20G stiff ners, spot
welded in position at not more than 150 mm on centres. Both edges
of doors shall be joined and reinforced full. height by steel channels
placed immediately inside and welded to the door faces. Top and
bottom of doors shall be reinforced horizontally by steel channels
running full width of door. Doors shall not have more than 2.5 mm
clearance at jambs and head, shall have proper level on lock stiles
and rails to operate without binding, and shall be reinforced at
corners to prevent sagging or twisting. Pairs or double doors shall
have meeting stile edges beveled or rebated.
5.02.03
Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped in shop for
hinges, locks and bolts. They shall also be reinforced for closer,
push-plates and other surface hardware where necessary. Any
drilling and tapping required for surface hardware shall be done at
site. Wherever required, provision shall be made for fixing glazing,
vision panels, louvers etc. Glazing mouldings shall be of 18G mild
steel or extruded aluminum sections with profiles shown in
drawings and suitable for fixing 6 mm glass. Louver blades shall be
V or Z shaped and made out of 16G sheets.
5.03.00
Sliding Doors
5.03.01
Sliding doors shall be either single or double plate construction as
required and made out of 18 Gauge steel sheets with adequate
stiffeners. The Contractor shall specify the weight of the door in his
shop drawing and submit the manufacturer’s catalogue of the
sliding gear he proposes to use. Where shown on the drawings the
Contractor shall make provisions for openings in the door for
monorail beams. Door shall close positively to exclude rain water
from seeping in. Sliding doors shall withstand specified wind loads
without buckling or jamming. The door shall slide freely under all
ambient conditions.
Steel Windows, Sashes, Ventilators etc.
5.04.00
5.04.01
These shall conform in all respects to IS:1038, lS:7452 and lS:1361
and are as shown on drawings. The details as called for in the
above codes shall be applicable for coupling mullions, transom,
weather bars, pivot arrangements for ventilators etc.
Attachment 2
Page 170 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
5.04.02
5.04.03
5.04.05
10000011 / HB / 11094
Windows: Window shutters shall be hung on projecting hinges.
One leaf of the hinges shall be welded into a slot in the outer frame
and the other leaf of the hinges riveted to the opening shutters.
Hinges may be of the friction type in which case the window shall
not be fitted with peg stay. In case of non-friction projecting hinges,
a brass or bronze three holes peg stays 300mm. Long with pegs and
brackets, welded or riveted to the frame shall also be provided.
Handles shall be of brass or bronze, and shall be mounted on a
mild steel handle plate welded to the shutter in such a way that it
should be fixed after the shutter is glazed. The handles shall have a
two point nose which shall engage with brass, bronze or
aluminium alloy as specified, striking plate, on the fixed frame so
that it can hold the shutters in a slightly openable as well in a fast
position.
Top hung ventilators: These shall be fixed with plain hinges,
riveted to the fixed frames or welded to it after cutting a slot in it. A
peg stay 300mm long of brass or bronze with three holes, as in case
of windows shall be provided. The locking bracket shall either be
fitted to the fixed frame or to the ventilators.
Centre Hung Ventilators: These shall be hung on two pairs of brass
of lead / tin/ bronze cup pivots, riveted to the inner and outer
frame of the ventilates to permit these to swing through an angle of
approximately 85 deg. The opening portion of the ventilators shall
be so balanced that it remains open at any desired angle under
normal weather condition.
5.04.05
A bronze or brass spring catch shall be provided at the top centre of the ventilator. A brass cord
pulley wheel in a mild steel or malleable iron brackets, shall be fitted with screws or welded at the sill
and a cord eye shall be fixed to inner frame of ventilators to facilitate opening of ventilators.
5.05.00
All welds shall be flush butt welded to form a solid fused joint so
that all frames are square and flat.
Where composite unit openings are shown on drawings, the
individual window units shall be jointed together with requisite
transoms and mullions. All windows shall be inside glazed, fixed
with metal glazing beads. All windows, ventilators, sashes shall be
fixed with handles, peg stays etc. of approved make and best
quality.
Pressed Steel Louvers
The louver blade shall be ‘Z’ shaped and made out of 18G sheets in
EZ7 steel frames. The frames shall be of ISMC 100.
Fabrication drawings shall be submitted by the contractor which
shall also inclusive weights of the materials used and got approved
from the Consultant/Owner/Owner/Owner.
5.06.00
5.07.00
5.07.01
5.08.00
Attachment 2
Page 171 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
6.00.00
6.01.00
SHOP COAT OF PAINT
Unless otherwise specified in Sub-section, the shop paint for steel
doors, windows, ventilators, louvers etc. shall be best quality Zinc
Chromate primer paint from approved manufacturer conforming
to lS:2074. All surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, grease,
loose mill scales and foreign matter as per IS:1477 Part-I, and given
one coat of shop paint. Portions like mullions, transom etc. which
will be inaccessible after assembly of units shall be given an extra
coat of paint before assembly.
6.02.00
All steel doors, windows, etc. shall have one shop coat and one site
coat of Zinc chromate paint (Primer) conforming to IS:2074 with a
pigment to be specified by the Consultant/Owner/Owner/Owner
and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality and
conforming to relevant l.S. Code, unless specified otherwise in
these specifications. Wherever required, all steel doors, windows,
etc. shall be hot dip galvanized to give a coating weight of 460 gms
to 610 gms per sq.m. One coat zinc chromate primer coat shall then
be applied as shop paint.
7.00.00
All metal doors, windows, etc. shall be packed and crated properly
before despatch, to ensure that there will be no damage to the
fabricated materials. Loading into wagons and trucks shall be done
with all care to ensure safe arrival of materials at site in undamaged
condition. All metal doors, windows etc. shall be stored under
cover in a way to prevent damage or distortion.
8.00.00
ASSEMBLY AND ERECTION
8.01.00
In general, the fixing of metal doors, windows ventilators, louvers,
etc. shall conform to IS:1081. The Contractor shall assemble and
install all steel doors, windows, sashes, fixed metal louvers, etc.
including transoms and mullions for composite units in respective
places keeping proper lines and levels, and in approved
workmanlike manner, to give trouble free and leak-proof
installation. If required by the Consultant/Owner/Owner/Owner,
the installation shall have to be carried out under the supervision of
the manufacturer’s staff. The contractor shall take every precaution
against damage of the components during installation. Necessary
holes chases etc. required for fixing shall be made by the contractor
and made good again as per original, after installation.
Attachment 2
Page 172 of 219
172
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
8.02.00
After installation of metal doors, windows, etc. all abrasions to
shop-coat of paint shall be retouched and made good with the same
quality of paint used in shop-coat.
8.03.00
All coupling mullions, transoms, frames. etc. in contact with
unpainted steel and other members, shall be well embedded in
mastic. The contractor shall bring to the site the mastic cement in
original sealed containers of manufacturer and shall apply it as per
the instructions.
Door shutters, partitions, hardware fixtures etc. shall be fixed only
after major equipments have been installed in rooms. Wherever
required, nylon cords of approved quality shall be supplied
alongwith pivoted sashes and shall be of adequate length to
terminate one meter from the floor. Loose ends of cords shall end in
metal
or
plastic
pull
as
approved
by
the
Consultant/Owner/Owner/Owner.
8.04.00
9.00.00
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
9.01.00
b) Mullions, transoms etc. shall be in one length and permissible
deviations from straightness shall be limited to n 1.5 mm from the
axis of the member.
c) Door and window shutters shall operate without jamming. The
clearance at head and jamb for door shutters shall not exceed 1.5
mm. For double leaf doors, the gap at the meeting of stiles shall not
be more than 1.5mm.
e) Doors, windows, frames etc. shall be on a true plane, free f
warp or buckle.
g) Correctness of location and smoothness of operations of all shop
installed hardware and fixtures.
i) Glazing clips, fixing devices etc. shall be supplied in adequate
numbers
Attachment 2
Page 173 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
9.02.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
For Installed Items
a) Installations shall be at correct location,
elevation and in general, on a true vertical
plane.
b) Fixing details shall be strictly as shown
on
drawings.
c)
Assembly of composite units shall be
strictly
as per the drawings with
mastic caulking at transoms and mullions,
gaskets, weather strips etc. complete.
d)
All frames on external walls shall be mastic
caulked to prevent leakage through joint
between frames and masonry.
e)
All openable sections shall operate smoothly
without jamming.
f)
g)
Locks, fasteners etc. shall engage positivel
Key shall be non-interchangeable.
Cutting to concrete or masonry shall be
made good and all abrasions to shop paint
shall be touched up with paint of same
quality as shop paint.
Attachment 2
Page 174 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
TECHNICAL SPECS FOR : GLASS & GLAZING
1.00.00
1.01.00
2.03.00
SCOPE
The work in general shall consist of supplying and fixing all glass
and glazing including all clips, putty, mastic cement etc. wherever
required as shown on drawings.
CODES AND STANDARDS
prevail.
here below:
IS : 419 1967 Putty for use on window frames
IS
: 1960 Code of practice for fixing and glazing metal (steel
& aluminium) doors, windows and ventilators
1081
IS
: 1987 Flat transparent sheet glass
2835
IS
: 1988 Code of practice for glazing in building
3548
IS
: 1994 Figured rolled and wired glass
5437
IS
: 2000 Specification for transparent float glass
14900
3.00.00
MATERIALS
3.01.00
The Contractor shall supply and install all glass and glazing as
required for various doors, windows, sashes, ventilators, and fixed
louvers, miscellaneous glazing and partitions, unless otherwise
stated, from approved manufacture having uniform refractive
index and free from flaws, specks and bubbles. The glass shall be
brought to site in the original packing from the manufacturer and
cut to size at site. The cut edges shall be straight and free from
chips, spall or any other damages.
2.00.00
2.01.00
2.02.00
Attachment 2
Page 175 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
3.02.00
3.03.00
3.04.00
3.05.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
The glass shall be plain float glass from approved manufacture, as
specified and it shall be free from bubbles, flaws specs, waves, air
holes, distortion, scratches or other defects. The glasses in bulk
quantities shall be brought to site in Makers original packings and
Makers guarantee shall be produced if called for by the
Consultant/Owner/Owner. The glass shall be of required
thickness as mentioned in the items of schedule of quantities and /
or drawing or as directed by the Consultant/Owner/Owner. The
contractor shall submit the sample of the glass which he proposes
to use on the work and only such approved quality of glass shall be
used in the works. The glass brought to site shall be protected
against damages. Wherever frosted (obscure) glass is mentioned in
the item of schedule of quantities and / or shown in drawings, the
glass shall be of sand blown pattern and shall also be got approved
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
After the inspection is over and permitted by the
Consultant/Owner/Owner, glass panes shall be cleaned off any
labels paints smears and spots and shall be washed from both the
sides and all glazing left elar, perfect and free from rattling. The
contractor shall provide all the scaffolding tools and plants for
fixing the glass panes at his own cost. In case of steel
Glare reducing (tinted) or heat absorbing glass shall be “Calores” of
Hindustan Pilkington or approved equivalent and special care shall
be taken to grind smooth and round off the edges before fixing.
Clear glass shall be flat drawn and shall be at least 4 mm thick,
Conforming to lS:2835. Sheet glass for doors shall be minimum 6.3
mm thick.
3.06.00
Wired glass shall be 6 mm thick rolled glass with centrally
embedded 24 G wire mesh of Georgian type. This may be of clear
or coloured glass, as required by Engineer and shall conform to
3.07.00
3.08.00
3.09.00
lS:5437.
Obscure glass shall have a cast surface on one side.
Coloured and figured glass shall be as per approved sample.
In general, the putty shall conform to lS:419 and be of best quality
from approved manufacturer. it shall be brought to site in the
manufacturer’s original packing. Quick setting putty shall be used
for windows and sashes except when glare reducing glass is used
where it shall be of non-setting type.
Attachment 2
Page176 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
3.10.0
Neoprene gaskets with snap-fit glazing shall be fixed as per
manufacturer’s instruction and shall fit firmly against the glass to
give a leak proof Installation.
4.00.00
FIXING
4.01.00
The glass shall be cut to the required sizes of panels where it is to
be fitted and it shall be so cut that it fits properly in the frames
without rattling. Pre-measurement of each panel prior to the
cutting of glass is essential.
4.02.00
The beading shall then be fixed to glass panes and screwed at close
intervals not more than 10 cm. from each corner and the
intermediate not more than 20 cm. apart. When glass panes are
fixed with wooden beadings having mitred joints or aluminium
beading thin layer of glazier putty shall be applied covering the
area in contact between the glass and sashbars and beadings. In
case of louvers, all the exposed edges of the glass shall be ground
properly
4.03.00
All glazing clips, bolts, nuts, putty, mastic cement, etc. as required
shall be supplied by the Contractor.
All glass shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in positions.
Each glass pane shall be held in place by special glazing clips of
approved type. As specified in relevant l.S. Codes, four glazing
clips shall be provided per glass pane, except for large panes where
six or more clips shall be used as per Engineer’s instructions. All
holes that may be necessary for holding the clips, glazing beads
and all other attachments shall be drilled by the Contractor.
Glass pane shall be set without springing, and shall be bedded in
putty and back putted, except where mouldings or gaskets are
specified. Putty, mastic cement etc. shall be smoothly finished to a
true even line. Obscure and figured glass shall be set with smooth.
side out.
4.04.00
4.05.00
4.06.00
After completion of glazing work, the Contractor shall remove all
dirt, stains, putty etc. clean the glass panes and leave the work in
perfectly acceptable condition. All broken, cracked or damaged
glass shall be replaced by new ones
Attachment 2
Page 177 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
4.07.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
The beading shall be of teak wood of superior quality timber in
case of teak wood doors and windows and / or required sizes
mentioned in the items of schedule of quantities and / or shown in
drawing. In case of steel doors and windows the beading shall be
anodised aluminium beading of channel section as per size
mentioned in the item and / or shown in the drawing. The junction
of the beadings shall be mitre jointed.
5.00.00 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
a) All installations shall be free from cracked, broken or damaged
glass. Edges of large panes of thicker glass and heat absorbing
glass shall be inspected carefully for chipped, cracked or
unground edges.
b) Glazing shall be carefully done to avoid direct contact with metal
frames.
c) All glass shall be embedded in mastic or fixed by neoprene
gaskets to give a leak-proof installation.
d) At completion, the panes shall be free from dirt, stains, excess
putty etc. and to complete satisfaction of the Engineer.
Attachment 2
Page178 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
`TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANTITERMITE TREATMENT
1.00.00
GENERAL
1.00.01
Pre-constructional anti – termite treatment is a process in which soil treatment is applied to a
building in early stages of its construction. The purpose of antitermite treatment is to provide the
building with a chemical barrier against the sub-terranean termites.
1.00.02
Antitermite treatment being a specialized job, calls for through knowledge of the chemicals, soils,
termite to be dealt with and the environmental conditions, in order to give effective treatment and
lasting protection to the property undergoing treatment. It is therefore, imperative that the works of
antitermite treatment should be got executed through specialized agencies only. The specialized
agency should be preferably a member of the Indian Pest Control Association and shall have
sufficient experience of carrying out similar works of magnitude envisaged in this tender.
1.00.03
The pre-constructional soil treatment is required to be applied during the construction stages of the
sub-structure upto plinth level. The contractor has to be watchful of the various stages of substructure works and arrange to carry out the soil treatment in time after proper co-ordination with
other constructors if any, working at site.
1.00.04
The scope of pre-constructional anti-termite treatment covers the soil treatment with approved
chemicals in water emulsion in foundation trenches for columns, plinth beams, pile caps, brick walls,
service trenches, lift pits, steps, ramps etc., in top surfaces of plinth filling, at junction of walls and
floor, in expansion joints etc., in stages as detailed in this specifications and drawings, unless
otherwise stipulated, the anti-termite treatment will be carried out as per IS : 6313 (Part-II) and / or as
per direction of the Consultant/Owner.
2.00.00
CODES & STANDARDS
The relevant Indian Code for Antitermite treatment is given below:
IS
6313 2001 Antitermite measures in building
(Part 2)
construction chemical treatment
3.00.00
3.01.00
–
Pre
SITE PREPARATION
In order to ensure uniform distribution of the chemical emulsion and to assist penetration, the
following site preparation shall be carried out :
a) Remove all trees, stumps, logs or roots from the building site.
b) Remove all concrete from work if left anywhere, levelling
pegs, timber off-cuts and other builders debris from the area to
be treated.
c) If the soil to be treated is sandy or porous, preliminary
moistening will be required to fill capillary spaces in soil in
order to prevent the loss of emulsion through piping or
excessive percolations.
d) In the event of water logging of foundation, the water shall
be pumped out before application of chemical emulsion and it
should be applied only when the soil is absorbent.
Attachment 2
Page 179 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
e) On clays and other heavy soils where penetration is likely to
be slow and on sloping sites, where run-off of the treating
solution is likely to occur, the surface of the soil should be
scarified to a depth of 75 mm at least.
f) All sub floor levelling and grading should be completed, all
cutting, trenches and excavations should be completed with
back filling in place, borrowed fill must be free from organic
debris and shall be well compacted. If this is not done
supplementary treatments should be made to complete the
barrier.
4.00.00
4.01.00
CHEMICAL TO BE USED
The effectiveness of chemical depends upon the choice of the chemical, the dosage adopted and the
thoroughness of application. The chemical solutions or emulsions are required to be dispersed
uniformly in the soil and to the required strength so as to form an effective chemical barrier which is
lethal and repellent to termites.
Attachment 2
Page 180 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
4.02.00
The following chemical in water emulsion, after approval from the
Consultant/Owner, shall be used uniformly over the area to be
treated. Chlropyrophos
4.03.00
The contractor should produce voucher (s) for the chemical purchased and should get verified the
sealed container(s) of the specified chemical from the Consultant/Owner in-Charge before preparing
the emulsion / use for the treatment.
5.00.00
MODE AND RATE OF APPLICATION :
5.01.00
The chemical emulsion as stated above will be applied uniformly by sprayers at the prescribed rates
as detailed below in all the stages of the treatment.
5.02.00
Treatment in Foundation Trenches: In case of normal wall load
bearing structures, column pits, wall trenches and basement, the
treatment shall be at a rate of5 ltrs./sqm of surface area of the
bottom and sides to a height of atleast 300 mm. After the
foundation work, the sides shall be treated at a rate of 7.5
ltrs./sqm of vertical surface of substructure on each side. After the
earth filling is done, treatment shall be done by rodding the earth
at 150 mm centers close to wall surface and spraying the chemical
with the above dose i.e. 7.5 ltrs./sqm. In case of framed structure,
the treatment shall start at a depth of 500mm below ground level.
From this depth the backfill around the columns, beams and
R.C.C. basement walls shall be treated at a rate of7.5 ltrs./sqm of
the vertical surface and at a rate of 5 ltrs / sqm for the horizontal
surface at the bottom in the trenches / pits
5.03.00
Treatment on Top Surfaces of Plinth Filling : The top surface of
the filled earth within plinth walls shall be treated with chemical
emulsion at the rate of 5 litres / sqm of the surface area before
sub-base to floor is laid, if filled earth has been well rammed and
the surface does not allow the emulsion to seep through, holes
upto 50 to 75mm deep at 150mm centers both ways shall be made
with crow bars on the surface to facilitate saturation of the soil
with the emulsion.
Attachment 2
Page 181 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
5.04.00
Treatment at Junction of Walls and Floors : Special care shall be
taken to establish continuity of the vertical chemical barrier on
the inner wall surfaces from the finished ground level (or from
level where the treatment had stopped) upto the level of the
filled earth surface. To achieved this a small channel 30 x 30 mm
shall be made at all the junctions of wall / column with floor
(before laying sub-grade) and rod holes made in the channel upto
the finished ground level at 150 mm apart and the iron and
moved backward and forward to break the earth and chemical
emulsion poured along the channel at a rate of 7.5 litres (or at
recommended quantity) per sqm. of the vertical wall / column
surfaces so as to soak the soil right up to the bottom. The soil
shall be tamped back into place after this operation.
5.05.00
Treatment for Expansion Joints : The soil beneath the expansion
joints shall receive special attention when the treatment under
5.02.00 above is in progress. This treatment shall be
supplemented by treating through the
expansion joint after sub-grade has been laid at the rate of 2 litres
per metre length of expansion joint.
6.00.00
PRECAUTIONS
6.01.00
Utmost care shall be taken to see that the chemical barrier is
complete and continuous. Each part of the area shall receive the
prescribed dosage of chemical emulsion.
The treatment should not be carried out when it is raining or when
the soil is wet with rain or sub-soil water.
6.02.00
6.03.00
Once formed, the treated soil barrier shall not be disturbed. If by
chance, treated soil barriers are disturbed, immediate steps shall be
taken to restore the continuity and completeness of the barrier
system.
Attachment 2
Page 182 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
7.00.00
HEALTH HAZARDS AND SAFETY MEASURES
7.01.00
All the chemicals mentioned above are poisonous and hazardous to
health. These chemicals can have an adverse effect upon health
when absorbed through the skin, inhaled as vapours or spray mist
or swallowed. Persons handling or using these chemicals should be
warned of these dangers and advised that absorption through the
skin is the most likely source of accidental poisoning. They should
be cautioned to observe carefully the safety precautions given in
7.02.00 to 7.05.00 particularly when handling these chemicals in the
form of concentrates.
7.02.00
These chemicals are usually brought to the site in the form of
emulsifiable concentrates. The containers should be clearly labeled
and should be stored carefully so that children and pets cannot get
at them. They should be kept securely closed.
7.03.00
Particular care should be taken to prevent skin contact with
concentrates. Prolonged exposure to dilute emulsions should also
be avoided. Workers should wear clean clothing and should wash
thoroughly with soap and water specially before eating and
smoking. In the event of severe contamination, clothing should be
removed at once and the skin washed with soap and water. If
chemicals splash into the eyes they shall be flushed with plenty of
soap and water and immediate medical attention should be sought.
7.04.00
The concentrates are oil solutions and present a fire hazard owing
to the use of petroleum solvents. Flames should not be allowed
during mixing.
7.05.00
Care should be taken in the application of chemicals / soil –
toxicants to see that they are not allowed to contaminate wells or
springs which serve as source of drinking water.
8.00.00
GUARANTEE
2.00.01
The contractor has to furnish the guarantee for 10 (ten) years from the date of completion of work,
stating that in case of reappearance of termites within the building area due to defective materials or
workmanship or due to any other reasons, the contractor will carry out the necessary post
constructional treatment to keep the entire area free from termite, once again, without any extra cost
of the Department during the guarantee period.
Attachment 2
Page 183 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
TECHNICAL
SPECS
FOR
PAINTING,
WHITE
DISTEMPERINGAND OTHER FINISHING WORKS
WASHING,
1.00.00
SCOPE
1.01.00
This Specification covers painting, white washing. polishing,
distempering etc. of both interior and exterior surfaces of masonry,
concrete, plaster, plaster of Paris, structural and other
miscellaneous steel items, rain water down comer, floor and roof
drains, waste and service water pipes, and other ferrous and nonferrous metal items as indicated elsewhere in these specifications or
as directed by the Engineer.
1.02.00
If surface to be finished cannot be put in suitable condition for
painting by customary preparatory methods, the Contractor shall
notify the Engineer in writing or assume responsibility for and
rectify and unsatisfactory finishing. Before commencing painting,
the Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer in writing
regarding the scheduling of work to minimise damage,
disfiguration or staining by other trades. He shall also undertake
normal precautions to prevent damage, disfiguration or staining to
work of other trades or other installations.
2.00.00
CODES AND STANDARDS
2.01.00
2.02.00
prevail.
Attachment 2
Page 184 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
2.03.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
here below:
75-1973
77-1976
102-1962
103-1962
Linseed oil, raw and refined
Linseed oil, boiled, for paints
Ready mixed paint, brushing, red, lead, nonsetting, priming
Ready mixed paint, brushing, white lead, for priming and general purposes
104-1979
Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, zinc chrome, priming
133-1993
Enamel, interior (a) under coating (b) finishing colour as required
137-1965 Ready mixed paint, brushing, matt oregg-shell flat, inishing,
itterior, to Indian Standard Colour, as required
158-1981
Ready mixed paint, brushing, bituminous, black lead free acid alkali, water and heat
resisting for general purposes.
168-1993
Ready mixed paint, air drying for general purpose.
217-1988
Cut back bitumen
218-1983
Creosote and anthrakene oil for use as wood preservatives
290-1961
Coal tar black paint
337-1975
Varnish, finishing interior
338-1952
Varnish, under coating exterior, natural resin
339-1952
Varnish, under coating, exterior, synthetic resin
340-1978
Varnish, mixing
341-1973
Black Japan, type A, E, & C
345-1952
Wood filler, Transparent, liquid
347-1975
Varnish, shellac for general purpose
348-1968
French polish
419-1967
Putty for use of window frames
427-1965
Distemper, dry, colour as required
428-1969
Distemper, oil emulsion colour as required
524-1983
Varnish, finishing, exterior, synthetic
525-1968
Varnish, finishing, exterior and general purposes
533-1973
Gum spirit of turpentine (oil of turpentine)
712-1984
Specification for building limes
1200-(Pt.- Method of measurements of plastering and pointing
XII)-1976
Attachment 2
Page 185 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
1200-Pt.XIII)-1987
1200-(Pt.XV)-1987
IS : 1477 (I
and II)
2095-1982
2096-1992
2339-1963
IS : 2395 (I
and II)
2547-1976
2932-1994
2933-1975
5410-1992
5411-(Pt.I)-1974
6278-1971
IS : 13467
BS : 5493
10000011 / HB / 11094
Method of measurements of white washing, colour washing, distempering and other
finishes
Methods of measurements of painting, polishing & varnishing.
Code of Practice for painting of ferrous metals in building
Gypsum plaster boards.
Asbestos cement flat sheets.
Aluminium paint for general purposes, in dual container
Code of Practice for painting concrete, masonry and plaster surface
Gypsum building plaster
Enamel synthetic, exterior (a) Under coating (b) Finishing.
Enamel, Exterior (a) Under coating (b) Finishing
Cement paint, colour as required
Plastic emulsion paint for interior use
Code of practice for white washing & colour washing
Specification for chlorinated rubber for paints
Code of practice for protective coating of Iron & Steel structure against corrosion
Attachment 2
Page 186 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
3.00.00
MATERIALS
3.01.00
Materials shall be of highest grade products of well-known
approved manufacturer and shall be delivered to the site in original
sealed containers, bearing brand name, manufacture’s name and
colour shade, with label intact and seals unbroken. All materials
shall be subject to inspection & approval by the Engineer. It is
desired that materials of one manufacturer only shall be used as far
as possible and paint of one shade be obtained from the same
manufacturing batch.
3.02.00
All paint shall be subjected to analysis from random samples taken
at site from painters bucket, if so desired by the Engineer.
3.03.00
All prime coats shall be compatible to the material of the surface to
be finished as well as to the finishing coats to be applied. All
unspecified materials such as shellac, turpentine or linseed oil shall
be of the highest quality available and shall conform to the reputed
recognised manufacturer’s and shall be approved by the Engineer.
3.04.00
All colour shall be as per painting schedule and tinting and
matching shall be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In such
cases, where samples are required, they shall be executed in
advance with the specified materials for the approval of the
Engineer.
4.00.00
WHITE WASHING
4.01.00
Shall be done from pure shell lime or fat lime, or a mixture of both
as instructed by the Engineer, and shall conform to IS: 712. Samples
of lime shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval, and lime as
per approved sample shall be brought to site in unslaked condition.
After slaking, it shall be allowed to remain in a tank of water for
two days, and then stirred up with a pole, until it attains the
consistency of thin cream. 100 grams of gum to 6 litres of white
wash water and a little quantity of indigo or synthetic ultramarine
blue shall be added to the lime.
Attachment 2
Page 187 of 219
]
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
5.00.00
WATERPROOF CEMENT PAINT
5.01.00
Shall be made from best quality white cement and lime resistant
colours with accelerators, waterproofing agents and fungicides. The
paint shall conform to IS: 5410.
6.00.00
ACRYLIC EMULSION PAINT
6.01.00
Shall be water based acrylic copolymer emulsion with rutile
titanium dioxde and other selected pigments and fungicide. It shall
exhibit excellent adhesion to plaster and surface and shall resist
deteoration by alkali salts. The paint film shall allow the moisture
in wall to escape without peeling or blistering. The paint, after it is
dried, shall be able to withstand washing with mild soap and water
without any deterioration in colour, or without flaking, blistering
or peeling.
SYNTHETIC ENAMEL PAINT
7.00.00
7.01.00
8.00.00
8.01.00
Shall be made from synthetic resin and drying oil with rutile
titanium dioxide and other selected pigments to give a smooth,
hard, durable and glossy finish to all exterior and interior surfaces.
white and pastel shades shall resist yellowing and darkening with
aging. The paint shall conform to IS: 2932 and IS: 2933.
DRY DISTEMPER
Dry distemper of required colour conforming to IS:427 and of
approved brand and manufacturer shall be used. The primer where
used shall be cement primer or distemper primer. The shade shall
be got approved from the Engineer. Dry distemper as required
shall be stirred slowly and in clean water using 0.6 litre of water
per kg of distemper or as specified by the manufacturer. Distemper
shall not be mixed in larger quantity than is actually required for
one days work. Warm water shall preferably be used. The
treatment shall consists of a priming coat of whiting followed by
the application of two or more coats of distemper till the surface
shows an even colour.
Attachment 2
Page 188 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
9.00.00
OIL BOUND DISTEMPER
9.01.00
Oil bound distemper (IS:428-1969) of approved brand and
manufacturer shall be used. Any unevenness in surface shall be
made good by applying putty. The patched surface shall be
allowed to dry thoroughly before the coat of distemper is applied.
One coat of distemper properly diluted with thinner as specified by
the manufacturer applied with brushes in horizontal strokes
followed immediately by vertical ones together will constitute one
coat. Two or more coats of distemper as found necessary shall be
applied to obtain even shade.
10.00.00
COLOUR WASH
10.01.00
It shall be done with mineral colours, not affected by lime added to
white wash. No colour wash shall be done until a sample of the
colour wash to the required tint or shade has been approved by the
Engineer. The colour shall be of even tint or shade over the whole
surface. If it is blotchy or otherwise badly applied, it shall be redone
by the Contractor at no extra cost to Owner.
11.00.00
CHLORINATED RUBBER BASED PAINT
11.01.00
11.02.00
Chlorinated rubber is the product obtained from the reaction of
chlorine with rubber. The product contains an average chlorine
content of about 65%.
Chlorinated rubber shall be formulated with resins (for adhesion
and gloss), plasticizers (for flexibility and toughness), pigments (for
colour), stabilizers and solvents (for fluidity). This shall meet the
general requirements of IS:13467 & BS:5493.
12.00.00
STORAGE
12.01.00
The Contractor shall arrange for safe and proper storage of all
materials and tools. Paints shall be kept covered at all times and
mixing shall be done in suitable containers. All necessary
precautions shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent fire.
Attachment 2
Page 189 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
13.00.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
PREPARATION OF SURFACE
13.01.00
Before starting the work the Contractor shall obtain the approval
of the Engineer regarding the soundness and readiness of the
surface to be painted on.
13.02.00
Masonry, Concrete and Plastered Surfaces shall be free from all oil,
grease, efflorescence, mildew, loose paint or other foreign and loose
materials. Masonry cracks shall be cleaned out and patch filled
with mortar similar to the original surface and uniformly textured.
Where this type of resurfacing may lead to the finishing paint being
different in shade from the original surfaces, the resurfaced area
shall be treated with minimum one coat of cement primer which
should be continued to the surrounding area for a distance of
minimum 100 mm.
13.03.00
Surface with mildew, efflorescence shall be treated as -below.
a) Mildew: All mildewed surfaces shall be treated with an pproved
fungicide such as ammoniacal wash consisting of 7 gm of
copper
arbonate dissolved in 80 ml liquid ammonia and diluted to 1
litre
with water or 2.5 per cent magnesium silico-fluoride solution and
allowed to dry thoroughly before paint is applied.
b) Efflorescence: All efflorescence shall be removed by scrubbing
the affected surfaces with a solution of muriatic acid in water (1
: 6 to 1 : 8) and washed fully with clear water and allowed to
dry thoroughly.
13.04.00
Metal Surfaces
13.04.01
All metal surfaces shall be absolutely clean, dry and free from wax,
grease or dried soap films. All steel and iron surfaces in addition
shall be free from rust. All galvanized iron surfaces shall be pretreated with a compatible primer according to the manufacturer’s
direction. Any abrasion in shop coat shall be touched up with the
same quality of paint as the original coat.
Attachment 2
Page 190 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
14.00.00
APPLICATION
14.01.00
The method of application shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer in case of selection of special shades and colour (not
available in standard shades) the Contractor shall mix different
shades and prepare test panels of minimum size 1 metre square as
per instruction of the Engineer and obtain his approval prior to
application of finishing paints.
14.02.00
Proper tools and implements shall be used. Scaffoldings if used
shall be independent of the surface to be painted to avoid shade
differences of the freshly repaired anchor holes. Painting shall be
done by skilled labourers in a workman like manner. All materials
shall be evenly applied, so as to be free of sags, runs, crawls or
other defects. All coats shall be of proper consistency. In case of
application by brush, no brush marks shall be visible. The brushes
shall be clean and in good condition before application of paint.
14.03.00
All priming undercoats for painting shall be applied by brush only
and rollers, spray equipments etc. shall not be used.
14.04.00
No work shall be done under conditions that are unsuitable for
production of good results. No painting shall be done when
plastering is in progress or is drying. Application of paint which
seals of surface to moisture shall be done after the moisture on and
under the surface has dried out.
14.05.00
All coats shall be thoroughly dry before being sand papered or
before the succeeding coat is applied. Coats of painting as specified
are intended to cover surfaces perfectly.
14.06.00
In case the surface is not covered properly by applying the
specified number of coats, further coats shall be applied by the
Contractor when so directed by the Engineer, without any extra
cost to Owner. All primers and undercoats shall be tinted to
approximate the colour of the finishing coats. Finished coats shall
be of exact colour and shade and as per approved samples and
finish shall be uniform in colour and texture. All parts of
mouldings and ornaments shall be left clean and true to finish.
Attachment 2
Page 191 of
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
14.07.00
White Washing: The surface where white washing is to be applied
shall be cleaned of all loose materials and dirt. All holes and
irregularities of the surface shall be filled up with lime putty and
shall be allowed to dry up before application of the lime solution.
One coat of white wash shall consists of one stroke from top
downwards, another from bottom upwards over the first stroke
and another from left to right before the previous one dries up.
Second coat shall be applied after the first dries up completely and
similarly the third coat shall be applied and in case the Engineer
feels that one or more coats are required the Contractor shall do so
without any extra cost to the Owner. No brush marks shall show on
the finished surface. The inner plastered surfaces of walls shall be
given three or more coats of white washings.
14.08.00
Waterproof Cement Paint: Surface to be coated with cement paint
shall be washed and brushed down. As soon as the moisture has
disappeared, the surface shall be given one coat of paint. Care shall
be taken so that the paint does not dry out too rapidly. After 4 to 6
hours, the water shall be sprinkled over the surface to assist curing
and prevent cracking. After the first coat has dried (24 to 48 hours)
the second coat shall be applied. In a similar manner the finished
surface shall be kept moist by occasional sprinkling with water for
seven days after painting.
14.09.00
Acrylic Enamel Paint: Lime gauged cement plastered surfaces shall
not be painted for at least one month after plastering. A sample
patch shall be painted to check alkali reaction if so desired by the
Engineer. Painting shall be strictly as per manufacturer’s
specification. Minimum two coats shall be applied.
14.10.00
Synthetic Enamel Paint: Shall be applied on properly primed
surface. Subsequent coats shall not be applied till the previous coat
is dry. The previous coat shall be lightly sand papered for better
adhesion of subsequent coats. Minimum two coats shall be applied.
14.11.00
Dry Distemper: The treatment shall consists of a priming coat of
whiting followed by the application of two or more coats of
distemper till the surface shows an even colour as per
manufacturer’s instruction. The entire surface shall be coated with
the mixture uniformly, with proper distemper, in horizontal strokes
followed immediately by vertical ones which together shall
constitute one coat. Subsequent coats shall be applied only if the
previous coat has dried.
Attachment 2
Page 192 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
14.12.00
Oil Bound Distemper: Any unevenness in the surface shall be made
good by applying putty. The patched surface shall be allowed to
dry thoroughly before coat of distemper is applied. One coat of
distemper properly diluted with thinner as specified by the
manufacturer shall be applied with brushes in horizontal strokes
followed immediately by vertical ones which together will
constitute one coat. Two or more coats of distemper, as found
necessary shall be applied to obtain even shades.
14.13.00
Colour Washing: For new work, the priming coat shall be of white
wash with lime or with whiting. Two or more coat shall than be
applied on the entire surface till it represents a smooth and uniform
finish. The finished dry surface shall not be powdery and shall not
readily come off on hand when rubbed. Indigo (neel) shall
however, not be added.
15.00.00
PAINTING OF IRON & STEEL WORKS
15.01 .00
Paint to be used for various items of work shall be of best quality
and shall be obtained ready mixed in sealed containers from
approved manufacturer. The contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s
approval for the make and colour of the paint he proposes to use.
All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, loose particles
and rust, and approved prior to application of paint. Workmanship
shall conform to lS:1477 (Part - I & III).
15.02.00
15.03.00
Specific number of coats shall be applied and at least 24 hours shall
elapse between the applications of successive coats. No painting
shall be carried out on exterior work in wet weather or on surfaces
which are not entirely dry.
16.00.00 CHEMICAL RESISTANT PAINT
16.01.00
17.00.00
17.01.00
For chemical resistant paint stipulation of BS: 5493 shall also be
followed.
PROTECTION
Furniture and other movable objects, equipments, fittings and
accessories shall be moved, protected and replaced upon
completion of the painting work. All stationary items of
equipments shall be well covered so that no paint can fall on them.
All protection shall be as per instruction of the Engineer.
Attachment 2
Page 193 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
18.00.00
CLEANING UP
18.01.00
The Contractor shall, upon completion of painting etc. remove all
marks and make good the surface, where paint has been spilled,
splashed or splattered, including all equipments, fixtures, glass,
furniture, fittings etc. to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
19.00.00
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
a) All painted surfaces shall be uniform and pleasing in
appearance.
b) The colour, texture etc. shall match exactly with approved
samples.
c) All stains, splashes and splatters of paints shall be removed from
surrounding surfaces.
Attachment 2
Page 194 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
TECHICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR : FLOORING & ALLIED WORKS
1.00.00
SCOPE
1.01.00
This specification covers furnishing, installation, finishing, curing,
testing, protection, maintenance till handing over various types of
floor finishes and allied items of work as listed below:
a) In situ Terrazzo finish
b) Integral finish to concrete base.
d) Metallic hardener like ‘Ironite’ finish
e) IPS Flooring
f) Terrazzo Tiled finish
g) Glazed tile finish
h) Acid resistant tile finish
i) PVC tile finish
2.00.00
General
2.01.00
Base: The base to receive the finish either formed concrete sub-base
or floor slab covered under other relevant specifications.
2.02.00
Commencement, scheduling and sequence of the finishing works
shall be planned in detail and must be specifically approved by the
Engineer, keeping in view the activities of other agencies working
in the area. However, the contractor shall remain fully responsible
for all normal precautions and vigilance to prevent any damage
whatsoever till handing over.
2.03.00
Only workers specially experienced in particular items of finishing
work shall be engaged; where such workers are not readily
available, with the Engineer’s permission, experienced supervisors
recommended by the manufacturer shall be engaged. In particular
cases where the Consultant/Owner so desire, the Contractor shall
get the finishing items installed by the manufacturer.
2.03.00
The surface to the treated shall be thoroughly examined by the
Contractor. Any rectification necessary shall be brought to the
notice of the Consultant/Owner and his approval shall be obtained
regarding method and extent of such rectification work. For all
types of flooring, skirting, dado and similar works the base to
receive the finish shall be adequately roughened by chipping,
raking out joints and cleaning thoroughly all dirt, grease etc., with
water and hard brush and (detergent if required, unless otherwise
directed by the manufacturer of any special finishing treatment, the
base shall be thoroughly soaked with water and all excess water
mopped up. The surface shall be done dry where adhesive are used
for fixing the finishes. Prior to commencement of actual finishing
the approval of the Consultant/Owner shall be taken as to the
acceptability of the surface.
Attachment 2
Page 195 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
3.00.00
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.01.00
3.02.00
prevail.
3.03.0 Some of the applicable Indian standards, Codes, etc. are referred to here
below:
IS :1237 Specification for Cement concrete flooring tiles
IS : 1443 Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement concrete flooring
tiles.
: 2114 Code o f practice for laying in situ terrazzo floor
IS : 2571 Code o f practice for laying-in-situ concrete flooring
IS : 5318 Laying of flexible sheet and tile flooring
IS: 4441 Code o f practice for use of silica type chemical resistant mortar
IS : 4457 Specification for Ceramic unglaged vitreous acid resistant tiles.
IS : 13753Specification for dust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of E>
10% Group (B IiI)
IS : 13753Specification for dust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 6%
<E< 10% Group (B II b)
IS : 13753Specification for dust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 3%
<E< 6% Group (B II a)
IS : 13753Specification for dust pressed ceramic tiles with low water absorption of
E< 3% Group (B I)
Attachment 2
Page 196 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
4.00.00
4.01.00
4.02.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
MATERIALS
Materials required for individual finishing items are specified
under respective items. In general, all such materials shall be as per
relevant IS Codes where available. In all cases these materials shall
be of the best quality available indigenously unless specified
otherwise.
The materials for finishing items must be procured from wellreputed specified manufacturers and on the basis of approval of
samples by the Engineer. The materials shall be ordered, procured
and stored well in advance to avoid compulsion to use substandard
items to maintain the construction schedule.
5.00.00
INTEGRAL FINISHING TO CONCRETE BASE
5.01.00
While the surface of the concrete laid as per specification for “castin situ concrete and allied works” has been fully compacted and
levelled but the concrete is still ‘green’ a thick slurry made with
neat cement shall be applied evenly and worked in with iron floats.
When the slurry starts to set, it shall be pressed with iron floats, to
have a firm compact smooth surface without any trowel mark or
undulations. This finish shall be as thin as possible by using 2.2 Kg
of cement per sqm. of area. The surface shall be kept in shade for 24
hours and then cured for at least 7 days continuously by flooding
with water. The surface shall not be subjected to any load or
abrasion till 21 days after laying. As desired by the Engineer, the
surface, while still ‘green’ shall be indented by pressing strings. The
markings shall be of even depth, in straight lines and the panels
shall be of uniform and symmetrical patterns.
6.00.00
6.01.00
IN-SITU TERRAZZO FINISH
It shall consist of an underbed and a topping laid over an already
laid and matured concrete base.
Thickness
Unless otherwise specified the total thickness of the finish shall be
minimum 50mm for horizontal and 25 mm for vertical surface of
which the topping shall be not less than 12 mm and 10mm
respectively. While the topping shall be of uniform thickness the
thickness of underbed may vary, to provide necessary slopes. The
vertical surface shall project out 6 mm from the adjacent plaster or
other finishes. Necessary cutting into the surface receiving the
finish shall be done to accommodate the specified thickness.
6.02.00
6.02.01
Attachment 2
Page 197 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
6.02.02
All junctions of vertical with horizontal shall be rounded neatly to
uniform radius of 25 mm.
6.03.00
Mix
6.03.01
Underbed : the underbed for floors and similar horizontal surface
shall consist of a mix of 1 part cement, 2 part sand and 4 parts stone
chips by volume. For vertical surfaces the mix shall consist of 1 part
cement to 3 parts of coarse and by volume. The stone chips shall be
12.5mm down well graded. Just sufficient water shall be added to
give a workable consistency.
6.03.02
Topping : The mix for the topping shall be composed of cement,
colour pigment, marble powder and marble chips. Proportions of
the ingredients shall be such as to produce the terrazzo of colour,
texture and pattern approved by the Engineer. The cement shall be
grey, to which pigment shall be added to achieve the desired
colour. To 3 parts of this mixture 1 part marble powder by weight
shall be added and thoroughly mixed dry. To 1 part of this mix, 1.5
parts of marble chips by volume shall be added and thoroughly
mixed dry again. The pigment added shall conform to the relevant
Indian Standard specification and must be stable and non fading. It
must be very finely ground. The marble powder shall be from
white marble and shall be finer than I S Seive No. 30. the size of
marble chips may be between 3 mm to 20 mm. Sufficient quantity
to cover each visible area shall be prepared in one lot to ensure
uniform colour. Sufficient water to make it just workable shall be
added, to a quantity of mix that can be used up immediately before
it starts to set.
Laying
6.04.00
6.04.01
The underbed shall be laid in panels. The panels shall not be more
than 5 sq.m. in area of which no side shall be more than 2.5 m long.
For exposed locations the maximum area of a panel shall be 2.0
sq.m. The panels shall be laid in alternate bays or chequered board
pattern. No panels shall be in contact with another already laid
until the latter has contracted to the full extent.
6.04.02
Dividing strips made of aluminium shall be used for forming the
panels. The strips shall exactly match the total depth of underbed
plus topping.
Attachment 2
Page 198 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
6.04.03
After laying, the underbed shall be levelled compacted and brought
to proper grade with a screed or float. The topping shall be laid
after about 24 hours while the underbed is still somewhat ‘green’
but firm enough to receive the topping. A slurry of the mixture of
cement and pigment already made shall be spread evenly and
brushed in just before laying the topping. The topping shall be
rolled for horizontal areas and thrown and pressed for verical areas
to extract all superfluous cement water and to achieve a compact
dense mass fully bonded with the underbed. The surface of the
topping shall be trowelled over, pressed and brought to a smooth
dense surface showing a minimum 75% area covered by marble
chips in an even pattern of distribution.
6.05.00
Curing: The surface after laying shall be left for about 12 to 18 hours
and then cured by allowing water to stand on the surface or by
covering with wet sack for four days.
6.06.00
6.06.01
When the surface has sufficiently hardened it shall be watered and
ground evenly with rapid cutting coarse grade (No. 60) grit blocks,
till the marble chips are exposed and the surface is smooth. Then
the surface shall be thoroughly washed and cleaned. A grout, with
already prepared mixture of cement and pigment shall be applied
to fill up all pinholes.
6.06.02
This surface shall be cured for 7 days by keeping it moist and then
ground with fine grit block (No. 120). It shall again be cleaned with
water, the slurry applied again to fill up pinhole that might have
appeared and allowed to be cured again for 5 days. Finally the
surface is ground a third time with very fine grit blocks (No. 320) to
get smooth surface without any pinhole. The grinding shall be done
by a suitable machine. Where grinding machine cannot be used
hand grinding may be allowed when the first rubbing shall be with
carborundum stone of coarse grade (No. 60), second rubbing with
medium grade (No. 80) and final rubbing and polished with fine
grade (No. 120). The surface shall be cleaned with water, dried and
4 covered with oil free clean sawdust. The final polishing shall be
postponed until just before handing over, if desired by the
Engineer.
Just before handing over, the surface shall be dusted with Oxalic
acid at the rate of 0.33 gm per sq. m., water sprinkled on it and
finished by buffing with felt or hessain bobs. The floor be cleaned
with soft moist rag and dried.
6.06.03
Attachment 2
Page 199 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
7.00.00
7.01.00
7.02.00
7.02.01
7.03.00
7.03.01
7.04.00
7.04.01
7.04.02
7.05.00
7.05.01
7.05.02
10000011 / HB / 11094
METALLIC HARDENER FINISH
It shall consist of an underbed and a topping (incorporating iron
particles) laid over an already laid and matured concrete base.
Thickness:
Unless otherwise specified the total thickness of the finish shall be
minimum 50mm for horizontal surface of which topping shall not
be less than 12 mm. While topping shall be of uniform thickness,
the underbed may vary in thickness to provide necessary slope.
The vertical surface shall project 6 mm from adjacent plaster or
other finishes. Necessary cutting into the surface receiving the
finish shall be done to accommodate the specified thickness.
Material:
The hardening compound shall be uniformly graded iron particles,
free from non-ferrous metal impurities, oil, grease, sand, soluble
alkaline compounds orother injurious materials. When desired by
the Engineer, actual samples shall be tested.
Mix
The underbed for floor and similar horizontal surfaces and for
vertical surface shall be as per clause 6.03.01 of this section.
Proportion of metallic hardener shall be as specified or as indicated
by the manufacturer. However, in absence of any such direction 1
part metallic hardener shall be mixed dry with 4 parts cement, by
weight. To this mixture 6 mm nominal size stone chips shall be
added in proportion of 1 part cement mixed with hardener to 2
parts of stone chips by volume and uniformly mixed. Minimum
quantity of water shall be added to make it workable.
Laying
The concrete floor shall be laid in panels of 1m x 1m or as directed
by the Engineer. Alternate panels shall be laid on one day followed
by the other group of alternate panels the next day. The edges of
the panels shall be supported either by wooden strips or flat angle
iron pieces fixed in position property. The concrete floor shall be
laid upto the required grade. The forms if any shall remain
sufficiently projecting to take the finish. The surface shall be
roughened by wire brush as soon as possible.
The junction of floor and walls, floors and dado or skirting shall be
rounded off as directed.
Attachment 2
Page 200 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
7.05.03
Wooden strips or flat iron pieces shall be removed from their places
before the succeeding alternate layers are laid. The finish shall be
laid while the concrete underbed is still very ‘green’ within about 3
hours of laying of the later. The finish shall be of uniform thickness
and even dense surface without trowel marks, pinhole etc. The
topping layer shall be pressed firmly and worked vigorously and
quickly to secure full bond with the concrete base. Just when the
initial set starts the surface shall be finished and smoothened with
steel trowel. The finish floor shall be cured for 7 days by keeping it
wet.
8.00.00
IPS FLOORING (Concrete Floor finish with floating Coat of Neat
Cement)
It shall consist of an underbed and topping laid on an already laid
and matured concrete base.
Thickness
It shall have thickness of 50 mm for horizontal and 20 mm for
vertical surfaces unless otherwise specified. All junctions between
vertical and horizontal work shall be rounded neatly to a uniform
radius of 25 mm.
8.01.00
8.02.00
8.02.01
8.03.00
8.03.01
8.04.00
8.04.01
8.05.00
Underbed Mix
The underbed for floor and similar horizontal surfaces consists of a
mix of 1 part cement, 2 parts sand and 4 parts stone chips by
volume. For vertical surfaces the mix shall consist of 1 part cement
to 3 parts sand by volume. The sand shall be coarse. The stone
chips shall be 12.5 mm down well graded. Only sufficient water to
be added to give a workable consistency.
Topping Mix
The topping shall be floating coat of neat cement using not less
than 2.2 kg of cement per sq. m. area.
Laying
Attachment 2
Page 201 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
8.05.01
The IPS flooring including the underbed shall be laid in alternate
bays or in chequered board pattern. No panel shall be cast in
contact with another already laid till the contraction of the latter
has already taken place. The maximum area of each panel shall be 5
m x 5m. A cement grout shall be applied and worked in to the
surface to receive the finish, the underbed then laid, compacted and
levelled to proper grade with a screed or float. The requisite slope
as shown in the drawings or directed by the Consultant/Owner
shall also be provided in under bed only maintaining a minimum
thickness of 25 mm at the edges. The topping shall be applied
evenly on the underbed while it is not fully set but firm enough
and rolled and pressed to get full bond. The topping shall be
trowelled to a dense finish to the satisfaction of the Engineer. After
the surface is sufficiently set, the finished floor shall be kept moist
for 7 days for curing.
9.00.00
TERRAZZO TILE FINISH
9.01.00
These shall include terrazzo tiles finish over already laid and
matured base of concrete or masonry by means of underbed
cement : sand (1:4) mortar.
9.02.00
Thickness
9.02.01
The total thickness including the underbed shall be minimum 50
mm for floors and 32 mm for walls unless otherwise specified. The
skirting, dado and similar vertical surfaces shall project out 6 mm
uniformly from the adjacent plaster or other wall finishes. The
necessary cuttings into the surface receiving tiled finish, to
accommodate the specified thickness shall be done.
9.03.00
Terrazzo Tiles
9.03.01
The tiles shall, unless specifically permitted in special cases, be
machine made, under quality control in a shop. The tiles shall be
pressed hydraulically to a minimum of 140 kg. per sq. cm. Each tile
shall bear on its back permanent and legible trade mark of the
manufacturer. All angles of the tiles shall be right angles, all edges
sharp and true, colour and texture of the wearing face uniform
throughout. Tolerance on length, breadth and thickness of tiles
shall be as specified in lS:1237 latest edition. Wearing faces of the
tile shall be plane, free from pinholes and other blemishes.
Attachment 2
Page 202 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
9.03.02
9.03.03
10000011 / HB / 11094
The tiles shall be composed of a backing and topping. The topping
measured as per IS:1237 (latest edition) shall be of uniform
thickness not less than 8 mm. The total thickness including the
topping shall be as specified but not less than 20 mm in any case.
The backing shall be composed of 1 part ordinary grey cement 2
parts of sand and 3 parts of stone chips by weight mixed with
water.
The topping shall be, as specified under Clause 6.03.00 of this
section. The tiles shall be cured at the shop for at least 14 days
before delivery to the site. First grinding shall be given to the tiles
at the shop before delivery. Tiles shall be packed properly to
prevent damage during transit and storage. The tiles must be
stored carefully to prevent staining by damp, rust, oil and grease,
or other chemicals. Tiles made in each batch shall be kept and used
separately so that colour of each area of the floor may remain
uniform. The manufacturer shall supply alongwith the tiles the
grout mix containing cement and pigment in exact proportions as
used in topping of tiles. The container for the grout mix shall be
suitably marked to relate it to the particular type and batch of tiles
9.04.00
Mix : Underbed
9.04.01
9.05.00
The underbed for floor and similar horizontal surfaces shall be 1
parts cement : 2 parts coarse sand : 4 parts stone chips by volume
(12.5 mm nominal size), mixed with sufficient water. For skirting
and dado and all vertical surface it shall be 12 mm thick and
composed of 1 part cement and 3 parts coarse sand by volume.
Laying
9.05.01
The underbed mortar shall be evenly spread and brought to proper
grade and consolidated to a smooth surface. The surface shall be
roughened for better bond. Before the underbed had time to set and
while it is still fairly moist but firm, cement shall be hand dusted
over it or a cement slurry applied and the tiles shall immediately be
placed upon and firmly pressed by wooden mallet on to the
underbed until it achieves the desired level. The tiles shall be kept
soaked for about 10 minutes just before laying. The joints between
tiles shall be as close as possible and not more than 1.5 mm wide.
Special care shall be taken to check the level of the surface and the
lines of the joints frequently so that they are perfect. When tiles are
required to be cut to match the dimensions, these shall be sawn and
edges rubbed smooth. The location of cut tiles shall be planned in
advance and approval of the Consultant/Owner shall be taken.
Attachment 2
Page 203 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
9.05.02
At the junction of horizontal surface with vertical surface the. tiles
on the former shall enter at least 12 mm under the latter. After
fixing, the floor shall be kept moist and allowed to mature
undisturbed for 7 days. Heavy traffic shall not be allowed. If
desired dividing strips as specified under Clause 6.04.00 may be
used for dividing the work into suitable panels.
9.06.00
9.06.01
Procedure shall be same as Clause 6.06.00. Only grinding shall not
10.00.00
10.01.00
10.02.00
10.02.01
10.02.02
10.03.00
10.03.01
commence earlier than 14 days after laying of tiles.
GLAZED TILE FINISH
This finish shall be composed of glazed earthware tiles of approved
make and quality, with an underbed laid over a concrete or
masonry base.
Thickness
The total thickness shall be minimum 20 mm including the
underbed.
The tile finish on vertical surface shall project out 6 mm uniformly
from the adjacent plaster or other wall finishes. The necessary
cutting into surface receiving the finish, to accommodate the
specified thickness shall be done.
Tiles - Glazed
The tiles shall be of earthware, covered with glaze, white or
coloured, plain or with designs, of 150 mm x 150 mm nominal sizes
and 5 mm thick unless otherwise specified.. The tolerance shall be +
1.5 mm for length and breadth and + 0.5 mm for thickness. Specials
like internal and external angle beads, covers, cornices, corner
pieces etc. shall match. The top surface of the tiles shall be glazed
with a gloss or matt unfading stable finish as desired by the
Engineer. The tiles shall be true in shape and size. The colour shall
be uniform and fractured section shall be fine grained in textures,
dense and homogenous. The tiles shall be strong. and free from
flaws like cracks, chips craze, spacks, crawlings etc. and other
imperfections. The edges and the underside of the tiles shall be
completely free from glaze and the underside shall have ribs or
indentations for better anchorage with the fixing mortar. The
coloured tiles, when supplied shall preferably come from one batch
to avoid difference in colour.
Attachment 2
Page204 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
10.04.00
Mix - Underbed
10.04.01
The mix for the under bed shall consist of 1 part cement and 3 parts
coarse sand by weight mixed with sufficient water or any other mix
if specified.
10.05.00
Laying: Same as Clause 9.05.00.
10.06.00
Finishing
10.06.01
The joints shall be cleaned and flush pointed with white cement
and cured for 7 days by keeping it wet. The surface shall be cleaned
with soap or suitable detergent, washed fully and wiped with soft
cloth to prevent scratching before handing over.
PVC TILE FINISH (Rubberised)
11.00.00
11.01.00
This shall include various types of tiles manufactured from rubber,
set with an adhesive on a concrete or masonry base. An underbed
may be required to obtain a satisfactory surface and grade.
11.02.00
Thickness
11.02.01
The thickness of the tiles shall be 3mm unless otherwise specified.
The thickness including underbed shall be 50 mm for floors and 30
mm for walls, unless otherwise specified.
11.03.00
Tiles
11.03.01
Unless otherwise required the tiles shall be square and of approved
dimensions. The tolerance in dimensions shall be +/-1.5 mm.
11.03.02
The face of the tiles shall be free from porosity, blisters, cracks,
embedded foreign matter or other physical defects which affect
appearance or serviceability. All edges shall be cut true and square.
The colour shall be non-fading and uniform in appearance,
insoluble in water and resistant to alkalis, cleaning agents and all
usual floor polishes.
11.04.00
11.04.01
Finishing
If any adhesive marks are present on the surface a soft cloth soaked
in solvent shall be used to wipe them off. The surface shall be
cleaned with soft soap, dried and polished or sealed with an
approved type of polish or sealant just before handling over.
Attachment 2
Page 205 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
12.00.00
ACID RESISTANT TILE FINISH
12.01.00
This finish shall be composed of ceramic unglazed vitreous tiles of
approved make and quality, with an underbed laid over a concrete
or masonry base. The tile are laid with chemical resistant mortars.
12.02.00
Thickness
12.02.01
The total thickness shall be minimum 25 mm including the
underbed.
The tile finish on vertical surface shall project out 12 mm uniformly
from the adjacent plaster or other wall finishes. The necessary
cutting into surface receiving the finish, to accommodate the
specified thickness shall be done.
Tiles – Ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resistant shall generally
conform to IS: 4457.
12.02.02
12.03.00
12.03.01
The tiles shall be of vitreous ware and shall be free from deleterious
substances. The acid resistant shall be determined in accordance
with appendix –F of IS: 4457. The size of tile shall be 150 mm x 150
mm or 200 mm x 200 mm nominal sizes and 12 mm thick unless
otherwise specified.. The tolerance shall be +/- 2.5 % for length,
breadth and thickness. Specials like internal and external angle
beads, covers, cornices, corner pieces etc. shall match. The tiles shall
be true in shape and size. The colour shall be uniform and fractured
section shall be fine grained in textures, dense and homogenous.
The tiles shall be strong. and free from flaws like cracks, chips
craze, spacks, crawlings etc. and other imperfections. The edges
and the underside of the tiles shall be completely free from glaze
and the underside shall have ribs or indentations for better
anchorage with the fixing mortar. The coloured tiles, when
supplied shall preferably come from one batch to avoid difference
in colour.
12.04.00
Mix – Underbed & Mortar
12.04.01
The mix for the under bed and joint filling mortar shall be also of
chemical resistant type conforming to IS: 4441.
12.05.00
Laying: The laying shall be done by approved specialist agency as
per recommendation of manufacturer.
Attachment 2
Page206 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
13.00.00
10000011 / HB / 11094
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
The finish shall be checked specially for
a) Level, slope, plumb as the case may be
b) Pattern, and symmetry
c) Alignment of joints, dividing strips etc.
d) Colour, texture
e) Surface finish
f) Thickness of joints
g) Details of edges, junction etc
h) Performance
i) Precautions specified for durability
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR : SOLING & HARDCORE
1.00.00
GENERAL
1.01.00
The work covered under this specification includes all type of soling work either by rubble stones
laid under floors / hard core under foundations, hand packed, complete as per under mentioned
specification and applicable drawings.
2.00.00
RUBBLE STONE SOLING
2.01.00
The rubble stone shall be of best variety of black trap / granite /
basalt or other approved variety of stone available locally. The
stone shall be hard, durable, free from defects and of required size
and shall be approved by the Engineer in-charge before
incorporation in the work.
2.02.00
Preparation of Surface & laying:
2.02.01
The bed on which rubble soling is to be laid shall be cleared of all
loose materials, levelled, watered and compacted and got approved
by the Engineer In-charge before laying rubble soling. Cable or
pipe trenches if shown in the drawing and as required by the
Engineer in-charge shall be got done before the soling is started.
2.02.02
Over the prepared surface, the stone shall be set as closely as
possible and well packed and firmly set. The stones shall be of full
height and shall be laid so as to have their bases of the largest area
resting on the sub-grade. Soling shall be laid in one layer of 230mm
or 150mm or other specified thickness and no stones shall be less
than 230mm or 150mm depth or specified thickness of soling with a
tolerance of 25mm.
Attachment 2
Page 207 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
2.02.03
After packing the stones properly in position, the interstices between them shall be carefully filled
with quarry spoils of stone chips of larger size possible to obtain a hard, compact surface. Spreading
of loose spoils or stone chips is prohibited.
2.02.04
The entire surface shall be examined for any protrusions and the same shall be knocked off by a
hammer and all interstices shall be filled with approved murrum. Excess murrum if any over the
surfaces shall be removed. Unless otherwise specified, the murrum shall be supplied by the
contractor at his own cost from the selected areas. The surfaces shall then be watered and
consolidated with mechanical or sufficiently heavy wooden tampers and logrammers as approved
by the Engineer in-charge to give the required slope or level and dense sub-base. After compaction,
the surface shall present clean look. Adequate care shall be taken by the contractor while laving and
compacting the rubble soling to see that concrete surfaces in contact with soling are not damaged.
3.00.00
HARD CORE FOR FOUNDATIONS
3.01.00
Where specifically mentioned in the drawings, hard core layer shall
be provided as a preparatory surface to receive blinding concrete/
leveling course.
3.02.01.1 Hard core layer shall comprise of well graded broken stones 80mm
nominal size with the following gradation:
IS Sieve designation
80 mm
63 mm
40 mm
20 mm
10 mm
% passing
100
85-100
0-30
0-5
0-5
3.03.00
The hard broken stones layer shall be directly placed over the
compacted layer of under lying soil in layers. The stones shall be
hand packed and crevices filled with broken stones.
3.04.00
Each layer shall be covered with clean river sand and thoroughly
worked into the crevices with a water jet. Additional layers of sand
shall be placed on top and worked into the void spaces. The
process shall be repeated until no more sand and water get into the
voids.
earth rammer shall be used to compact each layer if directed by
Consultant/Owner.
3.05.00
3.06.00
The thickness and area covered beyond the blinding concrete shall
be as indicated in the drawings or as indicated by
Consultant/Owner.
Attachment 2
Page 208 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
TECHNICAL SPECS FOR DRAINAGE, SANITATION AND WATER
SUPPLY
1.00.00
SCOPE
This section covers the drains/Pipes for foul water, surface water
and sewage together with all fittings and fixtures and inclusive of
ancillary works, such as connections, manholes and inspection
chambers used within the building and from the building to the
connection to Owner’s main sewer line manholes stipulated here or
elsewhere in these specifications The scope is also inclusive of
design supply erection of all the tanks, pipes, fittings etc. required
for the water supply to be taken from the terminal point to the
respective buildings.
2.00.00
INSTALLATION
2.01.00
Surface Drainage
The Contractor shall construct the entire drainage scheme as per
the drawings. Necessary slopes shall be provided in longitudinal
drain.
2.02.0
General
All pipelines, locations of fittings and fixture etc. shall be as per
approved drawings or as directed by the Consultant/Owner.
Correctness of lines, plumb, orientation, symmetry and levels shall
be strictly ensured. All items shall be fully secured against
movement in any direction and so located as to allow maintenance
where desired by the Consultant/Owner.
All pipelines and fittings fixtures shall be installed leak proof.
When the works under scope of this specification connect with
others the connections shall be such as to prevent any splashing or
emission of foul odour and gases.
a) Polyethylene water Tank
Tanks shall meet the requirements of IS: 12701. Virgin HDPE
granules of approval grade, suitable for drinking water shall be
used for making the tank. Carbon black shall be added with the
granules. Tanks shall be single piece, seamless construction,
moulded by rotational moulding. Shape of tank shall be cylindrical
- vertical type with corrugation along the length and bottom of the
Attachment 2
Page 209 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
tank. Tank shall have closed top provided with lid. However, for
storage inside, the rectangular loft tank of approved colour shall be
provided. Tank shall be provided with all fittings for inlet,
overflow, outlet pipes and ball valves including mosquito proof
coupling. Tank shall be leak proof. Tank shall be installed with
proper support and anchorage for installation and it shall be
carried out according to the recommendation of clause No. 13 of IS:
12701-1989.
2.04.0
Rainwater Down Corners
Rainwater down corners shall be standard Cast Iron Pipes
conforming to IS: 1230. Rainwater down corners shall run along
and be secured to wall, column etc. Where desired by the
Consultant/Owner these may have to be installed in chases cut in
the structure. All pipes shall be well secured and supported by
adequately strong brackets. The brackets may be wrought iron
davis type, split ring type or perforated strap iron type as approved
by the Consultant/Owner. For vertical runs each pipe shall hang
freely on its bracket fixed just below the socket. Suitable spacer
shall be provided against the vertical surfaces to which the pipe is
fixed. All bends and junctions shall be supplied with water tight
cleanouts. All horizontal pipes shall have a minimum fall of 1 in
100.
2.06.00 Soil and Drainage Pipes
2.06.01 Gradients
If not specified the minimum gradients of soil and drainage pipe line shall
be as follows
100 mm nominal dia 1 in
35 150 mm nominal dia 1 in 65
230 mm nominal dia 1 in 120
300 mm nominal dia 1 in 200
2.06.02 Relation with Water Supply Pipeline
Under no circumstances, unless specifically cleared by the
Consultant/Owner in special cases, drainage and soil pipes shall be
allowed to come close to water supply pipelines.
Attachment 2
Page 210 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
2.06.03
Laying
Each separate pipe shall be individually set for line, level, plumb
etc. Where lengths of sewer or drain pipes are laid in trench,
properly painted sight-rails shall be fixed across the trench at a
height, equal to length of the boning rod to be used, above the
required invert level of the drain or sewer at the point, where the
sight is fixed. More sight rails shall be required at manholes,
changes of gradient and intermediate positions if the distance of
sighting is too far, which shall not be more than 15.0 m apart. The
excavation shall be boned in at least once in every 1.8 m. The foot of
the boning rod shall be set on a block of wood of the exact thickness
of the wall of the pipe. Each pipe shall be separately and accurately
boned between sight rails.
2.06.04
For water pipelines, meticulous care shall be taken to avoid chances
of airlock and water hammer. The layout of pipe work shall be such
that there is no possibility of backflow towards the source of supply
from any cistern appliances whether by siphonage or otherwise.
Where desired by the Consultant/Owner, pipes shall be concealed
in masonry or concrete of the structure. Chases, openings, conduits
as necessary shall be cut or left in the masonry or concrete. Clamps
and fittings shall be as per the standard practice and approved by
the Consultant/Owner.
2.06.05
Support and Protection to Pipelines
All drainage and sewer pipes shall be laid with socket leading
uphill. Preferably the pipes shall rest on solid and even foundations
for the full length of the barrel. However, the pipe manufacturer’s
instructions as approved by the Consultant/Owner shall be
followed in the matter of support and jointing. Cast Iron pipes and
concrete pipes may be supported on suitable concrete or brick
support, where specified. The supports shall be unyielding and
strong enough. At least one support shall be located close to each
joint. Spacing of intermediate supports shall be as desired by
Consultant/Owner. Pipes shall be secured to the supports by
approved means.
Anchoring of pipes where necessary shall be achieved by suitable
concrete encasing designed for the expected thrust.
Attachment 2
Page 211 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
2.06.06
10000011 / HB / 11094
Entry Into Structures
For entry of the pipelines into any building or structures suitable
conduits under the structures, or sleeves shall be used. The
conduits and sleeves shall be such as to allow easy repair and
replacement of the pipes. When openings or chases are required to
be made in the structure for entry of pipelines, locations and sizes
shall be marked and checked by the Consultant/Owner. After
laying of the pipeline the openings and chases shall be mended.
2.06.07 Ducts
Where solid, waste and ventilating pipes are accommodated in
ducts, access to cleaning eyes shall be provided. Connection to
drain shall be through a gully with sealed cover to guard against
ingress of sewer gas, vermin or backflow.
2.06.08
Traps and Ventilating Pipes
Pipes for carrying of the waste from water closets and waste water
and overflow water from baths, wash basins, sinks to drains shall
be trapped immediately beneath such fixtures. Traps shall have
minimum water seal of 50 mm and shall be ventilated whenever
such ventilation in necessary to maintain water seal of the trap.
Ventilating pipes shall be carried up vertically from the drain to a
height of at least 600 mm above the outer covering of the roof of the
building or as shown on drawings. All vertical ventilating, antisyphonage and similar pipe shall be covered on top with a cowl.
The cowl shall be made of C.I.
2.06.09
Manholes and Inspection Chambers
The maximum distance between manholes shall be 30 metres
unless specially permitted otherwise. In addition, at every change
of alignment, gradient or diameter there shall be a manhole or
inspection chamber. The distance between manhole or inspection
chamber and gully chamber shall not exceed 6 metres unless
desired otherwise. Manhole shall be constructed so as to be
watertight under test. The benching at the sides shall be carried out
in such a manner as to prevent lodgment for any splashing in case
of accidental flashing of the chamber. The channel or drain at the
bottom of chamber shall be plastered with 1:2 cement sand mortar
and finished smooth to the grade. The channels and drains shall be
shaped and laid to provide smooth flow.
Connection to existing sewer lines shall be through a manhole.
Manholes shall be provided with C.I. standard covers. The covers
shall be close fitting so as to prevent gases from coming out.
Attachment 2
Page 212 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
2.06.10
10000011 / HB / 11094
Jointing
Jointing of laid pipes shall be so planned as to avoid completely
any movement or strain to the joints already made. If any joint is
suspected to be damaged it shall be opened out and redone.
All joints between pipes, pipe fittings and manholes shall be
gastight when above ground and watertight when underground.
Method of jointing shall be as per instruction of the pipe and
fittings manufacturer and as approved by the Consultant/Owner.
However in the absence of any instruction available from the
manufacturer, methods as detailed hereunder shall be used.
a) Cast Iron Pipes
Socket and spigot pipes shall be joined by cast lead joints. The
spigot shall be centered in the socket of the next pipe by tightly
caulking in sufficient turns of tarred gasket or hemp yarn to have
unfilled half the depth of socket. When the gasket or hemp yarn has
been caulked tightly, a jointing ring shall be placed round the
barrel and tightened against the face of the socket to prevent
airlock. Molten lead shall then be poured in to fill the remainder of
the socket and caulked with suitable. tools right round the joint to
make up for shrinkage of the molten metal on cooling and shall be
finished 3 mm behind the socket face.
In special cases if flanged joints are accepted by the
Consultant/Owner, the joints shall be made leak proof by inserting
approved type of rubber or other gasket not less than 1.5 mm thick.
The bolts shall be secured in stages to avoid uneven strain.
Damaged gasket shall be replaced.
b) G.I. Pipes
Threads shall be cut with sharp tools, and before jointing, all scales
shall be removed from pipes by suitable means. The screw threads
of the pipe shall be cleaned out and the joints made by screwing the
fittings after treating the threads with approved pipe jointing
compound. Once a joint has been screwed up it shall not be backed
off unless the threads are re-cleaned and new compound applied.
c)
Glazed Stoneware Pipes
Tarred gasket or hemp yarn soaked in thick cement slurry shall
first be placed round the spigot of each pipe and the spigot
Attachment 2
Page 213 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
2.09.00
Installation
All plumbing fittings and fixtures shall be installed in most
workman like manner by skilled workers. Those shall be prefect in
level, plumb, plane, locations and symmetry. All items shall be
securely anchored to wall and floors. All cuttings in walls and
floors shall be made good by the Contractor.
3.00.00
TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
3.01.00
All pipes, fittings and fixtures shall be inspected, before delivery at
the site to see whether they conform to accepted standards. The
frequency of testing and sampling as given Table - I of this Section,
The pipes shall again be inspected on site before laying by
sounding to disclose cracks. All defective items shall be clearly
marked and forthwith removed from the site.
3.02.00
Testing of Pipelines for Drainage & Sanitation
Comprehensive test of all pipe lines shall be made by simulating
conditions of use. The method of actual tests shall be decided by
the Consultant/Owner. All test date shall be recorded and
submitted to the Consultant/Owner for review and Instruction.
The Consultant/Owner’s discretion regarding tolerance shall be
final. General guidance for the test are given below :a) Smoke Test
All soil pipes, waste pipes, vent pipes & all other pipes when above
ground shall be approved gas tight by a smoke test conducted
under a pressure of 25 mm of water and maintained for 15 minutes
after all trap seals have been filled with water. The smoke is
produced by burning oily waste or tar paper of similar material in
the combustion chamber of a smoke machine. Chemical smoke is
not allowed.
b) For Straightness
i) It shall be checked by inserting at the high end of the sewer or
drain a smooth ball of a diameter 1.3 mm less than the pipe
bore. In the absence of obstruction, such as yarn or mortar
projecting through the joints, the ball will roll down the invert
of the pipe and emerge at the lower end; and
ii) By means of mirror at one end of the line and lamp at the other end. If
the pipeline is straight, the full circle of light may be observed. The
mirror will also indicate obstruction in the barrel if the pipeline is not
straight.
Attachment 2
Page214 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
3.03.00
Testing of Water Mains after Laying After laying and jointing, the main
shall be slowly and carefully charged with water, so that all air is expelled
from the main, by providing 25 mm inlet with a stop-cock, allowed to
stand full of water for a few days if time permits, and then tested under
pressure. The test pressure shall be 5 Kg/sqcm. or double the maximum
working pressure, whichever is greater. The pressure shall be applied by
means of a manually operated test pump, or in the case of long mains or
mains of a large diameter by a power driven test pump provided that the
pump is not left unattended. In either case due precaution shall be taken to
ensure that the required test pressure is not exceeded. Pressure gauges
shall be accurate and shall preferably have been recalibrated before the
test. The pump having been stopped, the test pressure shall maintain itself
without measurable loss for at least five minutes. The end of the mains
shall be closed by fitting a watertight expanding plug and plug shall be
secured by struts to resist end thrust of the water pressure in the mains.
3.04.00
Testing of Service Pipes and Fittings The service pipes shall be slowly and
carefully charged with water allowing all air to escape avoiding all shock
or water hammer.
3.05.00
Fixture etc.
All fixtures and fittings shall be connected by Water tight joints. No
dripping shall be accepted.
4.00.0
IS CODES
Some of the applicable Indian Standards, Codes are referred to here
below: Latest editions shall always be referred.
IS :
1172 Basic requirements for water supply, drainage and sanitation.
IS
1200 (Part-XVI) Laying of water and sewer line including
appurtenant items.
(Part-XIX) Waters supply, plumbing and drains.
IS 1239 (Pt. I & II) Mild Steel Tubes and Mild Steel Tubulars and other wrought
Steel Pipe fittings.
IS 3486 Cast Iron Spigot and Socket drain pipes
IS : 3589 Electrically welded steel pipe for water, gas and sewage (200 mm to
2000 mm nominal diameter).
IS : 1537 Vertically cast iron pressure pipe for water, gas and sewage.
Attachment 2
Page 215 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
IS : 1742 Code of practice for building drainage.
IS : 5329 Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for building
IS : 1538 Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
IS : 1230 Cast iron rainwater pipes and fittings.
IS : 1729 Sand cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes,
fittings and accessories.
IS : 1626 Asbestos cement building pipes, gutters.
IS : 2065 Code of practice for water supply in building.
IS : 1726 Cast iron manhole covers and frames intended for use in drainage
works.
IS : 5961 Cast iron gratings for drainage purposes. IS : 5219 (Part - I) ‘P’ and
‘S” traps, cast copper alloy traps
IS : 771 Glazed fire dry sanitary appliances
IS : 772 General requirements of enameled cast iron sanitary appliances
IS : 774 Flushing cistern for water closets and urinals (Valve less Siphonic
type)
IS : 775 Cast iron brackets and supports for wash basin and sinks.
IS : 2548 Plastic water closet seats and covers.
IS: 2527 Code of practice for fixing -‘rainwater gutters and downpipes for roof
drainage.
IS :1068 Chromium plating
IS: 1073 Ball valves including floats for water supply purpose.
Attachment 2
Page 216 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
LIST OF RECOMMENDED MAKES/ MANUFACTURERS
1.00.00 GENERAL
1.01.00
The makes and manufacturers shall be preferably from the following list. In case the same is not
available in the market or incase of change in trade name, equivalent makes/ re-designated
manufacturer shall be used with the approval of Consultant/Owner.
In case of items not covered in the list, the material shall be best available in the market and each item should have BIS
certification mark.
Description
Manufacturers
1 TILES
7
i) Terrazzo and cement tiles
M/s. NITCO; M/S. NEC; M/S. BHARAT
M/s. NIMCO; M/S. G.K.BANSAL
M/s. MAHAL
ii) White glazed tiles
M/s. H R Johnson; M/s. Parasuram Pottery
works Ltd, M/s. Somani Pilkington , Kajaria,
iii) PVC tiles
M/s. Bhor, M/s. Premier Vinyl Flooring Ltd
2
METALLIC
HARDENR
FLOOR
:
M/s. Triveni Color Industries (Floornate)
M/s. Heatly & Gresham (India) Ltd
M/s. De-Rust Chemical Corporation of inida
(Ferronite)
M/s. Cement Research Corporation Pvt Ltd.
(Stilonite)
3
WOODEN
DOORS
/BLOCK : BOARDS /
PLYWOOD/PARTICLE
BOARD
M/s. Indian Plywood Mfg. Co. Ltd
M/s. Kit Ply Industries Ltd; M/s. Nuboard
M/s. Sitapur, M/s. Kutty Flush Doors
M/s. Mysore Plywood Ltd; M/s. Gee Doors
M/s. Shankar Ramachandra & Brothers, Pune
M/s. Joinery Manufacturer; M/s Northern
Doors
M/s. Wood Designs, Bangalore
M/s. Wood India, Calcutta; M/s Sejpal &
Others
M/s Pioneer Timber product, Chandigarh or
equivalent approved manufacturer
M/s. Sen Harvic; M/s AGEW; M/s Sentianal
M/s. Hopes Metal; M/s. Multiwyn or equivalent
approved manufacturer
4
STEEL DOORS & WINDOWS
5
ROLLING SHUTTERS
M/s. SwastikRollling Shutters & Engg. Co. (P) Ltd
M/s Hercules Rolling Shutters & Engg Works or
equivalent approved manufacturer
6
ALUMINIUM DOORS, WINDOWS,
WALL SPANS
M/s. Ajit India; M/s. Alumilite; M/s. Indal; M/s. Jindal;
M/s. Jupiter Windows
GLASS :
(Plain/Frosted,
Bajra etc.)
M/s Triveni:
M/s Shree Vallabh:
Garless,
M/s Asahi Or equivalent approved
manufacturer
Attachment 2
Page217 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
8
HARDWARE FITTINGS & FIXTURES:
10.
WATERSTOPS:
(PVC/RUBBER)
11.
EXPANSION JOINT AND
TARFELT WATERPROOFING
12.
INTEGRAL WATER:
PROOFING COMPOUND
CEMENT BASED:
WATERPROOFING TREATMENT
13.
10000011 / HB / 11094
M/s Jayant Metal Manufacturing Co.
M/s Shalimar Hardware.
M/s Everite.
M/s Garnish Traders:
M/s Saifec Tube & hardware mart:
M/s Tahil Sons:
M/s Diamond Hardware;
M/s Navbhara;
M/s Zacfa; M/s Safe Enterprises;
M/s Hardwyn Traders;
M/s Godrej & Boyce mfg. Ltd.
M/s Des Lock Industries;
M/s Explorer Engineers (P) Ltd. or equivalent approved
manufacturer.
M/S Omai Plastics (P) Ltd.
M/s Basecon; M/s Pask;
M/s Asian Engg. Products;
M/s RC Enterprises;
M/s Capnhans India Ltd;
M/s Fixopan Engrs. Pvt. Ltd. or equivalent approved
manufacturer.
M/s Shalitex; M/s Tiki Tar industries;
M/s STP Ltd. (Ms Shalimar Tar Products);
M/s Lloyd Insulation (I)
Or equivalent approved manufacturer.
Accoproof, Cico; Impermo
Or equivalent approved manufacturer.
M/s India Waterproofing Co.;
M/s All India Waterproofing Co;
M/s Likproof India Pvt. Ltd.;
M/s Modern Waterproofing Co.;
M/s Nina Industries.
14.
PAINTS AND VARNISH
15.
CEMENT BASED:
M/s Snowcem India ltd. (Super Snowcem,
WATER PRO OF PAINTS & RESIN SandtexMatt);
BASED THERMO PLASTIC PAINTS
M/s Nitco Paints Pvt. Ltd. (Nitcocent);
M/s Hindustan Colour Chemical Industries;
M/s Terraco (Terraccin & Terracoat);
M/s Jayant Colour & Chemicals Industries;
M/s Surfa Coat Pvt. Ltd. or equivalentapproved
manufacturer.
M/s Asian Paints; M/s Goodlas Nerolac; M/s Garware
Paints Ltd.;
M/s I.C.I. Paints; M/s BergerPaints; M/s Jenson
Nicholson;
Attachment 2
Page 218 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
16.
PRESSED STEEL DOOR:
FRAMES
17
18
FALSE CEILING / PANELING
DECORATIVE LAMINATES
19
PVC/ FRP DOORS
20
DOOR CLOSERS
21
SEALANTS
22
CONCRETE PAVER BLOCKS
23
SANITARY APPLIANCES
24
CP BRASS FITTINGS
10000011 / HB / 11094
M/s Sen Harvic;
M/s Techome;
M/s Nishan Solid door frames (Solidor);
M/s Anjali Enterprises;
M/s Sunbeam
M/s Madhu Industries, Bangalore or equivalent
approved manufacturer.
Decolam,
Formica &
Rammica
Rajashri plastic,
Thermodeck
Everite,
GoleterEngineering,
Amar,
A.K.Industries,
Hardiwyn,
Vigvijay,
Dewan Industries
GE Silicon,
Bostik
Basant Belton,
Adideep Interlock Pavers, PVt. Ltd.,
Pave Stone Marketting (P) Ltd.,
Designers Pavings & Tiles Pvt. Ltd.,
Bessers Concrete Paver Blocks.
Parraware, Hindustan
Jaquar MBM,
GEM, Techno,
Lalsons Neta, Plumber
Attachment 2
Page 219 of 219
REFERENCE NO:
10000011 / HB / 11094
25
CP BRASS WASTE Jaquar, ESSO,
COUPLING, BOTTLE GEM, Kingston,
TRAPS
26
27
28
29
PVC flushing cisterns
Mirror
Plastic sheet and cover
Stainless Sink
Hindustan
Pilkinton, Modigaurd, Asahi
38
Nirali,
Dayana,
AMC, etc.
GI Pipes
ITC, TATA, Jindal
Zenith,
Ambica
GI Mallable fittings
PEC,
MJM.
Bimal
GM
gate/
Globe Neta,
valves
Sant,
NEW
Ball Valves
MBM,
A-I (js),
Techno
CI water quality pipes
CI soil quality pipes
IISCO, Neco
SW Pipes & Gulley Perfect, Kashmira, or approved equivalent
traps
RCC Hume Pipes
Indian Hume Pipes,]
Pranali Premier
HDPE Pipes & fittings Prince, Gautam
39
40
41
42
CPVC pipes & fittings
Modular floors
CI manhole covers
PVC storage tanks
43
CEMENT
ACC,
BIRLA
PLUSGUJARAT
AMBHUJA
RAJASHREE, ZUARI, L&T (ULTRA TECH
CEMENT)
44
REINFORCEMENT
STEEL
45
ADMIXTURES
SAIL,
TATA STEEL,
RINIL
FOSROC,
SIKA,
ROFF,
Krishna concem
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Sintex, Century, Polycon

Scope of Job - Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited

Transcription

Similar documents

GranQuartz - Ameripolish

Every Day Counts in Improving Mobility: A l d B id C i Every Day

Uncle Bob

Mud Hopper™

GranQuartz

Concrete Sound Barrier Broucher

Thin-Set - Bomanite of Wisconsin

Viktoria

RMC